JP2022040349A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine for performing variation display of a symbol and notifying a player of a winning/losing of a lottery according to a stop mode of the symbol includes performance execution means capable of executing a first performance of moving multiple first images in a first direction and a second performance of moving multiple second images in a second direction different from the first direction in parallel.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 90

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of performing a display effect using a display device when a gaming ball wins a prize at the starting port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-202930 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application Example 1]
It is a gaming machine that displays fluctuations in the symbol and notifies the winner of the lottery according to the stop mode of the symbol.
Execution of an effect that can be executed in parallel with a first effect of moving a plurality of first images in a first direction and a second effect of moving a plurality of second images in a second direction different from the first direction. Equipped with means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Application example 2]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1
The effect executing means moves a plurality of third images in either the first effect or the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Application example 3]
The gaming machine according to the application example 1 or the application example 2.
The effect executing means can intermittently execute the first effect during the variable display of the symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Application example 4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 3.
The effect executing means can continuously execute the second effect during the variable display of the symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Application Example 5]
The gaming machine according to the application example 4.
When all of the symbols are stopped and displayed, the effect executing means stops the execution of the first effect and the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Application example 6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 5.
The effect executing means can execute a third effect of moving the second image in a third direction before executing the first effect and the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the determination table T1 to T4. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is the 2nd flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the advance determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of the basic effect pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up production pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during the variation production. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the movement mode of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the display effect of a sub-display screen 64. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol mode change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol mode change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol mode change effect C. It is explanatory drawing of the notification effect A per effect mode suggestion image. It is explanatory drawing of the notification effect B per effect mode suggestion image. It is explanatory drawing of the notification effect C per effect mode suggestion image. It is a figure for demonstrating the movement symbol mode change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the movement symbol mode change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the movement symbol mode change effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the detached mode symbol movement effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the detached mode symbol movement effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the detached mode symbol movement effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol number difference change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol number difference change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol number difference change effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect symbol superimposition effect A, B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect symbol superimposition effect C, D. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect symbol superimposition effect E, F. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect symbol change effect A, B. It is a figure for demonstrating effect symbol change effect C, D. It is a figure for demonstrating effect symbol change effect E, F. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol posture change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol posture change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol posture change effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the band image display effect A, B. It is a figure for demonstrating the band image display effect C, D. It is a figure for demonstrating the band image display effect E, F. It is a figure for demonstrating the special orbit variation effect A, B. It is a figure for demonstrating the special orbit variation effect C, D. It is a figure for demonstrating the special orbit variation effect E, F. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit symbol movement effect A, B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit symbol movement effect C, D. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit symbol movement effect E, F. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol mode change effect A, B. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol mode change effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol mode change effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating group notice continuous production A, B. It is a figure for demonstrating group notice continuous production C, D. It is a figure for demonstrating group notice continuous production E, F. It is a figure for demonstrating a plurality of image movement effects A, B. It is a figure for demonstrating a plurality of image movement effects C, D. It is a figure for demonstrating a plurality of image movement effects E, F. It is a figure for demonstrating effect mode selection effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating effect mode selection effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating effect mode selection effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the separation | combination production A of the effect symbol. It is a figure for demonstrating the separation | combination production B of the production symbol. It is a figure for demonstrating the separation | combination production C of a production pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the character suggestion effect A straddling a plurality of fluctuations. It is explanatory drawing of the character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations. It is explanatory drawing of the character suggestion effect C straddling a plurality of fluctuations. It is the first figure for demonstrating the melody-related production. It is the 2nd figure for demonstrating the melody-related production. It is a 3rd figure for demonstrating a melody-related production.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of the gaming machine FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described so as to coincide with the left-right direction seen by the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a gaming ball based on a player's launch operation, and when the gaming ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. be. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and has a handle 60, a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, the effect button 63, the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U), the sword member 65, the frame lamp 66, the speaker 67, and the like. It is equipped with a frame movable body 69. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. On the right and left sides of the handle 60, a movable frame movable body 69 (also referred to as a frame movable accessory 69), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The frame movable body 69 is configured so that two members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60 can be moved in the left-right direction. Each of the two members is made of a flexible flat plate-like member, and is configured such that the main surface moves toward and away from the handle 60. Normally, the frame movable body 69 is stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60 on the left side and the right side of the handle 60, and moves (advances) so as to approach each other from the retracted position toward the handle 60. ) And can stand still at the position where it touches the handle 60. The frame movable body 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60 when the frame movable body 69 is in the advanced position.

The hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores the game ball. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores the game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of the effect executed with the progress of the game. A vibration motor is arranged inside the effect button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate up, down, left, and right according to the effect and the like. The sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L are arranged at a paired position via the game board 2. The upper sub display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, and is arranged above the front frame 53 to produce light emission during a game or the like. The right frame lamp is an oblique linear light emitting unit arranged between the upper sub display screen 64U and the right sub display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is an oblique linear light emitting unit arranged between the upper sub display screen 64U and the left sub display screen 64L. The speaker 67 is arranged on the upper left side and the upper right side of the front frame 53, and produces sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and a fixed winning device (navel) 19. , Ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22, gate (through chucker) 28, first big winning device (first attacker) 31, second big winning device (second attacker) 36, big winning opening open It is provided with a starting port 17, a general winning port 27 (ordinary winning port 27), an out port 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end portion of the game area 3, and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the panel lamp 5 is connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and is configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image display in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a reserved digestion image display area (the reserved digestion display area) on which the reserved digestion image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also referred to as hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as the hold image 9C, the hold icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may also be simply referred to as a hold icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. A medium effect symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of, for example, a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, if a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublets such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a random eye such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the mode of variable display of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or another mode. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "variable effect of the effect symbol", "variable effect of the decorative symbol", or simply "variable effect" and "variable display". In this decorative symbol variation effect, the effect in the period from the start to the stop of the special symbol variation (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change to the stop of the special symbol, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the effect of the change of the decorative symbol.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect pattern variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved image 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of stored images for the second special figure reserved described later. Includes a second hold display area. By displaying the hold images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a described later and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b are displayed. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the hold digestion image 9C, the first special symbol hold or the first 2 It is possible to display to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure hold is digested (“digestion of the special figure hold” described later).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a vertically long rod-shaped member can move in the left-right direction in front (front surface) of the image display device 7. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, and moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a to display the display screen 7a. It can stand still at any advance position in front of. The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have substantially the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and covers a part of the image display device 7 from above to below at the advanced position.

On the upper side of the image display device 7, a movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO" can be moved in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves downward (advances) from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed at the lower portion of the image display device 7. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7. The warp portion 12 includes an inlet portion into which the game ball flows in and an outlet portion in which the game ball flows out, and the game ball flowing in from the inlet portion is discharged from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. A mouth, a fixed starting port) 20 is provided. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a big hit random number or the like and determining a big hit.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 is provided with a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 may be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, and the second starting port 21 should be in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for acquiring a normal symbol random number (hit random number) and determining a hit.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. This is a process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to the "big hit". The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but a variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is performed. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbols are variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

Further, in the "ordinary symbol lottery", when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means a process of determining whether or not it is a hit. Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and determines a predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and is the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening / closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). The first large winning opening 30 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large winning device 31 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first large winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening / closing member 71, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the first prize winning device 31 through which a game ball that has passed through the first prize opening 30 can pass. .. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball to the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball to the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the V region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. .. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70, for example. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. It may be configured to be (second state). In the gaming machine 1, the passage of the gaming ball into the V region 39 triggers the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probabilistic operating port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probabilistic actuation port. The first prize-winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first prize-winning device 31. The first large winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 meet downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35. It is equipped with. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

The large winning opening opening opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes through. However, the gaming machine 1 does not have to be provided with the large winning opening opening start opening 17.

The general winning opening 27 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3. The out opening 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning openings is discharged to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left-handed". On the other hand, a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize in the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The ordinary symbol display 42 variably displays the ordinary symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operations hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 as an opportunity. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as an opportunity. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , Big hit lottery) results will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 will have an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left, 1 and 2. , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost pattern. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The variable display mode is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the value (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number acquired for the winning is , Is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the prize is won in the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is in the second starting port 21. , Is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in the present embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special figure hold" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and execute variable display of a special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. Even if there is a prize during the middle or special game execution, the right to the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of special figure hold is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then displaying the stop. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (normal symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a hit, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss pattern with only the right LED lit, such as "● ○", is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. As for the mode of variable display, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The variable display mode is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is set as the normal figure hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5). It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine a normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of normal figure hold.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. As the sensors connected via the relay board 88, the large winning opening open start opening sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, and the first Two major winning opening sensors 35a, a V area sensor 39a, a non-V area sensor 70a, and ordinary winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric chew solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The large winning opening open start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large winning opening open start opening 17, and detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening open start opening 17. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects a game ball that has passed through the inside of the normal winning opening 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. The V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-opening / closing member 71 of the first prize-winning device 31.

Display units 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. The display control of the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and also receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental payout device 130 pays out the ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114, and detects the rotation amount of the handle 60 by the firing volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. CPU 92 and. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via the input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols Etc. (including effect symbols) and image data such as background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, or may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. .. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69, and follows the operation pattern data. The operation of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 is controlled. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be allowed to execute lamp lighting control or operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern in the ROM.

An effect button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. Further, a vibration motor is attached to the effect button detection switch 63a, which can be driven in response to a signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the effect button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. In addition, a sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been investigated is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. 3. Data structure of the gaming machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. The determination table T6, the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a pre-determination command, a hold ball count command, and a command. A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the game machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, and the like. The ceiling flag, V flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. The special figure hold storage area 85 includes a first special figure hold storage area 85a in which the first special figure hold is stored and a second special figure hold storage area 85b in which the second special figure hold is stored. In the first special figure hold storage area 85a, a random number value group (holding information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure hold is stored. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. In the second special figure hold storage area 85b, the first random value group (holding information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure hold is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal figure hold storage area 86 stores a random number value group (holding information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal figure hold. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for the purpose. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer or the like is provided. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the state of the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and hold information does not change even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by the ram clear of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flag. Further, as the initial state of the counter, "500" is set in the ceiling counter, and "0" is set in the other counters.

The sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. .. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball count command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area (described later) in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub control main process (described later). It is an output buffer), and a variable effect start command, a variable effect pre-end command, a variable effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. , Ceiling effect counter, evening effect counter, probability variation effect counter, time saving effect counter, etc. are set. Of the information stored in the sub RAM 94, except for the evening-over effect counter, the information is not cleared and is maintained as it is even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the state of the above command, the counter other than the evening effect counter, and the pre-judgment information does not change even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The evening-over effect counter is reset by turning the power of the gaming machine 1 off and on, and 0 is set as the initial state. The information stored in the sub RAM 94 is reset by the ram clear of the gaming machine 1. When reset, 500 is set in the ceiling effect counter and 0 is set in the other counters as the initial state of the counter.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "big hit random number", a "big hit type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at the timing described later. It is configured as follows. The "big hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big hit determination) for whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "big hit type random number" is a random number used for the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning jackpot type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed out of a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of effect symbols indicating a big hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "ordinary symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 is performed. Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random number value group acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 21 is stored. The second special figure is stored in the reserved storage area 85b. The "ordinary symbol random number (hit random number)" is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “look-ahead effect random number” and a “chance-up random number” at a timing described later. The “look-ahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the fact that the pre-determination command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8C shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. Is shown a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "missing". It is a table referred to for judgment. In FIG. 8A, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164” in the “normal probability state”, it is determined as “big hit”, and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 164” (165 to 65535). ) ”, It is shown that it is determined to be“ lost ”. Further, in the "high probability state", when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined as "big hit", and when the jackpot random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)". Is shown to be determined to be "missing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In FIG. 8B, when the reach random value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined to be "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined as "with reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)". Is shown to be determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is less likely that the reach in the time-shortened state will be reached in the lost time state than in the non-time-shortened state. This is to accelerate the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "missing". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether to do so. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 2" in the "non-time saving state", it is determined as "hit" and the normal symbol random value is a numerical value other than "0 to 2 (3). In the case of "~ 255)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Further, in the "time saving state", when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined. , It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is in the main control main process (described later) according to the game state (non-time reduction state or time reduction state). It is a table referenced to do so. In FIG. 8D, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds" in the "non-time reduction state", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" in the "time reduction state". It is shown that.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 has a "big hit type" and a "special symbol" according to the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type". In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure The stop symbol of 1 (special stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passing jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled to pass jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 4". When the jackpot type random value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is won, if the big hit type random value is "0 to 82", the big hit type is determined to be "16RV planned passing big hit", and the special figure 2 shows. The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game are used. "Command" can also be specified. About the specific contents of "16RV planned jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). .. In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "with reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~ 2 ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is“ 0 to 60 ”, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be“ P7 ”. In FIG. 11, for example, a prize is won in the second starting port 21 in a time saving state, it is determined as "big hit" in the jackpot determination table T1, and it is determined as "16RV planned passage jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5, and the fluctuation pattern random value. When is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production that has a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to SP3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be the “opening pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the opening pattern is determined to be the “opening pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. It is shown that. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per opening and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (prescribed number of winnings, maximum of 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the game control microcomputer 81, in the main control main process (described later), the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 has the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is “opening pattern 21”. When the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", "22H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H", the open pattern is released. It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and once at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds will be opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th rounds, and once at the 14th and 16th rounds, the opening time is set. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th round, the opening number is once and the first big winning opening 30 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is opened (short opening). .. In the opening pattern 23, the first large winning opening 30 is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. At the 14th round, the opening time is 1 time and the opening time. Open the 2nd big winning opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, open the 2nd big winning opening 35 once, opening time 29.5 seconds (long opening). .. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 is possible even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (prescribed number of prizes, maximum 9). It will be closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special symbol stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined to be “opening pattern 31”, and the special symbol stop symbol is determined. When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33", and the special symbol stop symbol data is When it is "15H" or "22H", it is shown that the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first prize opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is set. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. At the 8th and 10th rounds, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, and the opening time is when the second prize is won. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 has the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and the second winning is given. When the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a long time with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 has the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. ..

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big hits" and "losses" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a big hit is won, the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 and 2nd big winning opening 35) is opened with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of big hit) that is stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The "V-passing scheduled jackpot" operates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V-opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 14H and 21H corresponds to the "V passage scheduled jackpot (probability variation jackpot)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33). ) Or (Open pattern 23: Open pattern 32), the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the opening / closing member 37. It is a big hit that operates the V opening / closing member 71. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H corresponds to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region during the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through 39. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 37 also serve as a V-passing scheduled opening pattern and a V-non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V-passing jackpot" includes "16RV-passing jackpot", "16R (actual 13R) V-passing jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot". The actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big winning opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "16R (actual 13R) V-passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The total number of rounds of the "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot" is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the actual total number of rounds is 13. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it is a round in which a prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 It is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above explanation, "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening / closing pattern 32 and the opening / closing member 37) are the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). As will be described later, "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are such that the time-saving game (100 times in this example) is performed after the jackpot game is completed. It has become. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing big hit", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30, and the gaming state after the big hit is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot" makes it possible for the game ball to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first prize-winning opening 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy and high base state). From this, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled jackpot", and the gaming state after the jackpot is low. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or the high accuracy time saving state (high accuracy high base state) is reached. In addition, after the short-time game is completed, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state) in the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing big hit", and the game state in the "16R (real 13R) V passing planned big hit". However, it looks like a high-accuracy and low-base state in the normal state. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state is changed. It is a latent state (latent probability change state) that the high probability is high even though it is a high probability low base state, and it is difficult for the player to discriminate this latent probability change state. That is, "16R (real 13R) V non-passing big hit", "16R (real 13R) V non-passing big hit", "16R (real 13R) V non-passing big hit" big hit Low probability after the game (low probability) High base state) and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing big hit" big hit High accuracy time saving state after the game (high accuracy high base state), and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing big hit" time saving end The later low-accuracy low-base state and the high-accuracy low-base state after the end of the time reduction of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" are performed in a mode that is difficult for the player to discriminate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing jackpot and 60 / for the V non-passing jackpot. It is 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing jackpot and 45/128 (about) for the V non-passing jackpot. 35.2%). In this way, in the game machine 1, the big hit is performed by winning the game ball in the second starting port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the game ball is won in the first starting opening 20. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous to the player.

5. Explanation of the gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability fluctuation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variation state)", and the probability fluctuation The uncontrolled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbol. A high-probability state is realized by making a jackpot judgment. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increases.

Further, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply "non-time reduction state". That is. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time reduction state in the time reduction state. Judge the fluctuation pattern used. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the variable time shortening control is not executed. It becomes easier to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. This makes it possible to aim for a big hit with the smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 has a normal symbol collision detection table T3 (in which the number of normal symbol random values (win random value) determined to be a hit is larger in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state as the probability fluctuation control of the normal symbol. A hit determination (determination of a normal symbol) is performed using FIG. 8 (C). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol will be the winning symbol is high. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the control for increasing the number of times of opening with respect to the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. Compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball is more frequently won in the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more easily released than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the jackpot scheduled to pass V is a high probability state, a short time state, and a high base state if the passage to the V region 39 is made during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state" or a "high accuracy time saving state". Specifically, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9, the jackpots in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes a high-accuracy high-base state are "16RV scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot", and " 16R (actually 13R) V scheduled to pass the jackpot. " For "16RV passing jackpot" and "16R (actually 15R) V passing jackpot", in the high accuracy high base state, after the jackpot game, the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. Ends with. In the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing jackpot", in the high-accuracy high-base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), and the high-accuracy low-base state (latent probability change). It ends when it becomes a state) or when the next big hit (next big hit) is won and the big hit game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never done). It is a state (that is, a low-probability state), a short-time state, and a high-base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy high base state" and a "low accuracy time saving state". Specifically, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes the low probability high base state is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot". In this jackpot, in the low probability high base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. It ends when the game is executed. When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low probability non-time saving state (simply also referred to as a non-time saving state)". Further, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Further, a state controlled by at least one of a high probability state and a high base state may be referred to as a "specific gaming state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 compared to the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. be. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the gate 28, which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the second starting port 21 to win a prize. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. In the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. Since the electric support control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the second starting port 21. This is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, a left-handed strike is performed in order to make the first starting port 20 win a game ball. This allows you to get more start-up prizes than right-handed.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to a hit / fail determination means (FIG. 23) and a hit / fail predetermination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. Main control In the main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first makes initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "1", that is, "ON" for the ceiling flag, and the initial value of the other flags is "0", that is, "OFF". The initial value of the status is "1". The initial value of the counter is "500" for the ceiling counter and "0" for the other counters. The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 has various random number counter values (big hit random number value, jackpot type random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value) shown in FIG. 7A. , Ordinary symbol random number value) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process and the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main-side timer interrupt processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update processing (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7A. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is done in both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1, and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening in the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig.). 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 has a start port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a hold ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the number of holding balls of special figure 2 described later, and the first special drawing is based on the number of holding balls of special figure 1. The hold display 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and the acquired random number value is the first to the first to the normal figure reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area according to the current number of reserved balls of the normal symbol.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of the second special figure reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the second special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “4” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (FIG. 7: label). -The value of TRND-RC) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-T1) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily transfers the acquired random number value group to a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reserved storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. To memorize (retain). After the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). Special Figure 2 Details of the pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S210: YES). Step S211). The number of special figure 1 hold balls is the number of first special figure hold, and more specifically, it is a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of first special figure hold. If the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is “4” (step S211: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step). S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired in the same manner as in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily transfers the acquired random number value group to a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the first special figure reserved storage area 85a for the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). Special Figure 1 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a preliminary determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot by using the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the game control microcomputer 81 is in the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 uses the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. Refer to it to determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as "missing". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the pre-judgment is different from the jackpot determination table T1. You may make a preliminary judgment using the jackpot judgment table of.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "missing" (step S304: NO), the process is skipped to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random value is "0" to "127", it is preliminarily determined as "16RV planned passing jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the pre-judgment is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the fluctuation pattern advance determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And get the reach random number value. Next, since the time reduction state (time reduction flag is ON) here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time reduction state, and the jackpot pre-determination result in step S304, Reach Presence / absence of reach obtained from random value Preliminary determination result and fluctuation pattern The fluctuation pattern is specified from the random value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, when the loss with reach is preliminarily determined from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence / absence pre-determination result and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 has the number of reserved balls "1 to 2". , The variation pattern "P64" is selected, and if the number of reserved balls is "3-4", the variation pattern "P68" is selected. In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 is used. Pre-judgment may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from that of.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a variation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 predetermination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination with reference to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). do. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, the game control microcomputer 81 is the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164” in the jackpot determination table T1. ”) To determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as "missing". For the jackpot pre-determination, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as the processing of steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special figure 2 predetermination processing (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of hold balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then steps S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the hold is exhausted and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8 (C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a normal symbol random value (corresponding to the first storage area of the normal figure hold storage area 86) as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the normal figure hold). Hit random value) is read. Then, the normal symbol random value, the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not the game is a hit. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random value is "0" to "2", it is determined to be "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is not, it is determined to be "missing". (See FIG. 8 (C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and uses the game state determination result and the normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8D). .. The game control microcomputer 81 starts the variation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol variation pattern (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and in the case of "missing" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505), (Step S510: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time saving state. After selecting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected open pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the electric chew 22 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 6), or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process is performed. To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into four stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status". Called "2", "3", "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, fluctuation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the processing during special symbol change, the output of the change stop command and the like are executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “0” (step S1401). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “1” or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the reserved information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the reserved information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the reserved information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the reserved information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the hold digestion image display area side and is displayed as the hold digestion image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the variation start processing in FIG. 2 (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 2 fluctuation start command). Information on the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES). Step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a to the side read from the current position by one. At the same time, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) is displayed. It shifts to the hold digestion image display area side and is displayed as the hold digestion image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) are on the right side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 1 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may be determined by, for example, ON / OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. When it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed. (Step S1414), this process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (big hit scheduled to pass V). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402, S1408). Since the processing flow of the jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot by using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since it is a high probability state (probability change flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the table for the high probability state (big hit judgment value is "0" to "649") in the big hit judgment table T1. judge.

In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1501: NO). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since it is a normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, is it a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1? Judge whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , End this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403, S1409). Since the flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). The determination of whether or not the time reduction state is performed is performed by whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). When the jackpot is the special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, so the process is skipped to step S1605. When the jackpot is a special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop symbol data.

When the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 fluctuates with reference to the table for the jackpot scheduled to pass V in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 10 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (in Special Figure 1, the variation pattern is "P1". "To" P3 ", and in the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern is referred to" P21 "to" P23 ") (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P21" to "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

When the jackpot type is V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”” in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. Part) is referred to. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach established random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not there is reach by using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, the reach is performed based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as the table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The portion of "P14" and the portion of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More short fluctuation patterns are selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss without reach (step S1609). Here, as a table for loss without reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss without reach in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The portion of "P16" and the portion of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P15” and “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P32” and “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Here, too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so that the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processes of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Different from. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time saving state is used. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) of the above is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (variation pattern in FIG. 1). Refers to the part of "P41" to "P43", and the part of the variation pattern "P61" to "P63" in the special figure 2). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 ("P44". (Parts of "P46") are referred to. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process is completed.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability change counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "100" is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter becomes "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by one (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time reduction counter counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time reduction state. Here, "100" is set in the time saving counter at the time of transition to the time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter becomes "0" as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by one (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command contains information about the set current game state (whether the ceiling flag is ON, ceiling counter value, probability change state, probability change counter value, time reduction state, time reduction counter value, etc.). include.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. When the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached, and counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed when the ceiling flag is ON (during the low probability state). .. Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, "500" as the specified rotation speed is set in the ceiling counter. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by one (step S2012). That is, it is determined whether or not the specified number of revolutions has elapsed until the b time reduction (play time) is reached. If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time saving flag is switched to ON (step S2013), and "700" is set as the time saving number (granting number) in the time saving counter. Then, the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game status reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. When the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process ends. When the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2106). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned off in the non-high probability state and the non-time saving state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening / closing member operation process for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the first large winning opening 30, and in the V opening / closing member operation processing, it corresponds to the V opening / closing member opening pattern T9. The V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period at the time of winning the predetermined th game ball. The details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize opening is, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or when the opening of the big winning opening is temporarily closed after opening, the big winning opening is opened again. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) up to is elapsed and the time to start opening again is reached. If it is not the time to open the big winning opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the large winning openings are not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning openings are opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning openings during one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the big winning opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 per round), or the time to close the big winning opening has been reached. That (that is, the predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, when it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the closing of the big winning opening. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. If the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not been exhausted yet, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball has passed through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" is "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing schedule". The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V area 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot", the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It can be recognized that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39. It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V planned passage jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process is completed.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so that the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231) and turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special operation process. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to complete this process.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the values of the round counters of the game control microcomputer 81 are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5", it can be determined that the round is open. If it is not an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

In the case of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the first ball in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first large winning opening 30 in the round, and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened regardless of whether the V opening / closing member 71 is "short opening" or "long opening". This is to sometimes execute a short release (here, 0.1 second). In the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 does not pass through the V region 39. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V valid period setting process, a few seconds during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 are set as the V valid period during which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 causes the V opening / closing member 71 to be short-opened (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), and the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And set the V validity period to 1 second after closing. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33). Further, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is detected. It should be noted that the reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed is that there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This is a consideration of the period until the game ball that has entered the V region 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V region 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when the V passage outside the V valid period (V invalid period) is detected. It is not turned on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, and the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, when the first winning flag is ON, that is, when the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has won a second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 of the round is long opening. When the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of long opening (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a long time. ) Is executed. Here, since the maximum round game time is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning opening 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), the second ball is generally won. The time from time to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the opening time of the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long in the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71, at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 has the V region 39. It is configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening / closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. Make a judgment.

When the round game is completed (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Perform the setting process (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period is set. Set and finish this process.

When the round game is not completed (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). As the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71, for example, in the case of short opening, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process is completed. When the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), this process ends with the V opening / closing member 71 in the open state and the V valid period continuing.

In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2571). When the round is completed (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round is not completed (step S2571: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time reduction flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set in the time reduction counter (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the big hit game this time becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-accuracy high-based state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), sets "100" in the probability change counter (step S2305), and sets the probability change counter to "100". The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "100" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag, and the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified rotation speed until the b time reduction (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, after the big hit game, when the probability change flag is OFF, the b time is shortened (play time) when the probability change flag is turned off 500 times. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information on the set game state (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is in the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, and 12th round. Will be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this process. ..

[Reserved ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7B and updates the random number. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs reception command analysis processing (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect process (step S4305). The variation effect processing is a process for setting a command before the end of variation at a specific timing during the variation effect to execute a specific display effect on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 inputs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. Further, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in response to the received command. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S4415: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The "look-ahead effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is executed. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the pre-reading effect determination process described above is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 contains a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), the hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), the variation effect end process is performed (step S4470). The "variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the variation effect end processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command, which is set at the time of the jackpot winning determination, in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between the openings in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round specification command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round effect command in the sub RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is produced by the sub RAM94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, the ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag) , Ceiling counter, etc.) is held in the sub RAM 94. Specifically, the values of the time saving effect counter, the probability variation effect counter, and the ceiling effect counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 are updated based on the information included in the game state designation command. For example, the number of remaining fluctuations during the time reduction (number of games) is set in the time reduction effect counter, the number of remaining fluctuations at the time of probability change is set in the probability change effect counter, and the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is set in the ceiling effect counter. As a result, information on the number of time reductions, the number of probable changes, and the number of ceilings can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-passing command, the sub-RAM 94 holds the V-passing information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot pre-determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type pre-determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the predetermined information storage area 94c. In the pre-determination information storage area 94c, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information, pre-reading effect pattern information is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39 (A), the jackpot determination information “miss” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third items on hold in Special Figure 2. The state in which the pre-determination result corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the storage area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in special figure 2 from the state of FIG. 39 (A), and the preliminary judgment information included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80 is the fourth piece on hold in special figure 2. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information "big hit", the jackpot type information "21H", and the fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored as the preliminary determination information. In addition, "Pattern A" is used as pre-reading effect pattern information for each of the 1st to 4th storage areas corresponding to the 1st to 4th reserved areas in Special Figure 2 and the area corresponding to the fluctuation. "Is set. FIG. 39 (C) shows a state in which the change is completed from the state of FIG. 39 (B) and the pre-determination information shift process is executed. Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area shifts to the relevant area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas shifts to the first to third storage areas, and the first 4 The pre-determination information of the storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area and the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 has a "big hit" as the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a “loss with reach” (step S4603). Whether or not it is a "big hit" or a "loss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information). If the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "loss without reach" (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "big hit" or "miss with reach" (step S4603: YES), the pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, Then, the look-ahead effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter for the look-ahead effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the look-ahead effect. Whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is performed are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-judgment result is “big hit” and the look-ahead effect random value is “0 to 55”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and when the look-ahead effect random value is “56 to 67”, the look-ahead effect is as a look-ahead effect. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. If the pre-judgment result is "miss with reach" and the look-ahead effect random value is "0 to 107", the look-ahead effect is "none", and if the look-ahead effect random value is "108 to 114", the look-ahead effect is as a look-ahead effect. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type, content, and range of the selected random number value of the look-ahead effect pattern can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area among the first to fourth storage areas is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only the "pattern A" is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received predetermination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area concerned. Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) that is executed before the variation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. .. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable effect, if the timing for executing the look-ahead effect has already passed, the look-ahead effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. When it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current gaming state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic configuration of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image in the image display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody or sound effect using a speaker 67). , Lamp lighting control, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effect and look-ahead effect on this core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern with reference to the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a core effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing a normal reach effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP1 effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP2 effect, and a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP3 effect are shown. There are multiple types of core production patterns that produce a loss without reach. The type of the core production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the core effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", the core effect pattern for performing the reachless loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the chance-up random number, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 determines a part for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the fluctuation pattern is "P21" to "P33" "P41" to "P56" "61" to "73". It may or may not be prepared.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", and "3-SP3" are used as chance-up effect patterns. 4-NO, "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance production patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the count effect pattern determination process (step S5016). Here, the count effect pattern determination process is performed on the number of remaining fluctuations (number of games) at the time of probability change, the number of remaining fluctuations at the time of shortening, the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the number of fluctuations from when the power is turned on, and after the jackpot game. This is a process for displaying the number of fluctuations and the like on the display screen 7a. At the time of probability change, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the probability change remaining number on the display screen 7a based on the value of the probability change effect counter. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the number of remaining probable changes based on the value of the time reduction effect counter at the time of time reduction.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute various effects from the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the evening effect counter. The ceiling effect counter stores the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, and the evening effect counter records the number of fluctuations from the time the power is turned on. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 can set the number of variations from the time when the power is turned on by incrementing the effect counter for the evening each time when the variation effect end command is received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH2 (for example, TH2 = 200) or less when the value of the effect counter is TH1 (for example, TH1 = 10). When the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH2 or less, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is larger than TH2, the chance image is not displayed. As a result, the player who sees the chance image can recognize that the game machine 1 has taken over the number of games of the previous day and the ram clear has not been made. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the effect counter is TH3 (for example, TH3 = 50). Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may erase the display or chance image showing the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the effect counter is TH4 (for example, TH4 = 100). Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling effect counter again when the value of the effect counter is TH5 (for example, TH5 = 200). As described above, the effect control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling effect counter based on the value of the evening effect counter or the value of the ceiling effect counter. May be good. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH6 (for example, TH6 = 100), and the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH7 (for example, TH7 = 70). At this time, the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter may be turned off, and when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (for example, TH8 = 50), the value of the ceiling effect counter may be displayed again.

After the count effect pattern determination process, the combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be stopped and displayed may be determined with reference to the effect control microcomputer 91, the random number value, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54. From these, what kind of production is performed as a variable production is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 is realized. Step S5020). When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect timer (step S5030), and ends this process. The variation effect timer is set with a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variable production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variable effect processing (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variation effect is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variation effect timer is set to zero. If the variable effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the variation effect is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the effect pre-variation command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation command is a command in which the effect control microcomputer 91 informs the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variation effect, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation command. , Switch the production contents and display a specific image according to the information contained in the command before the end of fluctuation.

If it is not the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is the timing to set the command before the end of the fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). When there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation command that does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect of displaying the look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, the pre-variation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation. Here, when the notice image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a notice fade effect for fading the notice image.

9. Movement of the movable body and display effect of the sub display screen 64 Using FIGS. 46 to 50, the movement of the board movable body (first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable accessory) The operation of 69) and the display effect of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a drive control for operating the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 during the game effect (display effect) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. To do. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during a game effect (display effect) or an initial operation when the power is turned on.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. The first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, the upper end of which is located near the upper end of the image display device 7, and the lower end of which is located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The upper end and the lower end of the first movable accessory 14 are difficult to see, and the vicinity of the central portion is visible in front (front surface) of the image display device 7. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first aspect). In the retracted position, only a part of the first movable accessory 14 may be stored so that the rest can be visually recognized, or the whole of the first movable accessory 14 may be stored and difficult to see. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7. It is configured to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display screen 7a. In addition, the vehicle can be stationary at an arbitrary advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable accessory 14 can be arbitrarily set. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stand still at that position (second aspect). The first movable accessory 14 may have a decorative portion formed at least in a part thereof, or may have a transparency.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion described as "OARO", and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stand still at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 48 (second aspect). .. In this second aspect, the decorative portion is stopped in front (front surface) of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retract) upward from the advance position in FIG. 48 to the retreat position shown in FIG. 1, and can be stationary there.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. The frame movable accessory 69 is composed of a pair of flat plate-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and each of them is configured to be movable in the left-right direction. The two members are made of flexible members, and one main surface of each member is configured to move closer to or further from the handle 60. As shown in FIG. 1, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 are normally stationary at the retracted position (home position) away from the handle 60 on the left side and the right side of the handle 60 (first aspect). .. As shown in FIG. 49, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 move (advance) from the retracted position toward the handle 60, that is, move so as to be close to each other, and move to the handle 60, respectively. It can stand still at the touching position (second aspect). When the frame movable accessory 69 is in the advanced position, the handle 60 or the handle 60 touches the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60. The frame movable accessory 69 can move the two members in a direction away from each other so as to change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effect of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U). The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U can display images independently. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect linked to the image on the display screen 7a.

10. Production example, effect example, modification example, embodiment example of the present embodiment Each effect example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of the effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example.

Hereinafter, the symbol mode change effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. This symbol mode change effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the pattern mode change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Design mode change effect A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the symbol mode change effect A. The symbol mode change effect is an effect in which the mode of at least a part of the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a changes when the decorative symbols form a reach. 51 (A) to (F) show the first example of the symbol mode change effect A, and FIGS. 51 (G) to 51 (L) show the second example of the symbol mode change effect A.

In the first example of the symbol mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. 8R2 and the third decorative symbols 8L3, 8C3, 8R3 are displayed. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The first decorative symbol 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 is a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L1, the middle decorative symbol 8C1, and the right decorative symbol 8R1 displayed above the display screen 7a, and is a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display of, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The second decorative symbol 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 is a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C2, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and is a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display of, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The third decorative symbol 8L3, 8C3, 8R3 is a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L3, the middle decorative symbol 8C3, and the right decorative symbol 8R3 displayed below the display screen 7a, and is a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display of, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

While the variable displays of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are independent of each other, they represent the variable display (special symbol variation) of one and the same special symbol, and the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol. If is lost, the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixedly stopped in the form of loss. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol is a hit, at least one of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is fixedly stopped in the winning mode. .. Here, the fluctuation start timings of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the fluctuation stop timings of the left decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol, and the middle decorative symbol are all at the same time, but the first to third decorative symbols are the same. It may be different for each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 51 (A), the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the current special symbol variation (the variation).

As shown in FIG. 51 (B), the left decorative symbols 8L and the right decorative symbols 8R of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in order. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 have a loss mode of "3 ↓ 2", and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 have a reach mode of "7 ↓ 7". The decorative symbols 8L3, 8C3, 8R3 of 3 have a loss mode of "4 ↓ 3". Here, one or more of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach and temporarily stop, and the other decorative symbols 8L, 8C, The 8R may temporarily stop without forming a reach. In other words, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach mode in any one or more of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. , Other decorative symbols in the same symbol row (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped by forming the reach may be temporarily stopped without forming the reach.

In FIG. 51 (C), the symbol mode change effect is executed. Here, since the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 constitute the reach of "7 ↓ 7", the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a are different from the decorative symbols (the first and third). The aspect of the decorative pattern) changes. Specifically, "x" is displayed so as to overlap "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L1 of the first decorative symbol and "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R1. Similarly, "x" is displayed so as to overlap "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L3 and "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R3 of the third decorative symbol. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before "x" is displayed on the left and right decorative symbols of the first and third decorative symbols is the first aspect, and the mode after "x" is overlapped and displayed is the first aspect. This is the second aspect. As a result, among the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the first and third decorative symbols are lost, and the player is made to pay attention to the second decorative symbol. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 51 (D), after the mode of the first and third decorative symbols is changed, the mode of the second decorative symbol constituting the reach changes to a mode different from that of the first and third decorative symbols. .. Specifically, "7" of the left decorative symbol 8L2 and "7" of the right decorative symbol 8R2 of the second decorative symbol are enlarged and displayed, and a rectangular frame surrounding them is displayed. Here, the aspect at the time of temporary stop before the left and right decorative symbols of the second decorative symbol are enlarged and displayed is the first aspect, and the aspect after being enlarged and surrounded by the rectangular frame is the third aspect. Is. This makes it possible for the player to pay more attention to the second decorative symbol in the reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 51 (E), the aspect of the second decorative symbol constituting the reach returns from the third aspect to the first aspect. Specifically, when the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of each of the first to third decorative symbols decreases and the symbol becomes visible, the second decoration is enlarged and surrounded by a rectangular frame. The "7" of the left decorative symbol 8L2 and the "7" of the right decorative symbol 8R2 are reduced to the normal size, and the rectangular frame surrounding them disappears. As a result, the symbol can be returned to the normal state before the change effect of the symbol when the jackpot confirmation is stopped is performed, and the hit effect can be made conspicuous. In addition, even in the case of a definite loss stop, it is possible to prevent the magnified pattern from being mistaken for a production with a high degree of expectation of hitting.

As shown in FIG. 51 (F), when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of each of the first to third decorative symbols is stopped and the first to third decorative symbols are fixedly stopped, the first and third decorations are stopped. The aspect of the symbol returns from the second aspect to the first aspect. Specifically, when the middle decorative symbol 8C of each of the first to third decorative symbols is temporarily stopped, it overlaps with "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L1 and "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R1 of the first decorative symbol. The "x" displayed on top of the "x" displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L3 and the "3" on the right decorative symbol 8R3 of the third decorative symbol disappears. Thereby, the fixed stop symbol (final lottery result) of each of the first to third decorative symbols can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The timing at which the first and third decorative symbols return from the second aspect to the first aspect may be the same timing as the fixed stop of the first to third decorative symbols, or before the fixed stop. It may be, or it may be after the definite stop.

In the second example of the symbol mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are displayed on the display screen 7a, as in the first example. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 of 2 and the third decorative symbols 8L3, 8C3, 8R3 are displayed. The first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the current variation in the special symbol (the variation).

As shown in FIG. 51 (G), the left decorative symbols 8L and the right decorative symbols 8R of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in order. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 have a reach mode of "7 ↓ 7", and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 have a reach mode of "6 ↓ 6". The decorative symbols 8L3, 8C3, 8R3 of 3 have a loss mode of "4 ↓ 3". Here, one or more of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach and temporarily stop, and the other decorative symbols 8L, 8C, The 8R may temporarily stop without forming a reach. In other words, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach mode in any one or more of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. , Other decorative symbols in the same symbol row (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped by forming the reach may be temporarily stopped without forming the reach.

In FIG. 51 (H), the symbol mode change effect is executed. Here, since the first and second decorative symbols constitute the reach of "7 ↓ 7" and "6 ↓ 6", the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a are different from the decorative symbols (third). The aspect of the decorative pattern) changes. Specifically, "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L3 of the third decorative symbol, "↓" of the middle decorative symbol, and "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R3 are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, the aspect at the time of temporary stop before the third decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right of the display screen 7a is the first aspect, and the aspect after the reduced display is the second aspect. As a result, among the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the third decorative symbol is a loss, and the player is made to pay attention to the first and second decorative symbols. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 51 (I) and 51 (J), after the aspect of the third decorative symbol is changed, the decorative symbol satisfying a predetermined condition among the first and second decorative symbols constituting the reach has the embodiment. It changes to a mode different from the third decorative pattern. Here, the predetermined condition is whether or not the symbol is "13579". Therefore, the first decorative symbol "7 ↓ 7" satisfies the condition, but the second decorative symbol "6 ↓ 6" does not satisfy the condition. Therefore, here, the aspect changes only for the first decorative pattern. Specifically, "7" of the left decorative symbol 8L1 and "7" of the right decorative symbol 8R1 of the first decorative symbol are enlarged and displayed and swing to the left and right. That is, the state of tilting to the right (FIG. 51 (I)) and the state of tilting to the left (FIG. 51 (J)) are alternately repeated. Here, the aspect at the time of temporary stop before the left and right decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol are enlarged and displayed is the first aspect, and the aspect after the enlarged display is the third aspect. The aspect of the second decorative pattern does not change. As described above, even the decorative pattern constituting the reach may or may not change in mode. As a result, the player can get more attention to the first decorative symbol in the reach mode, and can give unexpectedness when the second decorative symbol stops in the hit mode. can.

As shown in FIG. 51 (K), the aspect of the first decorative symbol constituting the reach returns from the third aspect to the first aspect. Specifically, when the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of each of the first to third decorative symbols decreases and the symbol becomes visible, the first decoration is enlarged and swung left and right. The "7" of the left decorative symbol 8L1 and the "7" of the right decorative symbol 8R1 are reduced to the normal size and the swing is stopped. As a result, the symbol can be returned to the normal state before the change effect of the symbol when the jackpot confirmation is stopped is performed, and the hit effect can be made conspicuous. In addition, even in the case of a definite loss stop, it is possible to prevent the pattern from being mistaken for a highly expected effect due to the enlarged and swung pattern.

As shown in FIG. 51 (L), when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of each of the first to third decorative symbols is stopped and the first to third decorative symbols are fixedly stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed. The aspect returns from the second aspect to the first aspect. Specifically, when the medium decorative symbol 8C of each of the first to third decorative symbols is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed to a normal size, and the display position is also normal from the lower right of the display screen 7a. Return to the position of. Thereby, the fixed stop symbol (final lottery result) of each of the first to third decorative symbols can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The timing at which the third decorative symbol returns from the second aspect to the first aspect may be the same timing as the fixed stop of the first to third decorative symbols, or before the fixed stop. It may be after the definite stop.

[Design mode change effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the symbol mode change effect B. The symbol mode change effect is an effect in which the mode of at least a part of the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a changes when the decorative symbols form a reach. 52 (A) to 52 (F) show the first example of the symbol mode change effect B, and FIGS. 52 (G) to 52 (L) show the second example of the symbol mode change effect B.

In the first example of the symbol mode change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C are displayed on the display screen 7a. 8R2 and the third decorative symbols 8L3, 8C, 8R3 are displayed. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C, 8R1 are sandwiched between the left decorative symbol 8L1 and the right decorative symbol 8R1 displayed above the display screen 7a, and are displayed from above to below in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a set of symbols including the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display of the set of symbols, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of the set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C, 8R2 are sandwiched between the left decorative symbol 8L2 and the right decorative symbol 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and are displayed from above to below in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a set of symbols including the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display of the set of symbols, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of the set of symbols. The third decorative symbol 8L3, 8C, 8R3 is sandwiched between the left decorative symbol 8L3 and the right decorative symbol 8R3 displayed below the display screen 7a, and is displayed from above to below in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a set of symbols including the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display of the set of symbols, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of the set of symbols.

The variable display of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is the left and right decorative symbols 8L, 8R.
Are independent of each other, while the intermediate decorative symbol 8C shares one symbol array. The vertical arrangement interval of the symbol array included in the middle decorative symbol 8C is equal to the vertical display interval of the first, second, and third decorative symbols, and three stop symbols are vertically arranged at the time of stop display. Is displayed. When the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed, the three stop symbols are displayed as the stop symbols of the first, second, and third decorative symbols, respectively.

The variable display of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R represents the variable display (special symbol variation) of one and the same special symbol, and if the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol is lost, The first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop in a lost manner. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol is a hit, at least one of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is fixedly stopped in the winning mode. .. Here, the fluctuation start timings of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the fluctuation stop timings of the left decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol, and the middle decorative symbol are all at the same time, but the first to third decorative symbols are the same. It may be different for each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 52 (A), the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the current special symbol variation (the variation).

As shown in FIG. 52B, the left decorative symbols 8L and the right decorative symbols 8R of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in order. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C, 8R1 have a loss mode of "3 ↓ 2", and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C, 8R2 have a reach mode of "7 ↓ 7". The decorative symbols 8L3, 8C, 8R3 of 3 have a loss mode of "4 ↓ 3". Here, one or more of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach and temporarily stop, and the other decorative symbols 8L, 8C, The 8R may temporarily stop without forming a reach. In other words, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach mode in any one or more of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. , Other decorative symbols in the same symbol row (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped by forming the reach may be temporarily stopped without forming the reach.

In FIG. 52 (C), the symbol mode change effect is executed. Here, since the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C, and 8R2 constitute the reach of "7 ↓ 7", the decorative symbols (first and third) different from the decorative symbols that constitute the reach displayed on the display screen 7a. The aspect of the decorative pattern) changes. Specifically, "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L1 and "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R1 of the first decorative symbol are reduced and displayed horizontally. Similarly, "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L3 and "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R3 of the third decorative symbol are reduced and displayed sideways. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the reduced horizontal display of the first and third decorative symbols is the first aspect, and the mode after the reduced horizontal display is the second aspect. As a result, among the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the first and third decorative symbols are lost, and the player is made to pay attention to the second decorative symbol. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 52 (D), after the mode of the first and third decorative symbols is changed, the mode of the second decorative symbol constituting the reach changes to a mode different from that of the first and third decorative symbols. .. Specifically, "7" of the left decorative symbol 8L2 and "7" of the right decorative symbol 8R2 of the second decorative symbol are enlarged and displayed. Here, the aspect at the time of temporary stop before the left and right decorative symbols of the second decorative symbol are enlarged and displayed is the first aspect, and the aspect after the enlarged display is the third aspect. This makes it possible for the player to pay more attention to the second decorative symbol in the reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 52 (E), the aspect of the second decorative symbol constituting the reach returns from the third aspect to the first aspect. Specifically, when the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative symbol 8C shared by the first to third decorative symbols decreases and the symbol becomes visible, the left decorative symbol 8L2 "7" and the right decoration of the second decorative symbol become visible. The "7" of the symbol 8R2 is reduced to the normal size. Further, the first and third decorative patterns return from the second aspect to the first aspect. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L1 "3" and the right decorative symbol 8R1 "2" of the first decorative symbol, and the left decorative symbol 8L3 "4" and the right decorative symbol 8R3 of the third decorative symbol. "3" returns to the original orientation size. The timing at which the first and third decorative symbols return from the second aspect to the first aspect is the same as the timing at which the second decorative symbol returns from the third aspect to the first aspect. It may or may not be different. Further, these timings may be timings before the fixed stop of the first to third decorative symbols, or may be at the same time as the fixed stop or after the fixed stop.

On the other hand, yet another pattern mode change effect is executed. Here, since the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C, and 8R2 constitute the reach of "7 ↓ 7", they are different from the decorative symbols (second left and right decorative symbols) that constitute the reach displayed on the display screen 7a. The mode of the decorative pattern (medium decorative pattern) changes. Specifically, in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the symbol corresponding to the reach (here, "7") is enlarged and displayed and fluctuates. As a result, it is possible to make the hit effect stand out by returning the left and right decorative symbols to the normal state before performing the change effect of the symbol when the jackpot confirmation is stopped. On the other hand, it is possible to make it easier to identify the hit symbol by enlarging the symbol corresponding to the reach in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C.

As shown in FIG. 52 (F), when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C composed of one symbol array is stopped and the first to third decorative symbols are fixedly stopped all at once, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C reaches. The corresponding symbol is reduced from the enlarged display to the normal size. Thereby, the fixed stop symbol (final lottery result) of each of the first to third decorative symbols can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the second example of the symbol mode change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C, 8R1 and the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C, 8R1 are displayed on the display screen 7a, as in the first example. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C, 8R2 of 2 and the third decorative symbols 8L3, 8C, 8R3 are displayed. The first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the current variation in the special symbol (the variation).

As shown in FIG. 52 (G), the left decorative symbols 8L and the right decorative symbols 8R of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in order. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C, 8R1 have a reach mode of "6 ↓ 6", and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C, 8R2 have a reach mode of "7 ↓ 7". The decorative symbols 8L3, 8C3, 8R3 of 3 have the reach mode of "2 ↓ 2". Here, one or more of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach and temporarily stop, and the other decorative symbols 8L, 8C, The 8R may temporarily stop without forming a reach. In other words, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach mode in any one or more of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. , Other decorative symbols in the same symbol row (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped by forming the reach may be temporarily stopped without forming the reach.

In FIG. 52 (H), the symbol mode change effect is executed. Here, since all the decorative symbols of the first, second, and third constitutes the reach of "6 ↓ 6", "7 ↓ 7", and "2 ↓ 2", the reach displayed on the display screen 7a is configured. There is no decorative pattern that is different from the decorative pattern. Therefore, the effect of changing the mode of the decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern constituting the reach displayed on the display screen 7a is not executed. On the other hand, the pattern mode change effect is subject to a predetermined condition that a decorative pattern (medium decorative pattern) different from the decorative patterns (first to third left and right decorative patterns) constituting the reach displayed on the display screen 7a exists. In order to satisfy the requirements, the pattern mode change effect of the intermediate decorative pattern is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (I) and 52 (J), when the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C shared by the first to third decorative symbols decreases and the symbol becomes visible, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C corresponds to the reach. The symbol to be used (here, "2, 6, 7") is enlarged and displayed and fluctuates. As a result, it is possible to easily identify the hit symbol by enlarging the symbol corresponding to the reach in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C.

On the other hand, the modes of all the first, second, and third decorative symbols constituting the reach change. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R of the first, second, and third decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the left and right decorative symbols of the first to third decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed is the first aspect, and the aspect after the enlarged display is the third aspect. This makes it possible for the player to pay more attention to the decorative design in the reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 52 (K), the aspects of the first to third decorative symbols constituting the reach return from the third aspect to the first aspect. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R1 of the first to third decorative symbols are reduced and displayed to a normal size. As a result, it is possible to make the hit effect stand out by returning the left and right decorative symbols to the normal state before performing the change effect of the symbol when the jackpot confirmation is stopped. On the other hand, it is possible to make it easier to identify the hit symbol by enlarging the symbol corresponding to the reach in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C.

As shown in FIG. 52 (L), when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C composed of one symbol array is stopped and the first to third decorative symbols are fixedly stopped all at once, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C reaches. The corresponding symbol is reduced from the enlarged display to the normal size. Thereby, the fixed stop symbol (final lottery result) of each of the first to third decorative symbols can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Design mode change effect C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the symbol mode change effect C. The symbol mode change effect is an effect in which the mode of at least a part of the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a changes when the decorative symbols form a reach. 53 (A) to 53 (F) show the first example of the symbol mode change effect C, and FIGS. 53 (G) to 53 (L) show the second example of the symbol mode change effect C.

In the first example of the symbol mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variablely displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols. (Special figure fluctuation) is shown, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, respectively, and three stop symbols are displayed vertically side by side at the time of stop display. Here, the symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The symbol arrangement of the right decorative symbol 8R is arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 53 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the current variation in the special figure (the variation).

As shown in FIG. 53 (B), the left decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in order. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped with "123" displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is "321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. "Is displayed and temporarily stops. As a result, the first columns 8L1, 8C, 8R1 of the decorative symbol consisting of the left decorative symbol 8L1, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R1 are displayed above the display screen 7a in a lost manner of "1 ↓ 3". In the center of the display screen 7a, the second columns 8L2, 8C, 8R2 of the decorative symbols consisting of the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 are displayed in the reach mode of "2 ↓ 2", and the display screen 7a Below, the third row 8L3, 8C, 8R3 of the decorative symbol consisting of the left decorative symbol 8L3, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R3 is displayed in the loss mode of "3 ↓ 1". Here, one or more of the first to third columns of the decorative symbol may form a reach and temporarily stop, and the other columns may temporarily stop without forming a reach. In other words, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach mode in any one or more of the first to third rows of the decorative symbols, the decoration that constitutes the reach and is temporarily stopped is formed. Other decorative symbols in the same symbol row (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) may be temporarily stopped without forming a reach.

In FIG. 53 (C), the symbol mode change effect is executed. Here, since the second row of the decorative symbols constitutes the reach of "7 ↓ 7", the decorative symbols different from the decorative symbols constituting the reach displayed on the display screen 7a (decorative symbols in the first and third rows). The aspect of is changed. Specifically, "1" of the left decorative symbol 8L1 and "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R1 of the decorative symbol in the first row are reduced and displayed. Similarly, "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L3 and "1" of the right decorative symbol 8R3 of the decorative symbol in the third column are reduced and displayed. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the decorative symbols in the first and third rows are reduced and displayed is the first mode, and the mode after the reduced display is the second mode. As a result, among the decorative symbols in the first to third rows, the decorative symbols in the first and third rows are lost, and the decorative symbols in the second row can be attracted to the player. ..

As shown in FIG. 53 (D), after the mode of the decorative symbols in the first and third rows is changed, the mode of the decorative symbols in the second row constituting the reach is different from that of the decorative symbols in the first and third rows. Changes to. Specifically, "2" of the left decorative symbol 8L2 and "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R2 of the decorative symbol in the second row are enlarged and displayed. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the left and right decorative symbols of the decorative symbols in the second row are enlarged and displayed is the first aspect, and the aspect after the enlarged display is the third aspect. This makes it possible for the player to pay more attention to the decorative symbols in the second row of the reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 53 (E), the aspect of the decorative symbol in the second row constituting the reach returns from the third aspect to the first aspect. Specifically, when the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative symbol 8C decreases and the symbol becomes visible, the "2" of the left decorative symbol 8L2 and the "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R2 of the decorative symbol in the second row are normal. It is reduced to size.

As shown in FIG. 53 (F), the mode of the decorative symbols in the first and third rows then returns from the second mode to the first mode. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L1 "1" and the right decorative symbol 8R1 "3" of the decorative symbol in the first row, and the left decorative symbol 8L3 "3" and the right decoration of the decorative symbol in the third row. The "1" of the symbol 8R3 returns to the original orientation size. After that, the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and the decorative symbols in the first to third rows are fixedly stopped all at once. As a result, the fixed stop symbol (final lottery result) of each of the decorative symbols in the first to third rows can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The timing at which the decorative symbols in the first and third rows return from the second aspect to the first aspect is the same as the timing at which the decorative symbols in the second row return from the third aspect to the first aspect. It may or may not be different. Further, these timings may be timings before the fixed stop of the decorative symbols in the first to third columns, at the same time as the fixed stop, or after the fixed stop.

In the second example of the symbol mode change effect C, in the second example, the symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that they are arranged in the order of "." Similar to the first example, first, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the current variation in the special symbol (the variation).

As shown in FIG. 53 (G), the left decorative symbols 8L of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped with "123" displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R is reduced so that the symbol can be visually recognized. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (H), the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stops with "123" displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. As a result, the first row 8L1, 8C, 8R1 of the decorative symbol consisting of the left decorative symbol 8L1, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R1 is displayed above the display screen 7a in the reach mode of "1 ↓ 1". In the center of the display screen 7a, the second columns 8L2, 8C, 8R2 of the decorative symbols consisting of the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 are displayed in the reach mode of "2 ↓ 2", and the display screen 7a Below, the third row 8L3, 8C, 8R3 of the decorative symbol consisting of the left decorative symbol 8L3, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R3 is displayed in the reach mode of "3 ↓ 3". Here, one or more of the first to third columns of the decorative symbol may form a reach and temporarily stop, and the other columns may temporarily stop without forming a reach. In other words, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach mode in any one or more of the first to third rows of the decorative symbols, the decoration that constitutes the reach and is temporarily stopped is formed. Other decorative symbols in the same symbol row (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) may be temporarily stopped without forming a reach.

In FIG. 52 (I), the symbol mode change effect is executed. Here, since the decorative symbols in all the first, second, and third rows constitute the reach of "1 ↓ 1", "2 ↓ 2", and "3 ↓ 3", the reach displayed on the display screen 7a. There is no decorative symbol in a row different from the row of decorative symbols that make up. Therefore, the effect of changing the mode of the decorative symbol in the row different from the decorative symbol in the row constituting the reach displayed on the display screen 7a is not executed. That is, here, the symbol mode change effect is executed when a predetermined condition that a row of decorative symbols different from the row of decorative symbols constituting the reach displayed on the display screen 7a exists is satisfied.

On the other hand, the mode of all the decorative symbols in the first, second, and third rows constituting the reach changes. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R of the first, second, and third rows of decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the left and right decorative symbols in the first to third rows are enlarged and displayed is the first aspect, and the aspect after the enlarged display is the third aspect. This makes it possible for the player to pay more attention to the row of decorative symbols in the reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 53 (J), when the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C decreases and the symbol becomes visible, the modes of the decorative symbols in the first to third rows constituting the reach are changed from the third aspect to the first. Return to the aspect of. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R1 of the decorative symbols in the first to third rows are reduced and displayed to a normal size. As a result, it is possible to make the hit effect stand out by returning the left and right decorative symbols to the normal state before performing the change effect of the symbol when the jackpot confirmation is stopped.

FIGS. 53 (K) and 53 (L) are modified examples of FIGS. 53 (C) and 53 (D). In FIG. 53 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L1 “1” and the right decorative symbol 8R1 “3” of the decorative symbol in the first row, and the left decorative symbol 8L3 “3” of the decorative symbol in the third row. The "1" of the right decorative symbol 8R3 is the second aspect and is reduced and displayed. Further, in FIG. 53 (D), the “2” of the left decorative symbol 8L2 and the “2” of the right decorative symbol 8R2 of the decorative symbols in the second row are enlarged and displayed in the third aspect. However, the second aspect and the third aspect are not limited to changing the size of the design. For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (K), the left and right decorative symbols in the first and third rows may be small star-shaped figures as the second aspect. Further, the left and right decorative symbols in the second row may emit light without changing the shape as the third aspect. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (L), the left and right decorative symbols in the first and third rows may be displayed lightly as the second aspect. Further, the color of the left and right decorative symbols in the second row may change as the third aspect.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the design mode change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 53, when the decorative symbols constitute reach, at least a part of the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a is the first aspect of the decorative symbols. It is possible to execute a pattern mode change effect that changes from the mode of 1 to the second mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the pattern mode change effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 53, among the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol mode different from the decorative symbol constituting the reach is used. It changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the pattern mode change effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 53, the timing at which the mode of the decorative design different from the decorative design constituting the reach changes from the first mode to the second mode. At a different timing from the above, the aspect of the decorative pattern constituting the reach changes from the first aspect to the third aspect different from the second aspect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 53, the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a form a reach when some of the decorative symbols form a reach and are temporarily stopped. Other decorative symbols in the same symbol row as the temporarily stopped decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped without forming a reach, and in the symbol mode change effect, the other decorative symbols temporarily stopped without forming a reach are used. It changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 53, in the symbol mode change effect, when the decorative symbols constituting the reach are fixedly stopped in a hit or lose mode, the second mode is changed. The aspect of the decorative pattern returns to the first aspect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 53, when the aspect of the decorative symbol changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the shape, size, orientation, and darkness of the decorative symbol are among those. When at least one of the above changes and the aspect of the decorative pattern changes from the first aspect to the third aspect, the shape, size, orientation, and darkness of the decorative pattern change from the first aspect to the second aspect. There will be different changes than if you did. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 53, even if the decorative symbols form a reach, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the symbol mode change effect is not executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the pattern mode change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the symbol mode change effect A, the timings of FIGS. 51 (D) and 51 (C) may be reversed. Although the second decorative symbol has been described as "6 ↓ 6" in FIGS. 51 (G) to (L) of the symbol mode change effect A, it may be a lost mode of "6 ↓ 5". That is, among the second and third decorative symbols of the lost aspect, the third decorative symbol satisfying a predetermined condition changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, while the second decorative symbol does not satisfy the predetermined condition. It may be an effect in which the aspect of the decorative pattern does not change. The condition here is, for example, whether or not the total of the numerical values represented by the left and right decorative symbols is less than 10.

[Modification 2]
In the symbol mode change effects A to C, when the decorative symbols constituting the reach are fixedly stopped in the mode of hitting or losing, the mode of the decorative symbol changed to the second mode is returned to the first mode. However, the timing at which the decorative pattern changed to the second aspect returns to the first aspect may be before or after the decorative symbol constituting the reach is fixedly stopped in the hit or lost manner. There may be.

[Modification 3]
In the pattern mode change effects A to C, the mode when the mode of the decorative design changes from the first mode to the second mode is an example, and at least one of the shape, size, orientation, and darkness of the decorative design is shown. As long as one changes, an embodiment other than the changes described may be used.

[Modification 4]
In the symbol mode change effects A to C, even if the decorative symbols form a reach, the symbol mode change effect may be executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, it may be executed when "12379" is included in the reach symbol, and may not be executed when "12379" is not included. Further, for example, it may be executed when a decorative symbol different from the decorative symbol constituting the reach displayed on the display screen 7a exists, and may not be executed when it does not exist. Further, for example, it may be executed when the number of remaining time reductions or the number of remaining times of reaching the ceiling is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times, and may not be executed in the following cases.

[Modification 5]
In the symbol mode change effects A to C, "the mode of the symbols other than the symbols that make up the reach changes" means that other symbols (for example, the left column and the right column) that make up the reach (upper and lower of the reach set). It may be a design of a row (for example, a middle row) different from the row constituting the reach. For example, the first and third left and right decorative symbols in FIG. 52 (C) may be smaller, or the specific symbol of the middle decorative symbol in FIG. 52 (I) may be larger. Further, in the symbol mode change effects A to C, only the mode of the reach symbol may be changed, or only the mode of the symbol other than the reach symbol may be changed. Both may change.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
When the decorative symbol constitutes a reach, a symbol mode change effect is executed in which the mode of at least a part of the decorative symbols displayed on the display means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. Possible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
In the symbol aspect change effect, among the decorative symbols displayed on the display means, the decorative symbol aspect different from the decorative symbol constituting the reach changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-2.
In the pattern aspect change effect, the decorative pattern constituting the reach is formed at a timing different from the timing at which the decorative symbol aspect different from the decorative symbol constituting the reach changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The embodiment changes from the first aspect to a third aspect different from the second aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-2 or the aspect A1-3.
In the decorative symbol displayed on the display means, when a part of the decorative symbols constitutes a reach and is temporarily stopped, another decorative symbol in the same symbol row as the decorative symbol that constitutes the reach and is temporarily stopped has a reach. It may be temporarily stopped without being configured,
In the symbol aspect change effect, the aspect of the other decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped without forming a reach changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-4.
In the pattern mode change effect, when the decorative symbol constituting the reach is fixedly stopped in the mode of hitting or losing, the mode of the decorative symbol changed to the second mode returns to the first mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-3.
When the aspect of the decorative pattern changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, at least one of the shape, size, orientation, and darkness of the decorative pattern changes.
When the aspect of the decorative pattern changes from the first aspect to the third aspect, the shape, size, orientation, and darkness of the decorative pattern change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Different changes occur,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-6.
Even if the decorative symbol constitutes a reach, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the symbol mode change effect is not executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the notification effects A to C per the effect mode suggestion image will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. This effect mode suggestion image hit notification effect is executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the effect mode suggestion image hit notification effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7 and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Effect mode suggestion image hit notification effect A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the notification effect A per the effect mode suggestion image. The effect mode suggestion image hit notification effect is an effect in which the effect mode suggestion image notifies the hit when the effect mode suggestion image suggesting the currently selected effect mode is displayed. 54 (A) to 54 (F) show the first example of the notification effect A per effect mode suggestion image, and FIGS. 54 (G) to 54 (L) show the second example of the effect mode suggestion image per notification effect A. An example is shown.

Here, the gaming machine 1 can select a plurality of production modes in which the background image, music, and the like are different during the fluctuation production in the normal state. The effect mode is switched by the player operating the select button 68. In the effect mode suggestion image per notification effect A, it is assumed that the period in which the effect mode switching by the operation of the select button 68 is invalid is not set and the valid period continues. The gaming machine 1 is set with a "battle effect mode", a "dark effect mode", and a "happy effect mode", and one of the effect modes is executed. In the "battle production mode", an image of an enemy character and an ally character fighting is displayed. A dark background is displayed in the "dark effect mode". In the "happy production mode", the background image of the heart is displayed.

In the first example of the effect mode suggestion image per notification effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the effect mode suggestion image, and the enemy character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image of the ally character and the channel image are displayed. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C2, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The variable display of special symbols (variation of special symbols) is indicated by, and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. In FIG. 54 (A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the current variation in the special figure (the variation).

The effect mode suggestion image is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a, and suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "battle effect mode" is selected here, the character image of the "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Here, the effect mode suggestion image does not move from the upper left position of the display screen 7a. The channel image is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and displays the channel (number) corresponding to the currently selected effect mode. Here, the channel of the "battle production mode" is "1", the channel of the "dark production mode" is "2", and the channel of the "happy production mode" is "3". When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is switched to the "dark effect mode" shown in FIG. 54 (B).

As shown in FIG. 54 (B), when the effect mode is switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed at the same position. Specifically, the currently selected "dark effect mode" character image is displayed inside the rectangular image. The display content of the channel image is also changed at the same position. Specifically, the character image of the currently selected "dark effect mode" channel "2" is displayed inside the rectangular image. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are continuously displayed in a variable manner. When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is switched to the “happy effect mode” shown in FIG. 54 (C).

As shown in FIG. 54 (C), when the effect mode is further switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed again at the same position. Specifically, the currently selected "happy effect mode" character image is displayed inside the rectangular image. The display content of the channel image is also changed at the same position. Specifically, the character image of the currently selected "happy effect mode" channel "3" is displayed inside the rectangular image. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are continuously displayed in a variable manner. After that, in FIG. 54 (D), the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 is reduced, the symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L2 and the right decorative symbol 8R2 become visible, and the left decorative symbol 8L2 and the right decorative symbol are further visible. The state in which 8R2 is temporarily stopped at "7" and is in the reach mode is shown.

As shown in FIG. 54 (D), when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are in the reach mode, the number of effect mode suggestion images displayed in the upper left of the display screen 7a as "happy effect mode" increases. The increase effect is executed. Here, a plurality of the same suggestion images are newly generated from the effect mode suggestion image on the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the effect of moving the generated effect mode suggestion images is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 54 (E), two effect mode suggestion images are newly displayed, and a total of three suggestion images are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 54 (E), the moving speed of the two effect mode suggestion images during movement decreases as the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 decreases. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (F), the movement of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 is stopped at the same time as the fluctuation is stopped. The effect mode suggestion image displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a does not move. In FIG. 54 (F), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 is stopped at "7", and the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are fixedly stopped at the hit mode of "777". Along with this, a hit notification effect is executed in which all (three here) effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a notify the jackpot. Specifically, the character image of the effect mode suggestion image changes from the "happy effect mode" to the "big hit !!!! Happy effect mode", and the player is notified of the big hit. The mode of notifying the hit is not limited to the above.

In the second example of the effect mode suggestion image per notification effect A, as shown in FIG. 54 (G), the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the effect mode suggestion image, the enemy character, and the ally character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image and the channel image of are displayed.
The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the current variation in the special symbol (the variation). The effect mode suggestion image suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "battle effect mode" is selected here, the character image of the "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Here, the effect mode suggestion image moves clockwise inside the display screen 7a in conjunction with the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2. The channel image is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and displays the channel (number) corresponding to the currently selected effect mode. Here, the channel "1" of the "battle production mode" is displayed. When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is switched to the "dark effect mode" shown in FIG. 54 (H).

As shown in FIG. 54 (H), when the effect mode is switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed while changing the display position by moving. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image is switched to the "dark effect mode" in which the character image is currently selected while moving clockwise inside the display screen 7a. The display content of the channel image is changed at the same position. Specifically, as for the channel image, the character image of the channel "2" of the currently selected "dark effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are continuously displayed in a variable manner. After that, when the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 decreases, the moving speed of the effect mode suggestion image also decreases. When the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are not in the reach mode, the number of effect mode suggestion images does not change.

FIG. 54 (I) shows a state in which the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixedly stopped after that. The effect mode suggestion image stops moving as the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 stops. The position of the channel image does not change from the lower left of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 54 (J), when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 start the next fluctuation, the effect mode suggestion image resumes the movement. Here, the effect mode suggestion image moves clockwise from the position stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a inside the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 54 (K), when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are in the reach mode of "7 ↓ 7", the effect mode suggestion image represented as "happy effect mode" displayed on the display screen 7a. An increasing effect is performed in which the number of is increased. Here, a plurality of the same suggestion images are newly generated from the effect mode suggestion image while the display screen 7a is moving clockwise, and the effect that the generated effect mode suggestion images are diffused and moved is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 54 (L), two effect mode suggestion images are newly displayed, and a total of three suggestion images are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 54 (L), the three effect mode suggestion images stop the movement of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 at the same time as the fluctuation stop. The middle decorative symbol 8C2 stops at "7", and the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are fixedly stopped at the hit mode of "777". Along with this, a hit notification effect is executed in which all (three here) effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a notify the jackpot. Specifically, the character image of the effect mode suggestion image changes from the "happy effect mode" to the "big hit !!!! Happy effect mode", and the player is notified of the big hit. The mode of notifying the hit is not limited to the above.

[Notification effect B per suggestion image of effect mode]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the notification effect B per the effect mode suggestion image. The effect mode suggestion image hit notification effect is an effect in which the effect mode suggestion image notifies the hit when the effect mode suggestion image suggesting the currently selected effect mode is displayed.

Here, the gaming machine 1 can select a plurality of production modes in which the background image, music, and the like are different during the fluctuation production in the normal state. The effect mode is switched by the player operating the select button 68. In the effect mode suggestion image hit notification effect B, a period in which the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 is valid and a period in which the effect mode is ineffective are set. Here, when the effect mode suggestion image is displayed (visible), the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 is invalid, and the effect mode suggestion image is not displayed (difficult to see). At this time, switching of the effect mode by operating the select button 68 is an effective period. Here, the effect mode suggestion image is displayed when the effect mode is switched and when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible. Specifically, it is displayed for a predetermined period after the effect mode is switched, when the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 is stopped, and when the symbol is fluctuating at a low speed immediately after the fluctuation starts and immediately before the fluctuation stop. When there is no switching of the effect mode and the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 fluctuate at high speed and the symbols cannot be visually recognized, the effect mode suggestion image is not displayed.

The gaming machine 1 is set with a "battle effect mode", a "dark effect mode", and a "happy effect mode", and one of the effect modes is executed. In the "battle production mode", an image of an enemy character and an ally character fighting is displayed. A dark background is displayed in the "dark effect mode". In the "happy production mode", the background image of the heart is displayed.

In the effect mode suggestion image per notification effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, an effect mode suggestion image, and a channel image are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C2, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The variable display of special symbols (variation of special symbols) is indicated by, and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. In FIG. 55 (A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are stopped and displayed.

The effect mode suggestion image suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "dark effect mode" is selected here, the character image of the "dark effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Here, the effect mode suggestion image moves clockwise inside the display screen 7a in accordance with the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2. In FIG. 55 (A), since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are "displayed (stopped display)" in the "stopped state", the effect mode suggestion image is "displayed (stopped display)" in the "stopped state". Has been done. Further, since the effect mode suggestion image is displayed, it is a period in which switching of the effect mode by operating the select button 68 is invalid (impossible).

The channel image is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and displays the channel (number) corresponding to the currently selected effect mode. Here, the channel of the "battle production mode" is "1", the channel of the "dark production mode" is "2", and the channel of the "happy production mode" is "3".

As shown in FIG. 55 (B), when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 start the next fluctuation, the effect mode suggestion image resumes the movement. Here, the effect mode suggestion image moves clockwise from the position stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a inside the display screen 7a. When the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 increases and the symbols become difficult to see, the display of the effect mode suggestion image disappears as shown in FIG. 55 (C). Since the effect mode suggestion image is not displayed, the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 is switched to an effective period. At this time, when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is switched to the “happy effect mode” shown in FIG. 55 (D). The display of the effect mode suggestion image may disappear after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 increases and the symbols become difficult to see.

As shown in FIG. 55 (D), when the effect mode is switched, the effect mode suggestion image reappears and moves in a state where the display content is changed. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image moves clockwise inside the display screen 7a in a state where the character image is switched to the currently selected "happy effect mode". Since the effect mode suggestion image is displayed, it is a period in which switching of the effect mode by operating the select button 68 is invalid (impossible). The display content of the channel image is changed to the channel "3" in the "happy production mode" at the same position. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 55 (E), the display of the effect mode suggestion image disappears after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2. When the effect mode suggestion image disappears, the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 is switched to an effective period.

As shown in FIG. 55 (F), when the fluctuation speed of the left and right decorative symbols 8L2, 8R2 among the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 decreases and the symbols become visible, the effect mode suggestion image reappears and is displayed. Move the inside of the screen 7a clockwise. Since the effect mode suggestion image is displayed, the effect mode switching by the operation of the select button 68 is switched to the invalid (impossible) period.

FIG. 55 (G) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L2 and the right decorative symbol 8R2 are temporarily stopped at “7” to enter the reach mode. When some of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are temporarily stopped and displayed (here, the reach mode), the number of effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a as "happy effect mode" is increased. An increasing effect is executed. Here, a plurality of the same suggestion images are newly generated from the effect mode suggestion image while the display screen 7a is moving clockwise, and the effect that the generated effect mode suggestion images are diffused and moved is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 55 (G), two effect mode suggestion images are newly displayed, and a total of three suggestion images are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 55 (H), the three effect mode suggestion images stop the movement of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 at the same time as the fluctuation stop. The middle decorative symbol 8C2 stops at "7", and the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are fixedly stopped at the hit mode of "777". Along with this, a hit notification effect is executed in which all (three here) effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a notify the jackpot. Specifically, the character image of the effect mode suggestion image changes from the "happy effect mode" to the "big hit !!!! Happy effect mode", and the player is notified of the big hit. The mode of notifying the hit is not limited to the above.

FIGS. 55 (I) to (J) are effects performed after FIG. 55 (F) instead of FIGS. 55 (G) to (H). FIG. 55 (I) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L2 is temporarily stopped at “5” and the right decorative symbol 8R2 is temporarily stopped at “6” to be in a lost mode. When some of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are temporarily stopped and displayed (here, the loss mode), the number of effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a as "happy effect mode" is displayed. An increasing effect is executed. Here, an effect of displaying two effect mode suggestion images, an effect mode suggestion image for moving the display screen 7a to the right and an effect mode suggestion image for moving the display screen 7a to the left, is executed.

As shown in FIG. 55 (J), the two effect mode suggestion images stop the movement of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 at the same time as the fluctuation stop. The middle decorative symbol 8C2 stops at "3", and the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are fixedly stopped in the loss mode of "536". Along with this, all (here, two) effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a stop moving. The display content of the effect mode suggestion image does not change.

FIG. 55 (K) is an effect performed instead of FIG. 55 (J). In FIG. 55 (J), it is assumed that the display content of the effect mode suggestion image does not change, but here, the loss notification effect is executed in which the display content changes to notify the loss. Specifically, the character image of the effect mode suggestion image changes from the "happy effect mode" to the "sorry, missed !!!! happy effect mode", and the player is notified of the loss. The mode for notifying the loss is not limited to the above.

FIG. 55 (L) is an effect executed in place of FIGS. 55 (J) and 55 (K). In FIGS. 55 (J) and 55 (K), it is assumed that the effect mode suggestion image is stopped in an increased state, but here, the number of effect mode suggestion images is restored. Specifically, after FIG. 55 (I), when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are confirmed and stopped in the loss mode of "536", the display of the two effect mode suggestion images that have been moved disappears, and the display screen 7a One of the effect mode suggestion images is displayed in the upper left of.

[Effect mode suggestion image hit notification effect C]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the notification effect C per the effect mode suggestion image. The effect mode suggestion image hit notification effect is an effect in which the effect mode suggestion image notifies the hit when the effect mode suggestion image suggesting the currently selected effect mode is displayed.

Here, the gaming machine 1 can select a plurality of production modes in which the background image, music, and the like are different during the fluctuation production in the normal state. The effect mode is switched by the player operating the select button 68. In the effect mode suggestion image hit notification effect C, a period in which the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 is valid and a period in which the effect mode is ineffective are set. Here, when the effect mode suggestion image is displayed (visible), the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 is invalid, and the effect mode suggestion image is not displayed (difficult to see). At this time, switching of the effect mode by operating the select button 68 is an effective period. Here, the effect mode suggestion image is displayed when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible. Specifically, it is displayed when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 stop changing, and when the symbols are changing at a low speed immediately after the start of the change and immediately before the stop of the change. When the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 fluctuate at high speed and the symbols cannot be visually recognized, the effect mode suggestion image is not displayed.

The gaming machine 1 is set with a "battle effect mode", a "dark effect mode", and a "happy effect mode", and one of the effect modes is executed. In the "battle production mode", an image of an enemy character and an ally character fighting is displayed. A dark background is displayed in the "dark effect mode". In the "happy production mode", the background image of the heart is displayed.

In the effect mode suggestion image hit notification effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the effect mode suggestion image, and the background image of the enemy character and the ally character are displayed on the display screen 7a. And the channel image are displayed. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C2, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The variable display of special symbols (variation of special symbols) is indicated by, and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. In FIG. 56A, the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are stopped and displayed.

The effect mode suggestion image suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "battle effect mode" is selected here, the character image of the "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Here, the effect mode suggestion image moves to the right above the display screen 7a in conjunction with the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2, and is framed out from the right end of the display screen 7a, and then the display screen 7a. The movement mode of frame-in from the left end of the image and moving to the right is repeated. In FIG. 56 (A), since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are "displayed (stopped display)" in the "stopped state", the effect mode suggestion image is "displayed (stopped display)" in the "stopped state". Has been done. Further, since the effect mode suggestion image is displayed, it is a period in which switching of the effect mode by operating the select button 68 is invalid (impossible).

The channel image is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and displays the channel (number) corresponding to the currently selected effect mode. Here, the channel of the "battle production mode" is "1", the channel of the "dark production mode" is "2", and the channel of the "happy production mode" is "3".

As shown in FIG. 56B, when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 start the next fluctuation, the effect mode suggestion image interlocks and resumes the movement to the right. When the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 increases and the symbols become difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), the effect mode suggestion image moves at a high speed and the effect mode suggestion image disappears. Here, a linear image moving at high speed can be visually recognized. Since the effect mode suggestion image is not displayed, the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 is switched to an effective period. At this time, when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is switched to the “dark effect mode” shown in FIG. 56 (D).

As shown in FIG. 56 (D), even if the effect mode is switched, the effect mode suggestion image does not appear because the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are continuously displayed in a variable manner. Since the effect mode suggestion image is not displayed, the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 remains in the valid period. The display content of the channel image is changed to the channel "2" in the "dark effect mode" at the same position. At this time, when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is switched to the “happy effect mode” shown in FIG. 56 (E).

As shown in FIG. 56 (E), even if the effect mode is switched, the effect mode suggestion image does not appear because the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are continuously displayed in a variable manner. Since the effect mode suggestion image is not displayed, the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 remains in the valid period. The display content of the channel image is changed to the channel "3" in the "happy production mode" at the same position.

As shown in FIG. 56 (F), when the fluctuation speed of the left and right decorative symbols 8L2, 8R2 among the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 decreases and the symbols become visible, the effect mode suggestion image reappears and is displayed. Move to the right above the screen 7a. That is, the effect mode suggestion image becomes visible in conjunction with the visibility of a part of the decorative symbol regardless of the presence or absence of the operation by the player. In addition, the effect mode suggestion image is not displayed when the effect mode is switched, and is not displayed for a predetermined period until the fluctuation slows down (a part of the decorative pattern becomes visible) after the switch, and then. Is displayed. Since the effect mode suggestion image is displayed in FIG. 56 (F), the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 is switched to an invalid (impossible) period.

FIG. 56 (G) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L2 and the right decorative symbol 8R2 are temporarily stopped at “7” to enter the reach mode. When some of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are temporarily stopped and displayed (here, the reach mode), the number of effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a as "happy effect mode" is increased. An increasing effect is executed. Here, an effect of displaying a plurality of effect mode suggestion images moving to the right above the display screen 7a is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 56 (G), a plurality of effect mode suggestion images are displayed while repeating frame-in and frame-out.

As shown in FIG. 56 (H), the plurality of effect mode suggestion images stop the movement of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 at the same time as the fluctuation stop. The middle decorative symbol 8C2 stops at "7", and the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are fixedly stopped at the hit mode of "777". Along with this, a plurality of (here, two) effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (I), a hit notification effect for notifying the jackpot is executed. Specifically, the character image of the effect mode suggestion image changes from the "happy effect mode" to the "big hit !!!! Happy effect mode", and the player is notified of the big hit. The mode of notifying the hit is not limited to the above.

FIG. 56 (J) is an effect performed after FIG. 56 (G) in place of FIGS. 56 (H) and 56 (I). In FIG. 56 (J), three effect mode suggestion images are stopped and displayed as the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixedly stopped in a hit mode, and a hit notification effect for notifying a big hit is executed. That is, the number of effect mode suggestion images stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a is randomly determined, and the number displayed may be two or three.

FIG. 56 (K) is a modification executed after FIG. 56 (D). In FIG. 56 (K), after the effect mode is switched, the effect mode suggestion image may be temporarily displayed (for example, 2 seconds) after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 2 seconds later). While the effect mode suggestion image is temporarily displayed, the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 is switched to an invalid period. Alternatively, when a predetermined operation is performed by the player after FIG. 56 (D), the effect mode suggestion image may be temporarily displayed (for example, for 2 seconds) as shown in FIG. 56 (K). While the effect mode suggestion image is temporarily displayed, the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 is switched to an invalid period.

FIG. 56 (L) is a modification executed in place of FIG. 56 (D). In FIG. 56 (L), the linear image moving at high speed is not displayed either. That is, when the effect mode suggestion image disappears, no image related to the movement of the effect mode suggestion image is displayed. Similar to FIG. 56 (D), it is an effective period for switching the effect mode by operating the select button 68.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the notification effect per suggestion image of the effect mode.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, when the effect mode suggestion image suggesting the currently selected effect mode is displayed on the display screen 7a, the effect mode is achieved. It is possible to execute a hit notification effect in which the suggestion image notifies the hit. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, a plurality of effect mode suggestion images are displayed on the display screen 7a, and in the hit notification effect, each effect mode display image notifies the hit. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 (I) and 56 (J), the number of effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a changes, and in the hit notification effect, the effect mode for notifying the hit The number of suggested images may vary depending on the hit. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 (G) to 54 (K) and 56, when the decorative pattern changes while the effect mode suggestion image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the effect mode suggestion It is possible to execute a movement effect in which the image moves in conjunction with the decorative pattern. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 (F) and 56 (H), the display of the effect mode suggestion image disappears during the change of the decorative symbol, and then the display is displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the operation by the player. , Displayed when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 (D) to 56 (F), the effect mode suggestion image is displayed for a predetermined period after the effect mode is switched by the operation by the player. After that, it is displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the operation by the player. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the notification effect per suggestion image of the effect mode.
[Modification 1]
In the effect mode suggestion image hit notification effects A to C, the character content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed at the time of winning to notify the hit. However, the mode in which the effect mode suggestion image notifies the hit is not limited to this. For example, the effect mode suggestion image may be split in two and fireworks may be emitted from the split portion.

[Modification 2]
In the effect mode suggestion image hit notification effects A to C, all the effect mode suggestion images displayed at the time of winning are assumed to notify the hit. However, only a part of the displayed effect mode suggestion image may notify the hit.

[Modification 3]
In the effect mode suggestion image hit notification effects A to C, the number of effect mode suggestion images when notifying a hit may differ depending on the hit. For example, the number of effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a in FIGS. 54 (D) (E), 55 (G), and 56 (G) may change randomly, and may be a hit type or a stop. It may change depending on the design.

[Modification 4]
In the effect mode suggestion image hit notification effect C, when the decorative pattern fluctuates in the vertical direction while the effect mode suggestion image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the effect mode suggestion image is linked to the decorative symbol and the change direction of the decorative symbol. Move in a different left-right direction. However, the effect mode suggestion image may move in the same direction as the fluctuation direction of the decorative symbol in conjunction with the decorative symbol.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is an effect mode suggestion image that suggests the currently selected effect mode.
When a hit is made while the effect mode suggestion image is displayed on the display means, a hit notification effect for notifying the hit by the effect mode suggestion image can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-1.
A plurality of the effect mode suggestion images are displayed on the display means, and in the hit notification effect, each of the effect mode display images notifies the hit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-2.
The number of the effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display means changes, and in the hit notification effect, the number of the effect mode suggestion images for notifying a hit may differ depending on the hit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
When the decorative symbol fluctuates while the effect mode suggestion image is displayed on the display means, it is possible to execute a movement effect in which the effect mode suggestion image moves in conjunction with the decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-4.
The effect mode suggestion image disappears during the change of the decorative symbol, is subsequently displayed regardless of the presence or absence of an operation by the player, and is displayed when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5.
The effect mode suggestion image is not displayed for a predetermined period after the effect mode is switched by the player's operation, and is subsequently displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the player's operation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◆ [Aspect A2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4.
One of the plurality of types of images is an image different from the effect mode suggestion image, and is a predetermined position effect mode suggestion image suggesting the effect mode at a predetermined position of the display means.
The predetermined position effect mode suggestion image does not notify the hit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◆ [Aspect A2-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5 is further described.
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player
During the period when the effect mode can be switched by the operation of the operation means, the effect mode suggestion image is not displayed.
The effect mode suggestion image is displayed during the period when the effect mode cannot be switched by the operation of the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the moving symbol mode change effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. This movement symbol mode change effect is executed during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the moving symbol mode change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Movement pattern mode change effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the moving symbol mode change effect A. The moving symbol mode change effect is an effect in which the mode changes to the second mode while the decorative symbol continues to move in the first mode. In the moving symbol mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variablely displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols. (Special figure fluctuation) is shown, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, respectively, and three or more symbols can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time during deceleration fluctuation. It is moved and displayed vertically side by side. Here, the symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 57 (A), the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down after high-speed fluctuation, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are directed from top to bottom, respectively. Deceleration fluctuation is displayed. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that can be visually recognized. say. On the other hand, high-speed fluctuation means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that is difficult to see. .. In this case, a vertical line image associated with high-speed movement may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 57 (B), after FIG. 57 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R maintain a deceleration fluctuation state from top to bottom, respectively. However, the orientation of each symbol included in each symbol array is upside down. Here, each symbol is turned upside down by rotating 90 ° clockwise or counterclockwise. In this way, when the direction of the symbol is reversed in the vertical direction during the fluctuation, it is suggested that the expectation of hitting in the fluctuation is higher than when it does not. Here, it is suggested that the degree of expectation increases by 20%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R enter the high-speed fluctuating state again due to the increase in the fluctuation speed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The contents of each symbol of are difficult to see. It is suggested that when the speed increases during the deceleration fluctuation and the high-speed fluctuation state is reached again, the expectation of hitting the fluctuation is higher than when the speed does not change. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 5% and the degree of expectation became 25%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R decreases. After the deceleration fluctuation, each symbol included in each symbol arrangement is inverted while maintaining the deceleration fluctuation state. Here, each symbol is inverted by rotating with the vertical direction as the rotation axis. It is suggested that when the symbol is reversed during the fluctuation, the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than when it does not. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 25% and the degree of expectation became 50%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R maintain the deceleration fluctuation state, and the orientation of each symbol included in each symbol arrangement is in the normal state. Return to (normal orientation). After that, the fluctuation speed further decreases and the symbol temporarily stops. When the symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 57 (F), in the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, only one symbol is displayed in each symbol arrangement, and the other symbols are displayed. The display disappears. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L → the right decorative symbol 8R → the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped in this order, and after the three symbols are temporarily stopped, the number of symbols displayed in each symbol array is only one at a time. Become. After that, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped with only one symbol displayed.

57 (G)-(I) are executed after FIG. 57 (A) instead of FIGS. 57 (B)-(D). In FIGS. 57 (G) to 57 (I), the decorative symbol is "normal direction deceleration fluctuation"-> "upside down"-> "high-speed fluctuation"-> "reversal"-> "normal direction deceleration fluctuation". In FIGS. 57 (G) to 57 (I) below, the decorative symbol is "normal direction deceleration fluctuation"-> "reversal"-> "high-speed fluctuation"-> "upside down"-> "normal direction deceleration fluctuation". In this way, in the gaming machine 1, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns having different execution orders and combinations of presence / absence of "reversal", "high-speed fluctuation", and "upside down" are set, and one fluctuation pattern is executed by lottery. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 57 (G), after FIG. 57 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R maintain a state of deceleration fluctuation from top to bottom, respectively. However, each symbol included in each symbol array is inverted. Here, each symbol is inverted by rotating with the vertical direction as the rotation axis. It is suggested that when the symbol is reversed during the fluctuation, the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than when it does not. Here, it is suggested that the degree of expectation increases by 25%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (H), the fluctuation speed increased and the fluctuation speed became high again, and the contents of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R became difficult to see. Become. It is suggested that when the speed increases during the deceleration fluctuation and the high-speed fluctuation state is reached again, the expectation of hitting the fluctuation is higher than when the speed does not change. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 5% and the degree of expectation became 30%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (I), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R decreases. After the deceleration fluctuation, the orientation of each symbol included in each symbol arrangement is turned upside down while maintaining the deceleration fluctuation state. Here, each symbol is turned upside down by rotating 90 ° clockwise or counterclockwise. In this way, when the direction of the symbol is reversed in the vertical direction during the fluctuation, it is suggested that the expectation of hitting in the fluctuation is higher than when it does not. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation has increased by 20% and the degree of expectation has reached 50%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R maintain the deceleration fluctuation state, and the orientation of each symbol included in each symbol arrangement is in the normal state. Return to. After that, the fluctuation speed further decreases and the symbol temporarily stops. When the symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 57 (F), in the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, only one symbol is displayed in each symbol arrangement, and the other symbols are displayed. The display disappears. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L → the right decorative symbol 8R → the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped, and after the three symbols displayed at the same time are temporarily stopped, the number of symbols displayed in each symbol array is simultaneously. There will be only one. After that, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped with only one symbol displayed.

57 (J) to 57 (L) are modification examples executed between FIGS. 57 (E) and 57 (F). In the above embodiment, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L → the right decorative symbol 8R → the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the three symbols are temporarily stopped. After that, the number of symbols displayed in each symbol arrangement is assumed to be only one at a time. In the modified example, the left decorative symbol 8L → the right decorative symbol 8R → the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped, and the number of symbols displayed one after another from the temporarily stopped symbol arrangement is only one.

Further, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach mode, the mode of the changing medium decorative symbol 8C may or may not change, and here, when it changes. The production is shown. When the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in a lost manner, the effect of changing the mode of the middle decorative symbol 8C is not executed.

In FIG. 57 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L → the right decorative symbol 8R, and only one symbol is displayed after each stop. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a deceleration fluctuation from top to bottom. At this time, since the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R have the reach mode of "8 ↓ 8", the effect of changing the mode of the middle decorative symbol 8C may be executed depending on the variation pattern. .. The case where it is executed will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 57 (K), in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the orientation of each symbol included in the symbol array is upside down and inverted while maintaining the decelerated fluctuation state. Here, each symbol is turned upside down by rotating 90 ° clockwise or counterclockwise, and then inverted by rotating each symbol with the vertical direction as the rotation axis. In this way, it is suggested that the expectation of hitting in the fluctuation is higher when the symbol is upside down and inverted during the fluctuation than when it does not become. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 25% and the degree of expectation became 75%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (L), the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C increases and the fluctuation speed becomes high again, and the content of each symbol becomes difficult to see. It is suggested that when the speed increases during the deceleration fluctuation and the high-speed fluctuation state is reached again, the expectation of hitting the fluctuation is higher than when the speed does not change. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 5% and the degree of expectation became 80%.

After that, the orientation of each symbol included in the symbol array returns to the normal state while the intermediate decorative symbol 8C maintains the decelerated and fluctuated state. After that, the fluctuation speed further decreases and the symbol temporarily stops. When the symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 57 (F), in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, only one symbol is displayed in the symbol arrangement, and the display of the other symbols disappears. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped with only one symbol displayed.

[Movement pattern mode change effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the moving symbol mode change effect B. The moving symbol mode change effect is an effect in which the mode changes to the second mode while the decorative symbol continues to move in the first mode. FIGS. 58 (A) to 58 (F) show a first example of the moving symbol mode change effect B. FIGS. 58 (G) to 58 (I) show a second example of the moving symbol mode change effect B. FIGS. 58 (J) to 58 (L) show a third example of the moving symbol mode change effect B.

In the moving symbol mode change effect B, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change in the normal orientation and are stopped and displayed in the normal orientation, and are not turned upside down or inverted. That is, here, the moving symbol mode change effect may not be executed for the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the moving symbol mode change effect may be executed only for the middle decorative symbol 8C. In FIGS. 58 (A) to 58 (F) of the first example of the moving symbol mode change effect B, a case where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the reach mode and the moving symbol mode change effect is executed will be described. do.

In FIG. 58 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the order of left decorative symbol 8L → right decorative symbol 8R in the order of normal orientation after high-speed fluctuation, and one symbol is used after each stop. Is displayed only. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed as a deceleration fluctuation from top to bottom. At this time, since the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R have the reach mode of "8 ↓ 8", the mode of the middle decorative symbol 8C changes depending on the variation pattern (moving symbol mode change effect). May be executed. The case where it is executed will be described below. When the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in a lost mode, the effect of changing the mode of the middle decorative symbol 8C (moving symbol mode change effect) is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), the orientation of each symbol included in the symbol array is reversed while the intermediate decorative symbol 8C maintains a decelerated fluctuation state. Here, here, each symbol is inverted by rotating with the vertical direction as the rotation axis. It is suggested that when the symbol is reversed during the fluctuation, the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than when it does not. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 25% and the degree of expectation became 75%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C increases and the fluctuation speed becomes high again, and the content of each symbol becomes difficult to see. It is suggested that when the speed increases during the deceleration fluctuation and the high-speed fluctuation state is reached again, the expectation of hitting the fluctuation is higher than when the speed does not change. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 5% and the degree of expectation became 80%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C decreases. After the deceleration fluctuation, the orientation of each symbol included in the symbol array is upside down while maintaining the deceleration fluctuation state. Here, each symbol is turned upside down by rotating 90 ° clockwise or counterclockwise. In this way, when the direction of the symbol is reversed in the vertical direction during the fluctuation, it is suggested that the expectation of hitting in the fluctuation is higher than when it does not. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 20% and the degree of expectation became almost 100%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), the orientation of each symbol included in the symbol array returns to the normal state while the intermediate decorative symbol 8C maintains the decelerated fluctuation state. After that, the fluctuation speed further decreases and the symbol temporarily stops. When the symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, only one symbol is displayed in the symbol arrangement, and the display of the other symbols disappears. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped with only one symbol displayed.

In FIGS. 58 (G) to 58 (I) of the second example of the moving symbol mode change effect B, a case where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are not in the reach mode but in the lost mode will be described. In FIG. 58 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the order of left decorative symbol 8L → right decorative symbol 8R in the order of normal orientation after high-speed fluctuation, and one symbol is used after each stop. Only are displayed. The medium decorative symbol 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation. At this time, since the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R have a lost mode of "8 ↓ 5", the effect of changing the mode of the middle decorative symbol 8C is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C decreases. After that, the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C further decreases, and the symbol temporarily stops. When the symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 58 (I), in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, only one symbol is displayed in the symbol arrangement, and the display of the other symbols disappears. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped with only one symbol displayed.

In FIGS. 58 (J) to 58 (L) of the third example of the moving symbol mode change effect B, the moving symbol mode change effect is executed even though the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the reach mode. A case where a fluctuation pattern that is not performed is selected will be described. In FIG. 58 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the order of left decorative symbol 8L → right decorative symbol 8R in the order of normal orientation after high-speed fluctuation, and one symbol is used after each stop. Only are displayed. The medium decorative symbol 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R have a reach mode of "5 ↓ 5". When the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach mode, the effect of changing the mode of the changing medium decorative symbol 8C (moving symbol mode change effect) is executed or not executed. Here, the production when it is not executed is shown.

As shown in FIG. 58 (K), the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C decreases. After that, the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C further decreases, and the symbol temporarily stops. When the symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 58 (L), in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, only one symbol is displayed in the symbol arrangement, and the display of the other symbols disappears. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped with only one symbol displayed.

[Movement pattern mode change effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the moving symbol mode change effect C. The moving symbol mode change effect is an effect in which the mode changes to the second mode while the decorative symbol continues to move in the first mode. In the moving symbol mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variablely displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols. (Special figure fluctuation) is shown, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, respectively, and three or more symbols can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time during deceleration fluctuation. It is moved and displayed vertically side by side. Here, the symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 59 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuation. The high-speed fluctuation means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that is difficult to see. In this case, a vertical line image associated with high-speed movement may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 59 (B), after FIG. 59 (A), in the left decorative symbol 8L, the fluctuation speed is decelerated after the high-speed fluctuation, and the deceleration fluctuation is displayed from top to bottom. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangement of the left decorative symbol 8L move at a speed that can be visually recognized. The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R maintain a high-speed variable display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), in the left decorative symbol 8L, the orientation of each symbol included in the symbol array is upside down while maintaining the state of deceleration fluctuation from top to bottom. Here, each symbol is turned upside down by rotating 90 ° clockwise or counterclockwise. In this way, when the direction of the symbol is reversed in the vertical direction during the fluctuation, it is suggested that the expectation of hitting in the fluctuation is higher than when it does not. Here, it is suggested that the degree of expectation increases by 10%. The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R maintain a high-speed variable display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L increases and the fluctuation speed becomes high again, and the content of each symbol becomes difficult to see. It is suggested that when the speed increases during the deceleration fluctuation and the high-speed fluctuation state is reached again, the expectation of hitting the fluctuation is higher than when the speed does not change. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 5% and the degree of expectation became 15%. The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R maintain a high-speed variable display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L decreases. After the deceleration fluctuation, the orientation of each symbol included in the symbol array returns to the normal state while maintaining the deceleration fluctuation state. After that, the fluctuation speed further decreases and the symbol temporarily stops.

When the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), only one symbol (here, "7") is displayed in the symbol arrangement, and the display of the other symbols disappears. At the timing of the temporary stop of the left decorative symbol 8L and the timing before and after, the fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R decelerates from the high-speed fluctuation, and the deceleration fluctuation is displayed from top to bottom. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangement of the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that can be visually recognized. The medium decorative symbol 8C maintains a high-speed variable display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), in the right decorative symbol 8R, the orientation of each symbol included in the symbol array is reversed while maintaining the state of deceleration fluctuation from top to bottom. Here, here, each symbol is inverted by rotating with the vertical direction as the rotation axis. It is suggested that when the symbol is reversed during the fluctuation, the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than when it does not. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 10% and the degree of expectation became 25%. The medium decorative symbol 8C maintains a high-speed variable display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), the fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R decreases. After the deceleration fluctuation, the orientation of each symbol included in the symbol array returns to the normal state while maintaining the deceleration fluctuation state. After that, the fluctuation speed further decreases and the symbol temporarily stops.

When the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 59 (I), only one symbol (here, "7") is displayed in the symbol arrangement, and the display of the other symbols disappears. At the timing before and after the temporary stop of the right decorative symbol 8R, the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative symbol 8C decelerates from the high-speed fluctuation, and the deceleration fluctuation is displayed from top to bottom. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangement of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C move at a speed that can be visually recognized.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (J), the orientation of each symbol included in the symbol array is upside down and inverted while maintaining the decelerated fluctuation state of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. Here, each symbol is turned upside down by rotating 90 ° clockwise or counterclockwise, and then inverted by rotating each symbol with the vertical direction as the rotation axis. In this way, it is suggested that the expectation of hitting in the fluctuation is higher when the symbol is upside down and inverted during the fluctuation than when it does not become. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 20% and the degree of expectation became 45%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (K), the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C decreases. After the deceleration fluctuation, the orientation of each symbol included in the symbol array returns to the normal state while maintaining the deceleration fluctuation state. After that, the fluctuation speed further decreases and the symbol temporarily stops.

When the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 59 (L), only one symbol (here, "7") is displayed in the symbol arrangement, and the display of the other symbols disappears. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in the hit mode of the state "777" in which only one symbol is displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the moving symbol mode change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move downward in the first aspect (normal direction), and the first variation effect and the first. After the variation effect of, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), with the second variation effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change to the second mode (upside down) while continuing to move downward. , Can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 58 and 59.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), after the second variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R continue to move downward, and the aspect is the first aspect. Returning to (normal orientation), it is possible to execute a variable stop effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (B) and 57 (C), in the second variation effect, the decorative symbol is changed to the second aspect (upside down), and then the moving speed of the decorative symbol is changed. Changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 58 and 59.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58 (A) to 58 (F), the second variation effect is a part of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R capable of notifying the result. The decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) moves in the first aspect (normal orientation) and then stops in the first aspect, and the other decorative symbol (middle) of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The decorative pattern 8C) changes to the second aspect (upside down) while continuing to move. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, the second variation effect is executed when some decorative symbols (left and right decorative symbols) stop in the reach mode, and some decorative symbols reach. It will not be executed if it is stopped in any mode other than. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, in the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R changed to the second aspect (upside down) are further described in the third aspect. It may change to an aspect (reversal), and the expected degree of hit when it changes to the third aspect is higher than the expected degree of hit when it does not change to the third aspect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the moving symbol mode change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the moving symbol mode change effects A to C, the high-speed fluctuation display is defined as a state in which the contents of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move at a speed that makes it difficult to see. However, the high-speed fluctuation display does not have to be a speed at which the content of the symbol is difficult to visually recognize as long as the fluctuation speed is faster than the deceleration fluctuation, and the content of the symbol may be a speed at which the content of the symbol can be visually recognized.

[Modification 2]
In the moving symbol mode change effects A to C, as an example of changing the mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a mode in which the symbols are turned upside down and a mode in which the symbols are inverted are exemplified. However, the content of changing the mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not limited to these. For example, the colors of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may change, the size may change, the shape may change, or a specific image may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
In the first variation effect in which the decorative pattern moves in a predetermined direction in the first aspect,
After the first variation effect, a second variation effect in which the decorative symbol changes to the second aspect while continuing to move in the predetermined direction can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-1.
After the second variation effect, the mode returns to the first aspect while the decorative symbol continues to move in the predetermined direction, and the variation stop effect in which the decorative symbol is stopped can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-1 or the aspect A3-2.
In the second variation effect, the moving speed of the decorative symbol changes after the decorative symbol changes to the second aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3.
In the second variation effect, after a part of the decorative symbols in the set of decorative symbols capable of notifying the result has moved in the first aspect, the decorative symbols are stopped in the first aspect, and the set is set. Other decorative symbols among the decorative symbols change to the second aspect while continuing to move.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A3-4.
The second variation effect is executed when the partial decorative symbol is stopped in the reach mode, and is not executed when the partial decorative symbol is stopped in a mode other than the reach.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5.
In the second effect, the decorative pattern changed to the second aspect may be further changed to the third aspect, and the degree of expectation of a hit when the third aspect is changed is the first. Higher than the expected degree of hit when it does not change to the third aspect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the detached mode symbol movement effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. This out-of-order pattern movement effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the out-of-order pattern movement effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Out of alignment pattern movement effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the detached mode symbol movement effect A. The out-of-order pattern movement effect is an effect in which a set of decorative symbols for notifying the special figure lottery result (whether or not) move together in a state of being lined up in a lost mode. First, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The first decorative symbol 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 is a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L1, the middle decorative symbol 8C1, and the right decorative symbol 8R1, and the special symbol can be changed by the variable display of the set of symbols. The display (variation of special figures) is shown, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L1, the middle decorative symbol 8C1, and the right decorative symbol 8R1 are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 60 (A), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the current variation in the special figure (the variation).

As shown in FIG. 60 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L1 of the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 temporarily stops at "3", and then, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the right decorative symbol 8R1 Temporarily stops at "2". After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C1 temporarily stops at "7". As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L1, the middle decorative symbol 8C1, and the right decorative symbol 8R1 are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "372".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 60 (E) to 60 (K), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 arranged side by side in the loss mode of "372" all move inside the display screen 7a. The symbol movement effect is executed. Here, "moving together in a state where a set of decorative symbols are lined up in a lost manner" means that the left decorative symbol 8L1, the middle decorative symbol 8C1, and the right decorative symbol 8R1 are laterally aligned in a lost manner. It means to move while maintaining the relative positional relationship with each other while lining up.

First, as shown in FIGS. 60 (E) and 60 (F), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 in a state of being arranged side by side in a lost manner perform the first reciprocating motion. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 move toward the upper right corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 in a state of being arranged side by side in a lost manner moved to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a are aligned in the lower left direction of the display screen 7a. Moving. Here, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are enlarged and returned to their original sizes while moving toward the center of the display screen 7a. The first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 arriving at the center of the display screen 7a temporarily stop moving.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 60 (G) and 60 (H), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 in a state of being arranged side by side in a lost manner perform a second reciprocating motion. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 move toward the lower left corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 arranged side by side in a lost manner moved to the lower left corner of the display screen 7a are aligned in the upper right direction of the display screen 7a. Moving. Here, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are enlarged and returned to their original sizes while moving toward the center of the display screen 7a. The first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 arriving at the center of the display screen 7a temporarily stop moving.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (I), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 move in the upper right direction toward the upper right corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced. As the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 move in the upper right direction, the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 frame in from the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, and the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and so on. Move in the same upper right direction. In the second decorative symbol 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C2, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 are all hit modes of "5", and the symbols are aligned side by side. Moving.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 60 (J) and 60 (K), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 move inside the display screen 7a, respectively, at close positions. An effect in which both are stationary at the same time is executed. This can suggest that the battle between the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 begins. Then, an explosion image is displayed as a background image while the two symbols are still. After the display of this explosion image, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 disappear, and only the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (K), the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and then the confirmation is stopped. As a result, the hit of "555" is notified.

[Out of alignment pattern movement effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the detached mode symbol movement effect B. The out-of-order pattern movement effect is an effect in which a set of decorative symbols for notifying the special figure lottery result (win / fail) move together in a state of being lined up in a lost mode. First, as shown in FIG. 61A, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The first decorative symbol 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 is a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L1, the middle decorative symbol 8C1, and the right decorative symbol 8R1 displayed relatively above the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display of the symbol, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L1, the middle decorative symbol 8C1, and the right decorative symbol 8R1 are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The second decorative symbol 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 is a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C2, and the right decorative symbol 8R2, which are displayed relatively below the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display of the symbol, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C2, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

While the variable displays of the first and second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are independent of each other, they represent the variable display of one and the same special symbol (special symbol variation), and the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol is lost. In the case of, the first and second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop in a lost manner. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol is a hit, at least one of the first and second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is fixedly stopped in the winning mode. Here, the fluctuation start timings of the first and second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the fluctuation stop timings of the left decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol, and the middle decorative symbol are all at the same time, but the first and second decorative symbols 8L , 8C, 8R may be different. In FIG. 61 (A), the first and second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the current variation in the special figure (the variation).

After that, in each of the first and second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol are temporarily stopped in this order, and as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the first and second decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. The symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state in which the left decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol, and the middle decorative symbol are temporarily stopped. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L1 of the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 temporarily stops at "3", and then the right decorative symbol 8R1 temporarily stops at "2". After that, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C1 temporarily stops at "3". As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L1, the middle decorative symbol 8C1, and the right decorative symbol 8R1 are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "332". The left decorative symbol 8L2 of the second decorative symbol 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 temporarily stops at "7", and then the right decorative symbol 8R2 temporarily stops at "7". After that, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 temporarily stops at "6". As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C2, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "767".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 61 (C) to 61 (K), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 in a state of being arranged side by side in the loss mode of "332" and side by side in the loss mode of "767". With the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 in the state of being in the same state, the symbol movement effect of moving the inside of the display screen 7a with the left, middle, and right decorative symbols aligned is executed. Here, "moving together in a state where a set of decorative symbols are lined up in a lost mode" means that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decoration of the set of decorative symbols in the lost mode are used. It means that each symbol of the symbol 8R moves side by side in a lost manner while maintaining a relative positional relationship with each other.

First, as shown in FIGS. 61 (C) to 61 (E), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, which are arranged side by side in a lost manner, are scrolled for the first time. The effect of moving is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are reduced in a state of being arranged vertically in parallel on the display screen 7a. Move toward the upper right corner and frame out from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a as it is. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are framed in in the same state as when the first decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are framed out from the lower left corner of the display screen 7a. , Move in the same direction (upper right direction) as when framed out. The first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are enlarged and returned to their original sizes while moving toward the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 arriving at the center of the display screen 7a temporarily stop moving.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 61 (F) to 61 (H), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, which are arranged side by side in a lost manner, are scrolled for the second time. The effect of moving is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are reduced in a state of being arranged in parallel vertically on the display screen 7a. Move toward the upper right corner and frame out from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a as it is. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are framed in and out of the frame from the lower left corner of the display screen 7a. Move to (upper right direction). Here, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 have the same contents as when the frame is out, but the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are the symbols "767" which have been framed out. The design is different from "222". That is, the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C2, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 are framed in by changing to a state in which they are arranged side by side in the contact mode of "222". The first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are enlarged and returned to their original sizes while moving toward the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 arriving at the center of the display screen 7a temporarily stop moving.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 61 (I) to 61 (K), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 arranged side by side in the lost mode and the second decorative symbols 8L2 arranged side by side in the lost mode. , 8C2, 8R2, and 8R2 perform the third scroll movement. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61 (I), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are reduced in a state of being arranged in parallel vertically on the display screen 7a. Move toward the upper right corner and frame out from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a as it is. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (J), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are framed in and out of the frame from the lower left corner of the display screen 7a. Move to (upper right direction). Here, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 have the same contents as when the frame is out, but the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are the symbols "222" which have been framed out. The design is different from "777". That is, the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C2, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 are framed in by changing to a state in which they are arranged side by side in the hit mode of "777". The first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are enlarged and returned to their original sizes while moving toward the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (K), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 arriving at the center of the display screen 7a are stationary at the same time.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (L), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 move toward the upper right corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced, and frame out from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a as they are. After that, and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are fixedly stopped. As a result, the hit of "777" is notified.

[Out of alignment pattern movement effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the detached mode symbol movement effect C. The out-of-order pattern movement effect is an effect in which a set of decorative symbols for notifying the special figure lottery result (win / fail) move together in a state of being lined up in a lost mode. First, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variablely displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols. (Special figure fluctuation) is shown, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed from above to below the display screen 7a, respectively, and when deceleration changes, two or three symbols can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time. It is moved and displayed vertically side by side. Here, the respective symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 62 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed with high-speed fluctuations corresponding to the current special map fluctuations (the fluctuations). The high-speed fluctuation means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that is difficult to see. In this case, a vertical line image associated with high-speed movement may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 62 (B), in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the fluctuation speed slows down after high-speed fluctuation, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are from above, respectively. The deceleration fluctuation is displayed downward. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that can be visually recognized. say. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R decelerate and fluctuate from top to bottom with the symbols included in each symbol arrangement lined up in a horizontal row.

As shown in FIG. 62 (B), the first row 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbol is arranged side by side in the loss mode of "372" on the display screen 7a, and the deceleration movement is displayed from top to bottom, and the display screen 7a is displayed. Frame out from the bottom edge. Subsequent second rows 8L, 8C, 8R of decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "483", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the third rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "594", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. , Frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. Subsequent fourth columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative pattern are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "615", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), “615” in the fourth column of the decorative symbol is framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. Subsequent decorative symbols, 5th columns 8L, 8C, 8R, are arranged side by side in the hit mode of "777", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), “777” in the fifth column of the decorative symbol is framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. Subsequent 6th columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative pattern are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "826", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), an effect of narrowing the space between the rows of decorative symbols is executed. The "826" in the sixth column of the decorative pattern is framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. Subsequent 7th columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the contact mode of "666", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. The time between the frame-in of the 6th column "826" of the decorative pattern and the frame-in of the 7th column "666" of the decorative pattern is shortened, and the 6th column "826" of the decorative pattern is displayed. The space between the decorative pattern and the 7th column "666" becomes narrower. Further, the subsequent 8th columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "832", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. The time between the frame-in of the 7th column "666" of the decorative pattern and the frame-in of the 8th column "832" of the decorative pattern is shortened, and the 7th column "666" of the decorative pattern is displayed. The distance from the 8th row "832" of the decorative pattern becomes narrower. As a result, the decorative symbols of the three rows 8L, 8C, and 8R can be visually recognized at the same time on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), the effect of narrowing the space between the rows of decorative symbols is continued. The "666" in the seventh column of the decorative pattern is framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. Subsequent "832" in the eighth column of the decorative pattern is displayed as a decelerating movement downward. Further, the subsequent 9th columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the contact mode of "222", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. The time between the frame-in of the 8th column "832" of the decorative pattern and the frame-in of the 9th column "222" of the decorative pattern is shortened, and the time is shortened to "832" in the 8th column of the decorative pattern. The distance from "222" in the 9th column of the decorative pattern becomes narrower. As a result, the decorative symbols of the three rows 8L, 8C, and 8R are simultaneously visible on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), the variation direction change effect in which the variation direction of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R changes is executed. Here, the fluctuation directions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are opposite. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as deceleration fluctuations from bottom to top. As a result, "222" in the ninth column of the decorative pattern is framed out from the upper end of the display screen 7a. Further, the "832" in the eighth column of the decorative symbol moves upward and then temporarily stops above the display screen 7a. Further, after the "666" in the seventh column of the decorative pattern is also moved upward, it is temporarily stopped at the center of the display screen 7a. The "826" in the sixth column of the decorative pattern also moves upward, and then temporarily stops below the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 62 (I) to 62 (K), the “832” in the eighth column of the decorative symbol in the lost mode, the “666” in the seventh column of the decorative symbol in the hit mode, and the decoration in the lost mode. "826" in the 6th column of the design and "826" perform a horizontal scroll movement effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62 (I), the 8th column "832", the 7th column "666", and the 6th column "826" of the decorative pattern are aligned to the left. And frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a as it is. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (J), the 8th column, the 7th column, and the 6th column of the decorative pattern are aligned from the right end of the display screen 7a to frame in and frame out in the same direction (left). Move in the direction). Here, the eighth column of the decorative symbol is the symbol "832" having the same content as when the frame is out, and the sixth column of the decorative symbol is also the symbol "826" having the same content as when the frame is out. On the other hand, the seventh column of the decorative symbol is a symbol "777" different from the symbol "666" when the frame is out. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (K), the 8th column "832", the 7th column "777", and the 6th column "826" of the decorative symbols arriving at the center of the display screen 7a move. To stop and temporarily stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (L), the “832” in the eighth column of the decorative symbol moves upward and is framed out from the upper end of the display screen 7a as it is. Further, the "826" in the sixth column of the decorative pattern moves downward and is framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a as it is. After that, "777" in the seventh column of the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the center of the display screen 7a to notify the hit.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the off-axis pattern movement effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, it is possible to execute a symbol movement effect in which a set of first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 move together in a state of being arranged side by side in a lost manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61 and 62.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, in the symbol movement effect, a set of first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are moved together in a state of being lined up in a lost manner a plurality of times. Will be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61 and 62.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, in the symbol movement effect, after the effect that a set of first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 move together in a state of being lined up in a lost manner, after the effect. An effect is executed in which a set of second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 move together in a state of being lined up in a winning manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61 and 62.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, in the symbol movement effect, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 that move in a lined-up manner in a lost manner are arranged in a hit manner. Both the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 that move together in the state are displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the symbol movement effect, the first decorative symbols 8L1 that move together in a lost manner. , 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 that move together in a lined-up manner in a hit manner, and the symbol movement stop effect displayed on the display screen 7a with both of them stopped moving. Can be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61 and 62.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, in the symbol movement stop effect, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 that move in a lined-up manner in a lost manner are arranged in a hit manner. Both the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2, which move together in the same state, stop the movement at the same time. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61 and 62.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, in the symbol movement effect, the decorative symbols that move in a lined-up manner in a lost manner are aligned with the moving direction of the decorative symbols in a hit-shaped manner. The moving direction of the moving decorative pattern is the same. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61 and 62.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the detached mode symbol movement effect.
[Modification 1]
The effects of the out-of-shape symbol movement effects A to C may be combined as appropriate.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns for notifying the result.
It is possible to execute a symbol movement effect in which the set of decorative symbols move together in a state of being lined up in a lost manner.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-1.
In the symbol movement effect, the effect of moving the set of decorative symbols in a lined-up manner in a lost manner is executed a plurality of times.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-1 or the aspect A4-2.
In the symbol movement effect, after the effect of moving the set of decorative symbols side by side in a lost manner, the effect of moving the set of decorative symbols side by side in a winning manner is performed. Will be executed
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-3.
In the symbol movement effect, both the decorative symbols that move in a lined-up manner in a lost manner and the decorative symbols that move in a lined-up manner in a hitting manner are displayed on the display means.
After the symbol movement effect, the display is performed in a state where both the decorative symbols that move in a lined-up manner in a lost manner and the decorative symbols that move in a lined-up manner in a hit manner are stopped. It is possible to execute the pattern movement stop effect displayed on the means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-4.
In the symbol movement stop effect, both the decorative symbols that move in a lined-up manner in a lost manner and the decorative symbols that move in a lined-up manner in a hitting manner both stop moving at the same time.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-3 to A4-5.
In the symbol movement effect, the moving direction of the decorative symbols that move in a lined-up manner in a lost manner and the moving direction of the decorative symbols that move in a lined-up manner in a hitting manner are the same direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the symbol number difference change effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. This symbol number difference change effect is executed during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol number difference change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Design number difference change effect A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the symbol number difference change effect A. In the design number difference change effect, the difference between the numbers represented by the first and second decorative symbols in the set of decorative symbols that notify the special figure lottery result (win / fail) is the predetermined value. It is an effect that after moving in a lined up state, the numbers move in a lined up state so that the difference between the numbers is a value deviated by 1 from a predetermined value. First, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variablely displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols. (Special figure fluctuation) is shown, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed from above to below the display screen 7a, respectively, so that two or more symbols can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when deceleration fluctuates. It is moved and displayed vertically side by side. Here, the respective symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 63 (A), the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down after high-speed fluctuation, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are directed from top to bottom, respectively. Deceleration fluctuation is displayed. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that can be visually recognized. say. On the other hand, high-speed fluctuation means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that is difficult to see. .. In this case, a vertical line image associated with high-speed movement may be displayed.

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R decelerate and fluctuate from top to bottom with the symbols included in each symbol arrangement lined up in a horizontal row. At this time, an effect is executed in which the difference between the numbers represented by the right decorative symbols 8R and the middle decorative symbols 8C arranged in a horizontal row becomes a predetermined value (here, "2").

The first rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols are lined up side by side on the display screen 7a in a loss mode of "424" and displayed in a decelerated movement from top to bottom, and the frame is out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The difference between the numbers (“4” and “2”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the first column of the decorative symbol is “2” (= predetermined value). Subsequent second rows 8L, 8C, 8R of decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "535", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. The difference between the numbers (“5” and “3”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the second column of the decorative symbol is “2” (= predetermined value).

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the third rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the second row "535" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "636" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“6” and “3”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the third column of the decorative symbol is “3”. That is, the value deviates by 1 from the predetermined value. Here, the middle decorative symbol 8C in the third row of the decorative symbols is displayed small. This suggests that the original symbol arrangement "987654321" of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is "4", but a symbol having a different value "3" is arranged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the fourth rows 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the third row "636" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "747" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“7” and “4”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the fourth column of the decorative symbol is “3”. That is, the value deviates by 1 from the predetermined value.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the fifth rows 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the fourth row "747" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "848" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“8” and “4”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the fifth column of the decorative symbol is “4”. That is, the value deviates from the predetermined value by 2. Here, the middle decorative symbol 8C in the fifth column of the decorative symbol is displayed small. This suggests that the original symbol arrangement "987654321" of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is "5", but a symbol having a different value "4" is arranged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the sixth columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the fifth row "848" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "959" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“9” and “5”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the sixth column of the decorative symbol is “4”. That is, the value deviates from the predetermined value by 2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), the 7th columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the 6th row "959" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "151" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“1” and “5”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the seventh column of the decorative symbol is “4”. That is, the value deviates from the predetermined value by 2. Here, the middle decorative symbol 8C in the seventh column of the decorative symbol is displayed small. This suggests that the original symbol arrangement "987654321" of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is "6", but a symbol having a different value "5" is arranged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the eighth columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the seventh column "151" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "262" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“2” and “6”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the eighth column of the decorative symbol is “4”. That is, the value deviates from the predetermined value by 2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (H), the ninth columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the eighth column "262" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "313" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“3” and “1”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the ninth column of the decorative symbol is “2”. That is, the difference returns to a predetermined value. Here, the middle decorative symbol 8C in the ninth column of the decorative symbol is displayed small. This suggests that, in the case of the original symbol arrangement "987654321" of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the value is "7", but a symbol having a different value "1" is arranged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (I), the tenth columns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the ninth column "313" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "424" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“4” and “2”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the tenth column of the decorative symbol is “2”. That is, the difference becomes a predetermined value.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuation with the fluctuation speed increasing. Here, a vertical line image associated with high-speed movement is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (K), after the high-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed slows down, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed as deceleration fluctuations from top to bottom, respectively. Will be done. When the deceleration fluctuation is displayed, the effect that the difference between the numbers represented by the right decorative symbols 8R and the middle decorative symbols 8C arranged in a horizontal row becomes "0" is executed. In other words, the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C have the same numbers. The eleventh columns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side on the display screen 7a in the contact mode of "555" and displayed in a decelerated movement from top to bottom, and the frame is out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The difference between the numbers (“5” and “5”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the eleventh column of the decorative symbol is “0”. Subsequent 12th columns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the contact mode of "666", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. The difference between the numbers (“6” and “6”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the twelfth column of the decorative symbol is “0”. After that, the 13th row 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative design following the 12th row "666" of the decorative design are lined up in the hit mode of "777", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. Will be done. After that, the rows of decorative symbols before and after the 13th row "777" of the decorative symbols move upward and downward to frame out from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (L), only the thirteenth column “777” of the decorative symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. As a result, the hit is notified.

[Design number difference change effect B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the symbol number difference change effect B. In the design number difference change effect, the difference between the numbers represented by the first and second decorative symbols in the set of decorative symbols that notify the special figure lottery result (win / fail) is the predetermined value. It is an effect that after moving in a lined up state, the numbers move in a lined up state so that the difference between the numbers is a value deviated by 1 from a predetermined value. First, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variablely displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols. (Special figure fluctuation) is shown, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed from above to below the display screen 7a, respectively, so that two or more symbols can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when deceleration fluctuates. It is moved and displayed vertically side by side. Here, the respective symbol arrangements of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the symbol arrangement of the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged in the order of "975318642" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 64 (A), the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down after high-speed fluctuation, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are directed from top to bottom, respectively. Deceleration fluctuation is displayed. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that can be visually recognized. say. On the other hand, high-speed fluctuation means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that is difficult to see. .. In this case, a vertical line image associated with high-speed movement may be displayed.

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R decelerate and fluctuate from top to bottom with the symbols included in each symbol arrangement lined up in a horizontal row. At this time, an effect is executed in which the difference between the numbers represented by the right decorative symbols 8R and the middle decorative symbols 8C arranged in a horizontal row becomes a predetermined value (here, "0"). Further, the effect that the difference in the numbers represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L arranged in a horizontal row changes for each combination of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L arranged in a horizontal row is executed.

The first row 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative pattern is arranged side by side on the display screen 7a in the contact mode of "444", and the deceleration movement is displayed from top to bottom, and the frame is out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the first column of the decorative symbol is “0” (= predetermined value). Further, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the first row of the decorative symbols is “0”. Subsequent second rows 8L, 8C, 8R of decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "655", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. The difference between the numbers (“5” and “5”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the second column of the decorative symbol is “0” (= predetermined value). Further, the difference between the numbers (“5” and “6”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the second row of the decorative symbols is “1”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the third rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the second row "655" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "856" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“6” and “5”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the third column of the decorative symbol is “1”. That is, the value deviates by 1 from the predetermined value. Here, the middle decorative symbol 8C in the third row of the decorative symbols is displayed small. This suggests that the original symbol arrangement "987654321" of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is "6", but a symbol having a different value "5" is arranged. , The difference between the numbers (“5” and “8”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the third row of the decorative symbols is “3”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), the fourth rows 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the third row "856" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "167" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“7” and “6”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the fourth column of the decorative symbol is “1”. That is, the value deviates by 1 from the predetermined value. Further, the difference between the numbers (“6” and “1”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the fourth row of the decorative symbols is “5”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the fifth columns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the fourth row "167" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "368" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“8” and “6”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the fifth column of the decorative symbol is “2”. That is, the value deviates from the predetermined value by 2. Here, the middle decorative symbol 8C in the fifth column of the decorative symbol is displayed small. This suggests that the original symbol arrangement "987654321" of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is "7", but a symbol having a different value "6" is arranged. The difference between the numbers (“6” and “3”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the fifth row of the decorative symbols is “3”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the sixth columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the fifth row "368" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "579" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“9” and “7”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the sixth column of the decorative symbol is “2”. That is, the value deviates from the predetermined value by 2. Further, the difference between the numbers (“7” and “5”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the sixth row of the decorative symbols is “2”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), the 7th columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the 6th row "579" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "731" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“1” and “3”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the seventh column of the decorative symbol is “2”. That is, the value deviates from the predetermined value by 2. Here, the middle decorative symbol 8C in the seventh column of the decorative symbol is displayed small. This suggests that the original symbol arrangement "987654321" of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is "8", but a symbol having a different value "3" is arranged. The difference between the numbers (“3” and “7”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the seventh row of the decorative symbols is “4”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the eighth columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the seventh column "731" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "942" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“2” and “4”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the eighth column of the decorative symbol is “2”. That is, the value deviates from the predetermined value by 2. Further, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “9”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the eighth row of the decorative symbols is “5”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (H), the ninth columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the eighth column "942" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "233" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“3” and “3”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the ninth column of the decorative symbol is “0”. That is, the difference returns to a predetermined value. Here, the middle decorative symbol 8C in the ninth column of the decorative symbol is displayed small. This suggests that the original symbol arrangement "987654321" of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is "5", but a symbol having a different value "3" is arranged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (I), the tenth columns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the ninth column "233" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the contact mode of "444" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the tenth column of the decorative symbol is “0”. That is, the difference becomes a predetermined value. Further, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the tenth row of the decorative symbols is “0”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (J), the effect that the difference between the numbers represented by the right decorative symbols 8R and the middle decorative symbols 8C arranged in a horizontal row becomes "0" is executed. In other words, the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C have the same numbers. The eleventh columns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the tenth column "444" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the hit mode of "555", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. .. The difference between the numbers (“5” and “5”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the eleventh column of the decorative symbol is “0”. Further, the difference between the numbers (“5” and “5”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the eleventh column of the decorative symbol is “0”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (K), the 12th columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the 11th row "555" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the hit mode of "666" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“6” and “6”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the twelfth column of the decorative symbol is “0”. Further, the difference between the numbers (“6” and “6”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the eleventh column of the decorative symbol is “0”.

After that, the 13th row 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative design following the 12th row "666" of the decorative design are lined up in the hit mode of "777", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. Will be done. After that, the rows of decorative symbols before and after the 13th row "777" of the decorative symbols move upward and downward to frame out from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (L), only the thirteenth column "777" of the decorative symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. As a result, the hit is notified.

[Design number difference change effect C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the symbol number difference change effect C. In the design number difference change effect, the difference between the numbers represented by the first and second decorative symbols in the set of decorative symbols that notify the special figure lottery result (win / fail) is the predetermined value. It is an effect that after moving in a lined up state, the numbers move in a lined up state so that the difference between the numbers is a value deviated by 1 from a predetermined value. First, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variablely displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols. (Special figure fluctuation) is shown, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed from above to below the display screen 7a, respectively, so that two or more symbols can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when deceleration fluctuates. It is moved and displayed vertically side by side. Here, the respective symbol arrangements of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the symbol arrangement of the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged in the order of "975318642" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 65 (A), the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down after high-speed fluctuation, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are directed from top to bottom, respectively. Deceleration fluctuation is displayed. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that can be visually recognized. say. On the other hand, high-speed fluctuation means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that is difficult to see. .. In this case, a vertical line image associated with high-speed movement may be displayed.

The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R decelerate and fluctuate from top to bottom with the symbols included in each symbol arrangement lined up in a horizontal row. At this time, an effect is executed in which the difference between the numbers represented by the right decorative symbols 8R and the middle decorative symbols 8C arranged in a horizontal row becomes a predetermined value (here, "0"). Further, the effect that the difference in the numbers represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L arranged in a horizontal row changes for each combination of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L arranged in a horizontal row is executed.

On the display screen 7a, the first rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the contact mode of "444", and the deceleration movement is displayed from top to bottom. The difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the first column of the decorative symbol is “0” (= predetermined value). Further, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the first row of the decorative symbols is “0”. Subsequent second rows 8L, 8C, 8R of decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "655", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. The difference between the numbers (“5” and “5”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the second column of the decorative symbol is “0” (= predetermined value). Further, the difference between the numbers (“5” and “6”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the second row of the decorative symbols is “1”.

After that, with the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R continuing the deceleration fluctuation, the intermediate decorative symbol primary stop effect in which only the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the "4" and "5" vertically arranged as the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped, and the "4" and "6" are arranged vertically as the left decorative symbol 8L. , "4" and "5" lined up vertically as the right decorative pattern 8R move downward, respectively. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the combination of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is shifted by one, and the second row 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbol is "645". Line up in a horizontal row as a loss mode. In addition, the "8" of the left decorative symbol 8L and the "6" of the right decorative symbol 8R are framed in, and the "5" of the medium decorative symbol 8C, which has been paused, is lined up in a horizontal row and the "856" is lost. This is the third row of decorative patterns. In this state, the middle decorative symbol 8C resumes movement in accordance with the deceleration fluctuations of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Due to this middle decorative symbol pause effect, the difference between the numbers ("5" and "4") represented by the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the second row "645" of the decorative symbol is "1". It becomes. That is, the value deviates by 1 from the predetermined value. Further, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “5”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the second row of the decorative symbols is “1”. The difference between the numbers (“6” and “5”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the third column “856” of the decorative symbols that follow is “1”. That is, the value deviates by 1 from the predetermined value. Further, the difference between the numbers (“5” and “8”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the third row of the decorative symbols is “3”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the fourth rows 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the third row "856" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "167" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“7” and “6”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the fourth column of the decorative symbol is “1”. That is, the value deviates by 1 from the predetermined value. Further, the difference between the numbers (“6” and “1”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the fourth row of the decorative symbols is “5”.

After that, the primary stop effect of the intermediate decorative symbol is executed again. With "5" and "6" lined up vertically as the middle decorative pattern 8C paused, "8" and "1" lined up vertically as the left decorative pattern 8L and "6" "6" lined up vertically as the right decorative pattern 8R. 7 ”move downwards. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the combination of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is shifted by one, and the fourth row 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbol is "157". Line up in a horizontal row as a loss mode. In addition, the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L and the "8" of the right decorative symbol 8R are framed in, and the "6" of the medium decorative symbol 8C, which has been paused, is lined up in a horizontal row and the "368" is lost. This is the fifth column of decorative patterns. In this state, the middle decorative symbol 8C resumes movement in accordance with the deceleration fluctuations of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Due to this temporary pause effect of the middle decorative design, the difference between the numbers ("7" and "5") represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the fourth column "157" of the decorative design is "2". It becomes. That is, the value deviates from the predetermined value by 2. Further, the difference between the numbers (“5” and “1”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the fourth row of the decorative symbols is “4”. The difference between the numbers (“8” and “6”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the fifth column “368” of the decorative symbols that follow is “2”. That is, the value deviates from the predetermined value by 2. Further, the difference between the numbers (“6” and “3”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the fifth column of the decorative symbols is “3”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the sixth columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the fifth row "368" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "579" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“9” and “7”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the sixth column of the decorative symbol is “2”. That is, the value deviates from the predetermined value by 2. Further, the difference between the numbers (“7” and “5”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the sixth row of the decorative symbols is “2”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the 7th columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the 6th row "579" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "731" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“1” and “3”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the seventh column of the decorative symbol is “2”. That is, the value deviates from the predetermined value by 2. The difference between the numbers (“3” and “7”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the seventh row of the decorative symbols is “4”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), the eighth columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the seventh column "731" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the loss mode of "942" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“2” and “4”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the eighth column of the decorative symbol is “2”. That is, the value deviates from the predetermined value by 2. Further, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “9”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the eighth row of the decorative symbols is “5”.

After that, the primary stop effect of the intermediate decorative symbol is executed again. With "3" and "4" lined up vertically as the middle decorative pattern 8C paused, "7" and "9" lined up vertically as the left decorative pattern 8L and "1" "1" and "4" lined up vertically as the right decorative pattern 8R. 2 ”moves downward respectively. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65 (H), the combination of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is shifted by one, and the eighth row 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbol is "932". Line up in a horizontal row as a loss mode. In addition, the "2" of the left decorative symbol 8L and the "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R are framed in, and the "4" of the medium decorative symbol 8C, which has been paused, is lined up in a horizontal row and the "243" is lost. This is the 9th row of decorative patterns.

Due to this temporary pause effect of the middle decorative design, the difference between the numbers ("2" and "3") represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the 8th column "932" of the decorative design is "1". It becomes. That is, the value deviates by 1 from the predetermined value. Further, the difference between the numbers (“3” and “9”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the eighth row of the decorative symbols is “6”. The difference between the numbers (“3” and “4”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the ninth column “243” of the subsequent decorative symbols is “1”. That is, the value deviates by 1 from the predetermined value. Further, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “2”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the ninth column of the decorative symbols is “2”.

Here, the primary stop effect of the middle decoration pattern continues. With "3" and "4" lined up vertically as the middle decorative pattern 8C kept paused, "9" and "2" lined up vertically as the left decorative pattern 8L and "2" lined up vertically as the right decorative pattern 8R. "3" moves downward respectively. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65 (I), the combination of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is shifted by two, and the ninth row 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbol is "233". Line up in a horizontal row as a loss mode. In addition, the "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L and the "4" of the right decorative symbol 8R are framed in, and the "4" of the medium decorative symbol 8C, which has been paused, is lined up in a horizontal row to form the hit mode of "444". This is the 10th row of decorative patterns.

Due to this middle decorative symbol pause effect, the difference between the numbers ("3" and "3") represented by the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the ninth column "233" of the decorative symbol is "0". Will be. That is, it returns to a predetermined value. Further, the difference between the numbers (“3” and “2”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the ninth column of the decorative symbols is “1”. The difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the tenth column “444” of the subsequent decorative symbols is “0”. That is, it returns to a predetermined value. Further, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the tenth row of the decorative symbols is “0”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (J), the effect that the difference between the numbers represented by the right decorative symbols 8R and the middle decorative symbols 8C arranged in a horizontal row becomes "0" is executed. In other words, the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C have the same numbers. The eleventh columns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the tenth column "444" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the hit mode of "555", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. .. The difference between the numbers (“5” and “5”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the eleventh column of the decorative symbol is “0”. Further, the difference between the numbers (“5” and “5”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the eleventh column of the decorative symbol is “0”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (K), the 12th columns 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative symbols following the 11th row "555" of the decorative symbols are arranged side by side in the hit mode of "666" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The frame is in and the deceleration movement is displayed downward. The difference between the numbers (“6” and “6”) represented by the respective symbols of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the twelfth column of the decorative symbol is “0”. Further, the difference between the numbers (“6” and “6”) represented by the respective symbols of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L in the eleventh column of the decorative symbol is “0”.

After that, the 13th row 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative design following the 12th row "666" of the decorative design are lined up in the hit mode of "777", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. Will be done. After that, the rows of decorative symbols before and after the 13th row "777" of the decorative symbols move upward and downward to frame out from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (L), only the thirteenth column “777” of the decorative symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. As a result, the hit is notified.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the pattern number difference change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the difference between the numbers represented by the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C in the set of decorative symbols is a predetermined value. After the first effect and the first effect, the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C have the difference in the numbers represented by the respective symbols deviated by 1 from the predetermined value. It is possible to execute the second effect of moving in a lined-up manner so as to be. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, after the second effect, the difference between the numbers represented by the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C deviates from a predetermined value by two. It is possible to execute the third effect of moving in a lined-up state so as to have the same value. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, after the third effect, the difference between the numbers represented by the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes a predetermined value. It is possible to execute the fourth effect of moving in line with each other. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, in the first effect, the difference between the numbers represented by the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C becomes a predetermined value. The effect of moving together in a lined state is executed multiple times, and each time the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C move together in a lined state, the number represented by the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C are displayed. The numbers they represent change. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 65, in the first effect, the right decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the set of decorative symbols are arranged side by side. The effect of moving together in the state is executed multiple times, and each time the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L move together in a lined state, the number represented by the middle decorative symbol 8C and the number represented by the left decorative symbol 8L are displayed. The difference with will change. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, after the fourth effect, the right decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the left decorative symbol 8L move together in the same number. The fifth effect to be performed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the symbol number difference change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the symbol number difference change effects A to C, the difference between the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C has been described as a predetermined value. However, the difference between the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C may be a predetermined value, or the difference between the right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L may be a predetermined value.

[Modification 2]
In the symbol number difference change effects A to C, the effects described may be combined as appropriate.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns for notifying the result.
With the first effect in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol of the set of decorative symbols move together in a state where the difference between the numbers represented by the respective symbols is a predetermined value. ,
After the first effect, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are arranged side by side so that the difference in the numbers represented by the respective symbols is deviated by 1 from the predetermined value. A second effect that moves, and is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
After the second effect, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are arranged side by side so that the difference between the numbers represented by the respective symbols is a value deviated by 2 from the predetermined value. A moving third effect can be performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
After the third effect, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol move together in a state where the difference between the numbers represented by the respective symbols is the predetermined value. The production can be performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
In the first effect, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are moved together a plurality of times in a state of being lined up so that the difference in the numbers represented by the respective symbols is the predetermined value. Every time the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are moved side by side, the number represented by the first decorative symbol and the number represented by the second decorative symbol change. do,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
In the first effect, the effect of moving the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern of the set of decorative symbols side by side is executed a plurality of times. The difference between the number represented by the second decorative symbol and the number represented by the third decorative symbol each time the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol move together in a side-by-side manner. Changes,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to claim 3.
After the fourth effect, it is possible to execute a fifth effect in which the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol move together in a state of being lined up with the same number.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the effect symbol superimposition effects A to F will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. This effect symbol superimposition effect can be executed during the variable effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the effect symbol superimposition effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the effect symbol superimposition effect A and the effect symbol superimposition effect B.
[Direction pattern superimposition production A]
In the effect symbol superimposition effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

FIGS. 66 (A) to 66 (F) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol superimposition effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left effect symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down, and then the left effect symbol 8L stops. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol 8R is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown. At this time, the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "6" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R are enlarged and displayed. This is likely to give the player the expectation that the reach aspect will be formed with the "6" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the darkening effect is executed. The darkening effect is an effect in which the entire display screen 7a is darkened. Due to the blackout effect, the effect pattern becomes completely invisible and difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, the "6" symbol of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R is further enlarged and displayed compared to the time of the right symbol stop effect, and the "6" symbol of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R is located below. It is displayed overlapping with the "5" symbol and the "7" symbol located above. Further, a part of the "6" symbol is framed out from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the moving speed of the medium effect symbol 8C is slowed to the extent that the medium effect symbol 8C can be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C slows down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C stops. Here, the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown. As for the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, the "5" symbol and the "7" symbol, which are symbols other than the "6" symbol, are not included as the enlarged "6" symbol returns to the original size. It becomes a display. Of course, the "5" symbol and the "7" symbol may be displayed in an inconspicuous manner such as translucent. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol passes through the center and the "7" symbol stops. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it was a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "6" symbol. As a result, it is clearly notified that the jackpot has been achieved.

[Direction pattern superimposition production B]
In the effect symbol superimposition effect B, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left effect symbol 8L and the middle right effect symbols 8C and 8R are opposite. When the left effect symbol 8L is displayed in a variable manner, "7" symbol → "6" symbol → "5" symbol → "4" symbol → "3" symbol → "2" symbol → "1" symbol → "7" symbol The symbols are displayed in descending order, such as → ... On the other hand, when the effect symbols 8C and 8R on the middle right are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" symbol → ... The symbols are displayed in ascending order.

FIGS. 66 (G) to 66 (L) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol superimposition effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left effect symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down, and then the left effect symbol 8L stops. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol 8R is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown. At this time, the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "6" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R are enlarged and displayed. This is likely to give the player the expectation that the reach aspect will be formed with the "6" symbol. At this time, the "6" symbol may be displayed so as to be framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (I), the darkening effect is executed. The darkening effect is an effect in which the entire display screen 7a is darkened. Due to the blackout effect, the effect pattern becomes completely invisible and difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (J), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, the "6" symbol of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R is further enlarged and displayed compared to the time of the right symbol stop effect, and the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L is "7" located below. The "5" symbol located above the symbol is displayed overlapping the "5" symbol located above, and the "6" symbol of the right effect symbol 8L is displayed overlapping the "5" symbol located below and the "7" symbol located above. .. Further, the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slow enough so that the middle effect symbol 8C can be visually recognized, and a part of the "6" symbols of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R overlaps with the middle effect symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (K), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C slows down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C stops. Here, the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown. The "5" symbol and the "7" symbol may be displayed in an inconspicuous manner such as translucent. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol passes through the center and the "7" symbol stops. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it was a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (L), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, the "6" symbol is fixedly stopped at the center of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As a result, it is clearly notified that the jackpot has been achieved.

FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the effect symbol superimposition effect C and the effect symbol superimposition effect D.
[Direction pattern superimposition production C]
In the effect symbol superimposition effect C, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

67 (A) to 67 (F) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol superimposition effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left effect symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down, and then the left effect symbol 8L stops. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol 8R is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect of displaying a plurality of predetermined images. Here, a plurality of smile images SG are displayed so as to fill the display screen 7a. As a result, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a become difficult to see. Although the plurality of smile image SGs have the same size, the smile image SGs may include images having different sizes. Further, although one type of smile image SG is used, two or more types of images may be used. Furthermore, the smile image SG may be moved and displayed so that the images move in a group.

When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become visible by the disappearance of the smile image SG display, the symbol interval reduction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 67 (D). The symbol spacing reduction effect is an effect in which the space between the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R in the row direction becomes narrower, and the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R overlap in the row direction. Here, it is shown that the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, the "7" symbol, and the "8" symbol overlap as the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the "7" symbol has become a reach symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C slows down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C stops. Here, the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown. As for the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "8" symbol, which are symbols other than the reach symbol "7" symbol, are hidden. Of course, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "8" symbol may be displayed in an inconspicuous manner such as translucent. If it is a big hit, the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "7" symbol passes through the center and the "8" symbol stops. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it was a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol. As a result, it is clearly notified that the jackpot has been achieved.

[Direction pattern superimposition production D]
In the effect symbol superimposition effect D, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

67 (G) to 67 (L) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol superimposition effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left effect symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down, and then the left effect symbol 8L stops. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol 8R is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (I), the image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect of displaying a plurality of predetermined images. Here, a plurality of smile images SG are displayed so as to fill the display screen 7a. As a result, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a become difficult to see. Although the plurality of smile image SGs have the same size, the smile image SGs may include images having different sizes. Further, although one type of smile image SG is used, two or more types of images may be used. Furthermore, the smile image SG may be moved and displayed so that the images move in a group.

When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become visible due to the disappearance of the smile image SG display, the symbol interval reduction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 67 (J). The symbol interval reduction effect is an effect in which the intervals in the row direction of the middle effect symbols 8C are narrowed, and the middle effect symbols 8C overlap in the row direction. Here, it is shown that the "3" symbol, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol overlap as the middle effect symbol 8C. The reach symbol is a "6" symbol, and the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden in the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. In addition, a symbol other than the "6" symbol may be displayed semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (K), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol overlap, and the foremost "5" symbol disappears first. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol disappears and the "7" symbol stops. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that it was a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (L), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, the "6" symbol is fixedly stopped at the center of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As a result, it is clearly notified that the jackpot has been achieved.

FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the effect symbol superimposition effect E and the effect symbol superimposition effect F.
[Direction pattern superimposition production E]
In the effect symbol superimposition effect E, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

68 (A) to 68 (F) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol superimposition effect E.
First, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left effect symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down, and then the left effect symbol 8L stops. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol 8R is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect of displaying a plurality of predetermined images. Here, a plurality of smile images SG are displayed so as to fill the display screen 7a. As a result, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a become difficult to see. Although the plurality of smile image SGs have the same size, the smile image SGs may include images having different sizes. Further, although one type of smile image SG is used, two or more types of images may be used. Furthermore, the smile image SG may be moved and displayed so that the images move in a group.

When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become visible due to the disappearance of the smile image SG display, the symbol interval reduction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 68 (D). The symbol spacing reduction effect is an effect in which the space between the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R in the row direction becomes narrower, and the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R overlap in the row direction. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol are overlapped as the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. By superimposing the two production symbols in this way, it is possible to give the player the expectation of which production symbol will form the reach. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the "7" symbol has become a reach symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C slows down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C stops. Here, the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown. As for the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, the "6" symbol, which is a symbol other than the reach symbol "7" symbol, is not displayed. Of course, the "6" symbol may be displayed inconspicuously such as translucently. If it is a big hit, the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "7" symbol passes through the center and the "8" symbol stops. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it was a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol. As a result, it is clearly notified that the jackpot has been achieved.

[Direction pattern superimposition production F]
In the effect symbol superimposition effect F, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

68 (G) to 68 (L) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol superimposition effect F.
First, as shown in FIG. 68 (G), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left effect symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down, and then the left effect symbol 8L stops. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol 8R is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (I), the image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect of displaying a plurality of predetermined images. Here, a plurality of smile images SG are displayed so as to fill the display screen 7a. As a result, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a become difficult to see. Although the plurality of smile image SGs have the same size, the smile image SGs may include images having different sizes. Further, although one type of smile image SG is used, two or more types of images may be used. Furthermore, the smile image SG may be moved and displayed so that the images move in a group.

When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become visible by the disappearance of the smile image SG display, the symbol interval reduction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 68 (J). The symbol interval reduction effect is an effect in which the intervals in the row direction of the middle effect symbols 8C are narrowed, and the middle effect symbols 8C overlap in the row direction. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol are overlapped as the middle effect symbol 8C. The reach symbol is a "6" symbol, and the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden in the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. In addition, a symbol other than the "6" symbol may be displayed semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (K), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, after the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol to be stopped are enlarged and displayed, either symbol is stopped. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol remains on the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "7" symbol remains on the display screen 7a. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it was a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (L), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, the "6" symbol is fixedly stopped at the center of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As a result, it is clearly notified that the jackpot has been achieved.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect pattern superimposition effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, variable display is performed in a plurality of symbol rows, and the symbols arranged in front and back in a specific symbol row do not overlap in the first state (FIGS. 66 (B) (H), 67 (B) (FIG. 67). Second state (FIG. 66 (D) (J), FIG. 67 (D) (J), FIG. 68 (D) (J)) in which the symbols arranged one after the other overlap from FIG. 68 (B) (H)). The symbol superimposition effect is executed. According to this configuration, the variable display of the design becomes novel, and the fun of the game can be improved. The effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the effect execution means.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a specific symbol sequence is set to a third state in which it is difficult to see, while the first state in which the symbols do not overlap is changed to the second state in which the symbols overlap (FIGS. 66 (C) (I)). 67 (C) (I), FIGS. 68 (C) (I)). According to this configuration, by making the state difficult to see, it is possible to give the player an expectation of how the subsequent effect pattern will be displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the smile image SG overlapping the specific symbol sequence is displayed to make the specific symbol sequence a third state in which it is difficult to see (FIGS. 67 (C) (I) and 68 (C). ) (I)). According to this configuration, by displaying the smile image SG to make it difficult to see, it is possible to give the player an expectation of how the subsequent production pattern will be displayed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the symbol superimposition effect is executed by enlarging and displaying at least one symbol constituting a specific symbol sequence (FIGS. 66 (D) (J), 68 (K)). According to this configuration, at least one symbol is enlarged and the symbols overlap, so that the variable display of the symbols becomes more novel, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the symbol superimposition effect, a part of the enlarged symbol is framed out from the display screen 7a (FIG. 66 (D)). According to this configuration, at least one symbol is enlarged, the symbols overlap, and a part of the enlarged symbol is framed out, so that the variable display of the symbol becomes more novel and the interest of the game can be improved. can.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the symbol superimposition effect is executed in a state where the symbols constituting the specific symbol sequence are stopped and displayed (FIGS. 66 (D) (J), 67 (D), 68 (FIG. 68). D)). According to this configuration, the positional relationship of the stopped-displayed symbols changes, the variable display of the symbols becomes more novel, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the symbol superimposition effect, the enlarged left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R "6" symbols are displayed so as to overlap with the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the adjacent symbol row (. FIG. 66 (J). According to this configuration, since the enlarged symbol overlaps with the symbol constituting the adjacent symbol row, the variable display of the symbol becomes more novel, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, before the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows is completed, the second state in which the symbols arranged in the front and back overlap in a specific symbol row is returned to the first state in which the symbols arranged in the front and back do not overlap (. 66 (E) (K), 67 (E) (L), 68 (E) (L)). According to this configuration, since the symbol superimposition effect is executed during the variable display, the variable display of the symbol becomes more novel, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the effect pattern superimposition effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the effect of making all of the plurality of symbol rows difficult to see is performed. On the other hand, one or two of the left symbol row composed of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle symbol row composed of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right symbol row composed of the right effect symbol 8R are used. You may make it difficult to see.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, the effect of making all of the plurality of symbol rows difficult to see is performed. On the other hand, the configuration may not perform such an effect that makes it difficult to see. Specifically, the effects of FIGS. 66 (C) (I), 67 (C) (I), and 68 (C) (I) may be omitted.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, only the "6" symbol is enlarged and displayed (FIGS. 66 (D) (J)), but a plurality of symbols may be enlarged and displayed. At this time, for example, the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol may be enlarged and displayed so that a double reach is formed.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the darkening effect is performed (FIGS. 66 (C) and (I)), but the darkening may be displayed instead of the complete darkening.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A6-1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
It is provided with an effect executing means capable of performing a variable display in a plurality of symbol rows and performing a symbol superposition effect from the first state in which the symbols arranged in the front and back do not overlap in a specific symbol row to the second state in which the symbols arranged in the front and back overlap.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-1.
The effect executing means sets the specific symbol sequence into a third state, which is difficult to see, while the first state is being changed to the second state in the symbol superimposition effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-2.
The effect executing means sets the third state by displaying a specific image overlapping the specific symbol sequence.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3.
The effect executing means executes the symbol superimposition effect by enlarging and displaying at least one symbol constituting the specific symbol sequence.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-4.
The effect executing means causes a part of the enlarged symbol to be framed out from the display screen in the symbol superimposition effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-5.
The effect executing means executes the symbol superimposition effect in a state where the symbols constituting the specific symbol sequence are stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A6-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-6.
The effect executing means displays the symbol in the second state in the symbol superimposition effect by superimposing it on the symbol constituting the symbol string next to the specific symbol string.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A6-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-7.
The effect executing means returns the symbols in the second state to the first state before the variation display of the plurality of symbol rows is completed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the effect symbol change effects A to F will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. This effect symbol change effect can be executed during the variable effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the effect symbol change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the effect symbol change effect A and the effect symbol change effect B.
[Direction design change production A]
In the effect symbol change effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

FIGS. 69 (A) to 69 (F) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol change effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the symbol stop effect is executed. The symbol stop effect is an effect in which all the effect symbols that are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns are stopped. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L stops at the "6" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the "5" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at the "4" symbol. That is, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a lost manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the right symbol enlargement effect (previous term) is executed. The right pattern enlargement effect is an effect in which the right effect pattern is enlarged. Here, it is shown that the "4" symbol, which is the right effect symbol 8R, is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the right symbol enlargement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the "4" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R is enlarged to the extent that it cannot be recognized as "4". Then, a part of the "4" symbol overlaps with the "5" symbol of the medium production symbol 8C. The "5" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C and the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L are in a recognizable state, but "4" until a part of the "4" symbol covers the entire display screen 7a. The symbol may be enlarged and displayed so as to cover the "5" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C and the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the right symbol change effect is executed. The right pattern change effect is an effect in which the right effect pattern is different from the effect pattern before expansion. Here, the right effect symbol 8R is a “6” symbol. The timing of the "6" symbol is not particularly limited, but it is conceivable that the "6" symbol is used after the symbol becomes difficult to recognize due to the enlarged display and before the symbol is reduced to be easy to see. The "6" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R is gradually reduced. At this time, the stopped middle effect symbol 8C starts to change again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, the reach mode is formed by the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "6" symbol of the reduced right effect symbol 8R. Further, the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down, and the "6" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C is approaching the center of the display screen 7a. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol of the medium effect symbol 8C stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol of the medium effect symbol 8C does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a. 7 ”The symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (F), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "6" symbol.

[Direction design change production B]
In the effect symbol change effect B, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

FIGS. 69 (G) to 69 (L) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol change effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), the symbol stop effect is executed. The symbol stop effect is an effect in which all the effect symbols that are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns are stopped. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L stops at the "6" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the "5" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at the "6" symbol. That is, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the form of reach loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (H), the middle symbol enlargement effect (previous term) is executed. The medium-sized design enlargement effect is an effect in which the medium-sized pattern is enlarged. Here, it is shown that the "5" symbol, which is the medium production symbol 8C, is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (I), the middle symbol enlargement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the "5" symbol of the medium effect symbol 8C is enlarged to the extent that it cannot be recognized as "5". Then, a part of the "5" symbol overlaps with the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L, and a part of the "5" symbol overlaps with the "6" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, it is difficult to recognize not only the middle effect symbol 8C but also the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. The "5" symbol may be enlarged and displayed until the "5" symbol covers the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (J), the middle symbol change effect is executed. The medium pattern change effect is an effect in which the medium effect pattern becomes a different effect pattern from the effect pattern before expansion. Here, the medium production symbol 8C is a “6” symbol. The timing of the "6" symbol is not particularly limited, but it is conceivable that the "6" symbol is used after the symbol becomes difficult to recognize due to the enlarged display and before the symbol is reduced to be easy to see. The "6" symbol of the medium production symbol 8R is gradually reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (K), the medium symbol reduction effect is executed. The medium design reduction effect is an effect in which the medium pattern is reduced. Here, the "6" symbol is reduced so as to approach the sizes of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (L), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "6" symbol.

FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the effect symbol change effect C and the effect symbol change effect D.
[Direction design change production C]
In the effect symbol change effect C, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

70 (A) to 70 (F) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol change effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the symbol stop effect is executed. The symbol stop effect is an effect in which all the effect symbols that are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns are stopped. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L stops at the "6" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the "5" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at the "4" symbol. That is, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a lost manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the right symbol rotation effect (previous period) is executed. The right pattern rotation effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol rotates and moves. Here, it is shown that the "4" symbol, which is the right effect symbol 8R, is rotating clockwise as shown by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the right symbol rotation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the “4” symbol of the right effect symbol 8R continues to rotate clockwise as indicated by the arrow Y, and indicates immediately before the frame is out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), the right symbol change effect is executed. The right pattern change effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol becomes another effect symbol. Here, the right effect symbol 8R becomes a “6” symbol, and it is shown that the frame is in the display screen 7a. The right effect symbol 8R is rotationally moved on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. The timing of the "6" symbol is not particularly limited, but it is conceivable that the "6" symbol is set after the symbol is framed out and before the symbol is framed in. In addition, with the frame-in of the "6" symbol, the stopped middle effect symbol 8C starts to change again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, the reach mode is formed by the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "6" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R framed in. Further, the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down, and the "6" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C is approaching the center of the display screen 7a. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol of the medium effect symbol 8C stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol of the medium effect symbol 8C does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a. 7 ”The symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "6" symbol.

[Direction design change production D]
In the effect symbol change effect D, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

70 (G) to 70 (L) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol change effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), the symbol stop effect is executed. The symbol stop effect is an effect in which all the effect symbols that are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns are stopped. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L stops at the "6" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the "9" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at the "6" symbol. That is, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the form of reach loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (H), the middle symbol enlarged rotation effect (previous period) is executed. The medium-designed enlarged rotation effect is an effect that is rotated after the medium-sized pattern is enlarged. Here, it is shown that the "9" symbol, which is the medium production symbol 8C, is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (I), the middle symbol enlarged rotation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the "9" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C is enlarged and then rotated clockwise as shown by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (J), the middle symbol change effect is executed. The medium symbol change effect is an effect in which the medium effect symbol becomes another effect symbol. Here, the medium production symbol 8C is a “6” symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (K), the medium symbol reduction effect is executed. The medium design reduction effect is an effect in which the medium pattern is reduced. Here, the "6" symbol is reduced so as to approach the sizes of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (L), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "6" symbol.

FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the effect symbol change effect E and the effect symbol change effect F.
[Direction design change production E]
In the effect symbol change effect E, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...". Further, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra, which are numbers for identifying the symbols, and pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb, which are character images.

71 (A) to 71 (F) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol change effect E.
First, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the symbol stop effect is executed. The symbol stop effect is an effect in which all the effect symbols that are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns are stopped. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L stops at the "9" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the "6" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at the "7" symbol. That is, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a lost manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the left symbol enlargement effect (previous term) is executed. The left pattern enlargement effect is an effect of magnifying and displaying the pattern information constituting the left effect pattern. Here, it is shown that the design information 8Lb of the left production design 8L is enlarged and displayed. The identification information 8La is hidden by the enlarged display of the picture information 8Lb.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the left symbol enlargement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, it is shown that the pattern information 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L is further enlarged and displayed, and a part of it overlaps with the middle effect symbol 8C. Here, too, the identification information 8La is hidden. Although the "6" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C and the "7" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R are in a recognizable state, the symbol information 8Lb is enlarged and displayed until the symbol information 8Lb covers the entire display screen 7a. , The display may cover the "6" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C and the "7" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the left symbol change effect is executed. The left pattern change effect is an effect in which the pattern information constituting the left effect symbol becomes another pattern information. Here, the pattern information 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L is changed to the same pattern information (design information of the ally character) as the pattern information 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R. The timing at which the pattern information 8Lb changes is not particularly limited, but it is conceivable to change the pattern information 8Lb after the image information 8Lb is enlarged and displayed before the pattern information 8Lb is reduced and displayed. In addition, with the change of the pattern information 8Lb, the stopped middle effect symbol 8C starts to change again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, the identification information 8La of the left effect symbol 8L becomes "7" with the reduced display of the pattern information 8Lb, and the reach mode is formed with the right effect symbol 8R. If it is a big hit, the "7" symbol of the medium effect symbol 8C stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "7" symbol of the medium effect symbol 8C does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a. 8 ”The symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (F), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol.

[Direction design change production F]
In the effect symbol change effect F, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...". Further, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra, which are numbers for identifying the symbols, and pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb, which are character images.

71 (G) to 71 (L) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol change effect F.
First, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), the symbol stop effect is executed. The symbol stop effect is an effect in which all the effect symbols that are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns are stopped. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L stops at the "6" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the "9" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at the "6" symbol. That is, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the form of reach loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (H), the middle symbol enlarged rotation effect (previous period) is executed. The medium-designed enlarged rotation effect is an effect that is rotated after the medium-sized pattern is enlarged. Here, it is shown that "9", which is the identification information 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C, is enlarged. The identification information 8Ca is enlarged and displayed so as to cover the pattern information 8Cb so that the pattern information 8Cb is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (I), the middle symbol enlarged rotation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, "9" of the identification information 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C is enlarged and then rotated clockwise as shown by the arrow Y. At this time, a part of the identification information 8Ca overlaps the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (J), the middle symbol change effect is executed. The medium symbol change effect is an effect in which the medium effect symbol becomes another effect symbol. Here, the identification information 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C is "6".

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (K), the medium symbol reduction effect is executed. The medium design reduction effect is an effect in which the medium pattern is reduced. Here, "6" of the identification information 8Ca is reduced until the size becomes the same as that of the identification information 8La and 8Ra of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. At this time, the display color of the identification information 8Ca is also changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (L), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "6" symbol. Further, with the reduction of "6" of the identification information 8Ca, the pattern information 8Cb is also changed to the pattern information of the ally character.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect design change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute a symbol change effect of changing the lost symbol, which is a symbol constituting the lost mode, to another symbol other than the lost symbol (FIGS. 69 (D) (J), 70 (D) (J), 71 (D) (J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a big hit even after the production symbol is stopped in a lost manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the effect execution means.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, at least a part of the lost symbol is enlarged and displayed and changed to another effect symbol (FIGS. 69 (B) (C) (H) (I), FIG. 70 (H), FIG. 71 (B) (C) (H) (I)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the change of the production pattern stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, at least a part of the lost symbol is rotated and displayed to be changed to another effect symbol (FIGS. 70 (B) to (D) (I) (J), FIG. 71 (I) (FIG. 71). J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the change of the production pattern stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, identification information which is a "number" for identifying a plurality of symbols as at least a part of the lost symbols is adopted (FIGS. 69 (B) to (D) (H) to (J), FIGS. 70 (B) to (D) (H) to (J), FIGS. 71 (H) to (J). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the change of the production pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the lost symbol 8C is composed of the identification information 8Ca and the pattern information 8Cb, the identification information 8Ca is changed, and the pattern information 8Cb is changed according to the change of the identification information 8Ca (FIG. 71 (G) to (L)). According to this configuration, the change of the production pattern becomes novel, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the specific lost symbol is made difficult to see, and then the lost symbol is changed to another effect symbol by changing the specific lost symbol to an easy-to-see state (). 69 (C) (D) (I) (J), FIGS. 70 (C) (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by changing the production pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reach mode is formed or the hit mode is formed by changing the lost symbol to another effect symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by changing the production pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the lost symbol is changed to another effect symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by changing the production pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the effect design change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, at least a part of the effect symbol is enlarged or rotated to make the lost symbol difficult to see. On the other hand, another image may be displayed or an accessory may be moved to make the lost pattern difficult to see.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the rotation display of the "9" symbol is performed in the display screen 7a (FIGS. 70 (H) to (J), FIGS. 71 (H) to (J)), but the "9" symbol is used. It may be enlarged so that it cannot be recognized.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the identification information "9" is rotated to change the identification information "6" (FIGS. 70 (H) to (J), FIGS. 71 (H) to (J)). At this time, the figure may be completely overlapped with "6" by rotating "9" by 180 degrees, or may be a figure that does not completely overlap even if "9" is rotated by 180 degrees. In the latter case, "9", which is rotated and displayed at a certain timing, is switched to "6". Alternatively, in the latter case, the "6" symbol may be rotated 180 degrees from the beginning to be displayed as "9".

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, in FIGS. 71 (J) and 71 (K), the display color is changed after the identification information 8Ca “9” of the middle effect symbol 8C is completely rotated, but the rotation in FIG. 71 (J). The display color may be changed in the middle of the production. Further, the display color may be changed according to the change of the pattern information 8Cb in FIG. 71 (L).

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, when the effect symbol is rotated and displayed, the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a is set as the rotation axis. On the other hand, the effect symbol may be rotated and displayed with the direction parallel to the display screen 7a as the rotation axis.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the effect of rotating "9" to "6" is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, "4" may be rotated and displayed and changed to "5" in the middle.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, the symbol change effect is executed only once. On the other hand, it may be configured to execute the symbol change effect a plurality of times. For example, by executing the symbol change effect a plurality of times, the lost symbol may be finally made into a reach symbol or a hit symbol. Further, for example, by executing the symbol change effect a plurality of times, the lost symbol is changed to the reach symbol and then stopped in the reach loss mode, and the lost symbol stopped in the reach loss mode is changed to the hit symbol. good.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A7-1]
It is a gaming machine that displays fluctuations in the symbol and notifies the winner of the lottery according to the stop mode of the symbol.
It is provided with an effect executing means for executing a symbol change effect of changing a lost symbol, which is a symbol constituting the lost mode as the stop mode, to another symbol other than the lost symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-1.
In the symbol change effect, the effect executing means enlarges and displays at least a part of the lost symbol and changes it to the separate symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-1 or the aspect A7-2.
The effect executing means rotates and displays at least a part of the lost symbol in the symbol change effect to change it into another symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-2 or the aspect A7-3.
At least a part of the lost symbol is identification information for identifying a plurality of symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-4.
The lost pattern is composed of the identification information and the pattern information.
The effect executing means changes the identification information in the symbol change effect, and changes the pattern information according to the change of the identification information.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-5.
The effect executing means makes the specific lost symbol difficult to see in the symbol change effect, and then changes the specific lost symbol into an easy-to-see state, thereby changing the lost symbol into the separate symbol. Change,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-6.
The separate symbol is a hit symbol that constitutes a hit mode, or a reach symbol that is a symbol that constitutes a reach mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A7-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-7.
The effect executing means executes the symbol change effect after the change of the symbol is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the symbol posture change effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. This pattern posture change effect is executed during the change effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol posture change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Design posture change effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the symbol posture change effect A. The symbol posture change effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol tilts in the first direction when the decorative symbol temporarily stops after the change or after the temporary stop, and then returns to the original posture. FIGS. 72 (A) to 72 (G) are effects executed in response to the first special figure change, and FIGS. 72 (H) to 72 (N) are executed in response to the next second special figure change. It is a production to be done.

First, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the character image having a flat plate (bon festival) are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed. The character image is an image of a human being displayed below the display screen 7a, and shows a state in which a large tray is supported overhead by both arms. Here, the tray is represented as a horizontally long rectangular image.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variablely displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols. (Special figure fluctuation) is shown, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. For the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, after starting the variation display in response to the current special symbol variation (the variation), as shown in FIG. 72 (A), first, "6" of the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed. Temporarily stop on the tray.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), "5" of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stops on the tray. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), it is temporarily stopped on the tray at "3" of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped side by side on the tray in the loss mode of "635". Here, a winning game effect is started when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped on the tray are not dropped from the tray twice in a row at the time of the fluctuation and the next fluctuation. Whether or not it will be a hit in the next fluctuation is determined by look-ahead. That is, the effect that the game of the fluctuation is successful and the game is successful even in the next fluctuation is executed when the game is hit by the next fluctuation due to the look-ahead. Even if the next fluctuation does not result in a hit, the game effect may be executed in the fluctuation. In this case, an effect that fails in the game of the fluctuation or the next fluctuation is executed. That is, the failure effect of dropping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily stopped on the tray from the tray is executed.

As shown in FIG. 72 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped on the tray by tilting the tray supported by a person to the right. The effects of moving in the direction and tilting to the right are performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol that moved to the right and tilted to the right as the tray tilted back to the original position. 8R returns to its original position at its original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped on the tray by tilting the tray supported by a person to the left. Moves to the left and tilts to the left respectively. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol that moved to the left and tilted to the left as the tray tilted back to the original position. 8R returns to its original position at its original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a state of being arranged side by side on the tray in the loss mode of "635". At this time, the character image of "First success !!" is displayed. This suggests that the variable game (first time) was successful. This game effect is also executed in the next fluctuation, and if it succeeds, it will be a hit. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the next special drawing lottery is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (H), "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stops on the tray. After that, "4" of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stops on the tray, and then, as shown in FIG. 72 (I), temporarily stops on the tray at "1" of the middle decorative symbol 8C. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped side by side on the tray in the loss mode of "314". Then, the second production of the game, which is a hit when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped on the tray are not dropped twice in a row, is started.

As shown in FIG. 72 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped on the tray due to the large tilt of the tray supported by a person to the right. The effect of moving to the right and tilting to the right is performed. In the second game, it moves more and tilts more than the first game. Specifically, in FIG. 72 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move more to the right and tilt more to the right than in FIG. 72 (D). .. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (K), when the tilt of the tray returns to the original position, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right, which have moved greatly to the right and have been greatly tilted to the right. The decorative pattern 8R returns to its original position at the original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (L), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped on the tray due to the large tilt of the tray supported by the person to the left. The effect that the 8R moves greatly to the left and is greatly tilted to the left is executed. As described above, in the second game, the movement is larger than that in the first game, and the game is tilted greatly. Specifically, in FIG. 72 (L), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move more to the left and tilt more to the left than in FIG. 72 (F). .. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (M), when the inclination of the tray returns to the original position, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8L, which moved greatly to the left and also greatly tilted to the left. The decorative pattern 8R returns to its original position at the original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (M), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped side by side on the tray in the loss mode of "314". At this time, the character image of "2nd success !!" is displayed. This suggests that the variable game (second time) was successful. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (N), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are switched to the hit mode of "333" and are fixedly stopped. In addition, the character image of "big hit !!" is displayed, and the "333" big hit is notified.

[Design posture change effect B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the symbol posture change effect B. The symbol posture change effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol tilts in the first direction when the decorative symbol temporarily stops after the change or after the temporary stop, and then returns to the original posture. FIGS. 73 (A) to 73 (H) are effects executed in response to the first special figure change, and FIGS. 73 (I) to (N) are executed in response to the next second special figure change. It is a production to be done.

First, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the A character image having a flat plate (bon festival) are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, only the left decorative symbol 8L is decelerated and visible, and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuation and are difficult to see. ing. The A character image is an image of a human being displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and shows a state in which the tray is supported by both arms overhead. The character "A" is shown on the face of the A character image. Here, the tray is represented as a horizontally long rectangular image. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variablely displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols. (Special figure fluctuation) is shown, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, respectively, so that two or more symbols can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time during deceleration fluctuation. It is moved and displayed vertically side by side. Here, the respective symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start high-speed fluctuation display in response to the current special symbol fluctuation (the fluctuation), and then, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L first decelerates. Deceleration fluctuation is displayed from top to bottom. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangement of the left decorative symbol 8L move at a speed that can be visually recognized. The middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations and are difficult to see. The high-speed fluctuation means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangements of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that makes it difficult to see. In this case, a vertical line image associated with high-speed movement may be displayed. Here, the image on the vertical line is not displayed and nothing is displayed. The A character image pops out from the lower side of the display screen 7a to the upper side in accordance with the deceleration fluctuation display of the left decorative pattern 8L.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), "6" of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stops on the tray. At this time, "7" of the left decorative symbol 8L is also temporarily stopped above "6". That is, two symbols are displayed at the same time in the symbol row constituting the left decorative symbol 8L. As described above, here, two symbols are displayed at the same time in the same symbol row at the time of temporary stop. After that, the right decorative symbol 8R decelerates, and the deceleration fluctuation is displayed from top to bottom. At the same time, the C character image pops out from the lower side of the display screen 7a to the upper side. The C character image is an image of a human being displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, and shows a state in which the tray is supported by both arms overhead. The C character image shows the letter "C" on the face.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), "5" of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stops on the tray. At this time, "6" of the right decorative symbol 8R also temporarily stops above "5". After that, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C decelerates, and the deceleration fluctuation is displayed from top to bottom. At the same time, the B character image pops out from the lower side of the display screen 7a upward. The B character image is an image of a human being displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and shows a state in which the tray is supported overhead by both arms. In the B character image, the character "B" is shown on the face.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), "3" of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C temporarily stops on the tray. At this time, "4" of the intermediate decorative symbol 8R is also temporarily stopped above "3". As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped side by side on the tray in the loss mode of "635". Further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the loss mode of "746" arranged side by side above "635". Here, a winning game effect is started when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped on the tray are not dropped from the tray twice in a row at the time of the fluctuation and the next fluctuation. Whether or not it will be a hit in the next fluctuation is determined by look-ahead. That is, the effect that the game of the fluctuation is successful and the game is successful even in the next fluctuation is executed when the game is hit by the next fluctuation due to the look-ahead. Even if the next fluctuation does not result in a hit, the game effect may be executed in the fluctuation. In this case, an effect that fails in the game of the fluctuation or the next fluctuation is executed. That is, the failure effect of dropping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily stopped on the tray from the tray is executed.

As shown in FIG. 73 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped on the tray by moving the A character image and the C character image to the right and tilting the supporting tray to the right. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right, and the effects of tilting to the right are executed. At the same time, the B character image moves to the left and the supporting tray tilts to the left, so that the medium decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped on the tray moves to the left and to the left. A tilting effect is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), the trays of the A to C character images were tilted, and the position was returned to the original position, so that the left decorative symbol 8L was moved to the right and tilted to the right. , The right decorative pattern 8R returns to its original position at the original position. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which has moved to the left and has been tilted to the left, also returns to its original posture at the original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), the A character image and the C character image move to the left, and the supporting tray tilts to the left, so that the left decoration is temporarily stopped on the tray. The effect that the symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move to the left and are tilted to the left is executed. At the same time, the B character image moves to the right and the supporting tray tilts to the right, so that the medium decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped on the tray moves to the right and to the right. A tilting effect is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), the tray of the A to C character images is tilted, and the position is returned to the original position, so that the left decorative symbol 8L is moved to the left and tilted to the left. , The right decorative pattern 8R returns to its original position at the original position. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which has moved to the right and has been tilted to the right, also returns to its original posture at the original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a state of being arranged side by side on the tray in the loss mode of "635". In addition, "746" is also fixedly stopped above "635". At this time, the character image of "First success !!" is displayed. This suggests that the variable game (first time) was successful. This game effect is also executed in the next fluctuation, and if it succeeds, it will be a hit. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the next special drawing lottery is started.

As shown in FIG. 73 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed with deceleration fluctuations from top to bottom above the A to C character images after high-speed fluctuations. To. After that, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped side by side on the tray in the loss mode of "314". Further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the loss mode of "425" arranged side by side above "314".

As shown in FIG. 73 (J), the left decoration temporarily stopped on the tray due to the large movement of the A character image and the C character image to the right and the large tilt of the supporting tray to the right. The effect that the symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move greatly to the right and are greatly tilted to the right is executed. At the same time, the B character image moves greatly to the left, and the supporting tray tilts greatly to the left, so that the medium decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped on the tray moves greatly to the left, and , The production that tilts greatly to the left is executed. In the second game, it moves more and tilts more than the first game. Specifically, in FIG. 73 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move more to the right and are greatly tilted to the right than in FIG. 73 (E). Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves largely to the left and is greatly tilted to the left. After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (K), the tray of the A to C character images was tilted and the position was returned to the original position, so that the left decorative pattern was largely moved to the right and greatly tilted to the right. 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R return to their original postures at their original positions. In addition, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which has moved significantly to the left and has been greatly tilted to the left, also returns to its original posture at the original position.

As shown in FIG. 73 (L), the A-character image and the C-character image move greatly to the left, and the supporting tray is greatly tilted to the left, so that the left decoration is temporarily stopped on the tray. The effect that the symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move greatly to the left and are greatly tilted to the left is executed. At the same time, the B character image moves greatly to the right, and the supporting tray tilts greatly to the right, so that the medium decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped on the tray moves greatly to the right, and , The production that tilts greatly to the right is executed. As described above, in the second game, the movement is larger than that in the first game, and the game is tilted greatly. Specifically, in FIG. 73 (L), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move largely to the left and are greatly tilted to the left as compared with FIG. 73 (F). Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves largely to the right and is greatly tilted to the right. After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (M), the tray of the A to C character images was tilted and the position was returned to the original position, so that the left decorative pattern was largely moved to the left and was greatly tilted to the left. 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R return to their original postures at their original positions. In addition, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which has moved significantly to the right and has been greatly tilted to the right, also returns to its original posture at the original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (M), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged side by side on the tray in the loss mode of "314" and "425". Temporarily stop. At this time, the character image of "2nd success !!" is displayed. This suggests that the variable game (second time) was successful. After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (N), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are switched to the hit mode of "555" and are fixedly stopped. In addition, the character image of "big hit !!" is displayed, and the "555" big hit is notified.

[Design posture change effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the symbol posture change effect C. The symbol posture change effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol tilts in the first direction when the decorative symbol temporarily stops after the change or after the temporary stop, and then returns to the original posture. FIGS. 74 (A) to 74 (G) are effects executed in response to the first special figure change, and FIGS. 74 (H) to (N) are executed in response to the next second special figure change. It is a production to be done.

First, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), an A character image, a B character image, and a C character image having decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and flat plates (bon festivals) on the display screen 7a, respectively. And are displayed. Here, the tray is represented as a horizontally long rectangular image. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuation. The A character image is an image of a human being displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and shows a state in which the tray is supported by both arms overhead. The character "A" is shown on the face of the A character image. The B character image is an image of a human being displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and shows a state in which the tray is supported overhead by both arms. In the B character image, the character "B" is shown on the face. The C character image is an image of a human being displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, and shows a state in which the tray is supported by both arms overhead. The C character image shows the letter "C" on the face. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variablely displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols. (Special figure fluctuation) is shown, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed from above to below the display screen 7a, respectively, so that two or more symbols can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when deceleration fluctuates. It is moved and displayed vertically side by side. Here, the respective symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 74 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start high-speed fluctuation display in response to the current special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation), and then, as shown in FIG. 74 (B). The deceleration fluctuation is displayed from top to bottom, respectively. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that can be visually recognized. say. On the other hand, high-speed fluctuation means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical symbol arrangements of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move at a speed that is difficult to see. .. In this case, a vertical line image associated with high-speed movement may be displayed. Here, the image on the vertical line is displayed.

After that, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the tray for deceleration fluctuations are not dropped from the tray twice in a row at the time of the fluctuation and the next fluctuation, a winning game effect is started. Whether or not it will be a hit in the next fluctuation is determined by look-ahead. That is, the effect that the game of the fluctuation is successful and the game is successful even in the next fluctuation is executed when the game is hit by the next fluctuation due to the look-ahead. Even if the next fluctuation does not result in a hit, the game effect may be executed in the fluctuation. In this case, an effect that fails in the game of the fluctuation or the next fluctuation is executed. That is, a failure effect of dropping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the tray for deceleration fluctuation from the tray is executed.

As shown in FIG. 74 (C), the A-character image and the C-character image move to the right, and the supporting tray tilts to the right, so that the deceleration fluctuation is displayed on the tray. The effect that the 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move to the right and are tilted to the right is executed. At the same time, the B character image moves to the left and the supporting tray tilts to the left, so that the medium decorative symbol 8C displaying the deceleration fluctuation on the tray moves to the left and faces to the left. The production that leans to is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the trays of the A to C character images were tilted, and the position was returned to the original position, so that the left decorative symbol 8L was moved to the right and tilted to the right. , The right decorative pattern 8R returns to its original position at the original position. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which has moved to the left and has been tilted to the left, also returns to its original posture at the original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (E), the A character image and the C character image move to the left, and the supporting tray tilts to the left, so that the deceleration fluctuation is displayed on the left. The decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are moved to the left and tilted to the left, respectively. At the same time, the B character image moves to the right and the supporting tray tilts to the right, so that the medium decorative symbol 8C displaying the deceleration fluctuation on the tray moves to the right and faces to the right. The production that leans to is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the tray of the A to C character images is tilted, and the position is returned to the original position, so that the left decorative symbol 8L is moved to the left and tilted to the left. , The right decorative pattern 8R returns to its original position at the original position. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which has moved to the right and has been tilted to the right, also returns to its original posture at the original position.

After that, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are temporarily stopped in order. Specifically, first, "6" of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stops on the tray. At this time, "7" of the left decorative symbol 8L is also temporarily stopped above "6". After that, "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stops on the tray. At this time, "6" of the right decorative symbol 8R also temporarily stops above "5". After that, "3" of the middle decoration pattern 8C temporarily stops on the tray. At this time, "4" of the intermediate decorative symbol 8R is also temporarily stopped above "3". As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped side by side on the tray in the loss mode of "635". Further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the loss mode of "746" arranged side by side above "635".

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped in a state of being arranged side by side on the tray in the loss mode of "635". In addition, "746" is also fixedly stopped above "635". That is, here, two symbols are displayed at the same time in the same symbol row at the time of temporary stop. At this time, the character image of "First success !!" is displayed. This suggests that the variable game (first time) was successful. This game effect is also executed in the next fluctuation, and if it succeeds, it will be a hit. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the next special drawing lottery is started.

As shown in FIG. 74 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed with deceleration fluctuations from top to bottom above the A to C character images after high-speed fluctuations, respectively. To.

As shown in FIG. 74 (I), the A-character image and the C-character image move greatly to the right, and the supporting tray is greatly tilted to the right, so that the deceleration fluctuation is displayed on the left. The decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move greatly to the right, and each of them is greatly tilted to the right. At the same time, the B character image moves greatly to the left, and the tray that supports it tilts greatly to the left, so that the medium decorative symbol 8C, which displays deceleration fluctuations on the tray, moves greatly to the left. At the same time, a production that tilts greatly to the left is executed. In the second game, it moves more and tilts more than the first game. Specifically, in FIG. 74 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move more to the right and are greatly tilted to the right than in FIG. 74 (C). Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves largely to the left and is greatly tilted to the left. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (J), the tray of the A to C character images was tilted and the position was returned to the original position, so that the left decorative pattern was largely moved to the right and greatly tilted to the right. 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R return to their original postures at their original positions. In addition, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which has moved significantly to the left and has been greatly tilted to the left, also returns to its original posture at the original position.

As shown in FIG. 74 (K), the A-character image and the C-character image move largely to the left, and the supporting tray is greatly tilted to the left, so that the deceleration fluctuation is displayed on the left. The decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move greatly to the left, and each of them is greatly tilted to the left. At the same time, the B character image moves greatly to the right, and the tray that supports it tilts greatly to the right, so that the medium decorative symbol 8C, which displays deceleration fluctuations on the tray, moves greatly to the right. At the same time, a production that tilts greatly to the right is executed. As described above, in the second game, the movement is larger than that in the first game, and the game is tilted greatly. Specifically, in FIG. 74 (K), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move largely to the left and are greatly tilted to the left as compared with FIG. 74 (E). Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves largely to the right and is greatly tilted to the right. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (M), the tray of the A to C character images was tilted and the position was returned to the original position, so that the left decorative pattern was largely moved to the left and greatly tilted to the left. 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R return to their original postures at their original positions. In addition, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which has moved significantly to the right and has been greatly tilted to the right, also returns to its original posture at the original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (M), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged side by side on the tray in the loss mode of "314" and "425". Temporarily stop. At this time, the character image of "2nd success !!" is displayed. This suggests that the variable game (second time) was successful. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (M), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are switched to the hit mode of "555" and are fixedly stopped. In addition, the character image of "big hit !!" is displayed, and the "555" big hit is notified.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the design posture change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped after the change (FIG. 74) or after the temporary stop (FIGS. 72 and 73). , The left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R can be tilted to the right, and then the first effect of returning to the original posture can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, after the first effect, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R are tilted to the left, and then the second effect of returning to the original posture is executed. can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the first effect, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R, which are a part of the set of decorative symbols for notifying the result, are to the right. When tilted, the middle decorative symbol 8C, which is another part of the set of decorative symbols, tilts to the left. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the second effect, when the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R, which are some decorative symbols, are tilted to the left, the other decorative symbols are used. A certain middle decorative pattern 8C tilts to the right. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, in the first effect, when the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R are tilted to the right, they move to the right, and then the original. When returning to the posture, it also moves in the direction of returning to the original position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the first effect, a plurality of decorative symbols in the same symbol row are tilted in the first direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, in the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed, when the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped after the variation, or After the temporary stop, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R can be tilted to the right, and then the third effect of returning to the original posture can be executed. In the third effect, the effect is larger to the right than the first effect. Tilt. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the pattern posture change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the symbol posture change effects A and B, it is assumed that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped, and then the posture of the symbol is tilted to the left and right. However, at the same time as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped, the effect of tilting the posture of the symbols to the left or right may be executed. Further, in the symbol posture change effect C, it is assumed that the effect that the posture of the symbol is tilted to the left or right is executed before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. However, at the same time as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped, the effect of tilting the posture of the symbols to the left or right may be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the symbol posture change effects A and B, it is assumed that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all temporarily stopped, and then the posture of the symbols is tilted to the left and right. However, it is possible that a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is temporarily stopped, and all the postures of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are tilted to the left or right while the other symbols are changing. In the symbol posture change effect C, it is assumed that the effect of tilting the posture of the symbol to the left or right is executed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fluctuating. However, an effect may be executed in which all the postures of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are tilted to the left and right while a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is fluctuating and the other symbols are temporarily stopped. ..

[Modification 3]
In the symbol posture change effects A and B, it is assumed that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all temporarily stopped, and then the posture of the symbols is tilted to the left and right. However, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped, the effect that all the postures of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are tilted to the left or right may be executed.

[Modification 4]
In the symbol posture change effects B and C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped with two symbols displayed vertically, respectively. However, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped with only one symbol displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the symbol posture change effects B and C, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C are assumed to be tilted in opposite directions when tilted to the left and right. However, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C may be tilted in the same direction.

[Modification 6]
In the symbol posture change effects B and C, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C are assumed to display two symbols at the same time in the same symbol row at the time of temporary stop. However, three or more symbols may be displayed at the same time in the same symbol row.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A8-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
When the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped after the change, or after the temporary stop, the decorative symbol is tilted in the first direction, and then the first effect of returning to the original posture can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A8-1.
After the first effect, the decorative symbol can be tilted in a second direction different from the first direction, and then the second effect of returning to the original posture can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A8-2.
In the first effect, when a part of the decorative symbols in the set of decorative symbols for notifying the result is tilted in the first direction, the other decorative symbols in the set of decorative symbols are displayed. Tilt in the second direction,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A8-3.
In the second effect, when the partial decorative symbol is tilted in the second direction, the other decorative symbol is tilted in the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-4.
In the first effect, when the decorative symbol is tilted in the first direction, it moves in the first direction, and then when it returns to the original posture, it returns to the original position. To move to
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-5.
In the first effect, a plurality of the decorative symbols in the same symbol row are tilted in the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A8-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-6.
In the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed, when the decorative symbol temporarily stops after the variation, or after the temporary stop, the decorative symbol tilts in the first direction, and then the original. It is possible to perform a third effect that returns to the posture of
In the third effect, the tilt is larger in the first direction than in the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, band image display effects A to F will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. This band image display effect can be performed during the variable effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the band image display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the band image display effect A and the band image display effect B.
[Band image display effect A]
In the band image display effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

FIGS. 75 (A) to 75 (F) are diagrams for explaining the band image display effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the fluctuation speed (movement speed) of the left effect symbol 8L constituting the left symbol row is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence and the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol array fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol reaches the center in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a is shown. In the left effect symbol 8L, symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the right effect symbol 8R is stopped at the “6” symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, and the reach mode is formed. Similar to the left effect symbol 8L, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden in the right effect symbol 8R. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the medium symbol variation effect is executed. The middle symbol variation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C is moved and displayed at a visually recognizable speed. Here, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at this time, the band image OGC overlapping the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol constituting the middle symbol row is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbols 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence is slowed down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol reaches the center in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a is shown. Here, too, the band image OGC overlapping the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol constituting the middle symbol row is displayed. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction and the "7" symbol stops. do. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, all of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped at the "6" symbol. Even in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display.

FIGS. 75 (G) to 75 (L) are diagrams for explaining the band image display effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the fluctuation speed (movement speed) of the left effect symbol 8L constituting the left symbol row is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence and the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol array fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (H), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol stop effect is an effect in which the fluctuation speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol sequence is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol reaches the center in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a is shown. In the left effect symbol 8L, symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. At this time, the band image OGR overlapping the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol constituting the right symbol row, and the band image OGC overlapping the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are displayed. Has been done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (I), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the right effect symbol 8R is stopped at the “6” symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, and the reach mode is formed. Similar to the left effect symbol 8L, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden in the right effect symbol 8R. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Here, too, the band image OGR overlapping the "6" symbol constituting the right symbol row and the band image OGC overlapping the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (J), the medium symbol variation effect is executed. The middle symbol variation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C is moved and displayed at a visually recognizable speed. Here, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are displayed in a variable manner. Here, too, the band image OGR overlapping the "6" symbol constituting the right symbol row, and the band image OGC overlapping the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol constituting the middle symbol row are displayed. Has been done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (K), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbols 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence is slowed down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol reaches the center in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a is shown. Here, too, the band image OGR overlapping the "6" symbol constituting the right symbol row, and the band image OGC overlapping the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol constituting the middle symbol row are displayed. Has been done. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction and the "7" symbol stops. do. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (L), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, all of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped at the "6" symbol. Even in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display.

FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the band image display effect C and the band image display effect D.
[Band image display effect C]
In the band image display effect C, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

FIGS. 76A to 76F are diagrams for explaining the band image display effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the fluctuation speed (movement speed) of the left effect symbol 8L constituting the left symbol row is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence and the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol array fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol reaches the center in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a is shown. In the left effect symbol 8L, symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. At this time, the band image OGR overlapping the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol constituting the right symbol row is displayed. The band image OGR is displayed on the back side of the right effect symbol 8R. Therefore, regardless of the transparency of the band image OGR, the right effect symbol 8R is easy to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the right effect symbol 8R is stopped at the “6” symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, and the reach mode is formed. Similar to the left effect symbol 8L, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden in the right effect symbol 8R. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), the medium symbol variation effect is executed. The middle symbol variation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C is moved and displayed at a visually recognizable speed. Here, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at this time, the band image OGC overlapping the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol constituting the middle symbol row is displayed. Further, the ally character image CRA is displayed on the background image. The band image OGC is displayed on the back side of the middle effect symbol 8C, and is displayed on the front side of the background image. Therefore, regardless of the transparency of the band image OGR, the right effect symbol 8R is easy to see. On the other hand, depending on the transparency of the band image OGR, the ally character image CRA may be difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (E), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbols 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence is slowed down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol reaches the center in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction and the "7" symbol stops. do. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, all of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped at the "6" symbol. Even in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display.

FIGS. 76 (G) to 76 (L) are diagrams for explaining the band image display effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the fluctuation speed (movement speed) of the left effect symbol 8L constituting the left symbol row is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence and the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol array fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (H), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol reaches the center in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a is shown. In the left effect symbol 8L, symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. At this time, the band image OGR overlapping the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol constituting the right symbol row is displayed. The band image OGR is displayed on the front side of the right effect symbol 8R. Therefore, depending on the transparency of the band image OGR, the right effect symbol 8R may be difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (I), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the right effect symbol 8R is stopped at the “6” symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, and the reach mode is formed. Similar to the left effect symbol 8L, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden in the right effect symbol 8R. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (J), the medium symbol variation effect is executed. The middle symbol variation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C is moved and displayed at a visually recognizable speed. Here, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at this time, the band image OGC overlapping the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol constituting the middle symbol row is displayed. Further, the ally character image CRA is displayed on the background image. The band image OGC is displayed on the front side of the background image and the medium effect symbol 8C. Therefore, depending on the transparency of the band image OGR, the medium effect symbol 8C and the ally character image CRA may be difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (K), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbols 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence is slowed down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol reaches the center in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction and the "7" symbol stops. do. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (L), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, all of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped at the "6" symbol. Even in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display.

FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the band image display effect E and the band image display effect F.
[Band image display effect E]
In the band image display effect E, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

77 (A) to 77 (F) are diagrams for explaining the band image display effect E.
First, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the fluctuation speed (movement speed) of the left effect symbol 8L constituting the left symbol row is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence and the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol array fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol reaches the center in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a is shown. In the left effect symbol 8L, symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. At this time, the band image OGR overlapping the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol constituting the right symbol row is displayed. The band image OGR is displayed on the back side of the right effect symbol 8R. Therefore, regardless of the transparency of the band image OGR, the right effect symbol 8R is easy to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the right effect symbol 8R is stopped at the “6” symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, and the reach mode is formed. Similar to the left effect symbol 8L, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden in the right effect symbol 8R. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the medium symbol variation effect is executed. The middle symbol variation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C is moved and displayed at a visually recognizable speed. Here, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at this time, the band image OGC overlapping the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol constituting the middle symbol row is displayed. Further, the ally character image CRA is displayed on the background image. Furthermore, a plurality of smile images SG are displayed. These images are displayed in the order of smile image SG, effect symbol 8L, 8C, 8R, band image OGC, and ally character image CRA (background image) in order from the front side. Therefore, if the transparency of the band image OGR is lowered, the ally character image CRA can be made difficult to see, and if the number of smile images SG is increased, images other than the smile image SG can be made difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (E), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbols 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence is slowed down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol reaches the center in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction and the "7" symbol stops. do. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit. Although the band image OGC and the smile image SG are not displayed here, at least one of the band image OGC and the smile image SG may be displayed until the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, all of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped at the "6" symbol. Even in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display.

77 (G) to 77 (L) are diagrams for explaining the band image display effect F.
First, as shown in FIG. 77 (G), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the fluctuation speed (movement speed) of the left effect symbol 8L constituting the left symbol row is slowed down, and the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence and the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol array fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (H), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right effect symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol reaches the center in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a is shown. In the left effect symbol 8L, symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. At this time, the band image OGR overlapping the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol constituting the right symbol row is displayed. The band image OGR is displayed on the front side of the right effect symbol 8R. Therefore, depending on the transparency of the band image OGR, the right effect symbol 8R may be difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (I), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the right effect symbol 8R is stopped at the “6” symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, and the reach mode is formed. Similar to the left effect symbol 8L, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden in the right effect symbol 8R. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (J), the medium symbol variation effect is executed. The middle symbol variation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C is moved and displayed at a visually recognizable speed. Here, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at this time, the band image OGC overlapping the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol constituting the middle symbol row is displayed. Further, the ally character image CRA is displayed on the background image. Furthermore, a plurality of smile images SG are displayed. The smile image SG is moved and displayed in a group as shown by the arrow Y. These images are displayed in the order of smile image SG, band image OGC, effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and ally character image CRA (background image) in order from the front side. Therefore, if the transparency of the band image OGR is lowered, the ally character image CRA and the effect pattern can be made difficult to see, and if the number of smile images SG is increased, the images other than the smile image SG can be made difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (K), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbols 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence is slowed down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the “6” symbol reaches the center in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction and the "7" symbol stops. do. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit. Although the band image OGC and the smile image SG are not displayed here, at least one of the band image OGC and the smile image SG may be displayed until the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (L), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, all of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped at the "6" symbol. Even in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect design change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the band images OGR and OGC overlapping the effect symbols constituting the symbol sequence are displayed along with the variable display (FIGS. 75 (D) (E) (H) to (K), FIGS. 76). (B) (D) (H) (J), FIGS. 77 (B) (D) (H) (J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the variable display in the symbol row stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The band images OGR and OGC correspond to the "first image", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "display control means".

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the band image OGR overlapping the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol string and the band image OGC overlapping the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol string are displayed along with the variable display. (FIGS. 75 (D) (E) (H) to (K), FIGS. 76 (B) (D) (H) (J), FIGS. 77 (B) (D) (H) (J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the variable display in a specific symbol sequence stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the band image OGC can be displayed on the back side of the effect symbol 8C and on the front side of the ally character image CRA as the background image (FIGS. 76 (D) and 77 (D). )). According to this configuration, the effect pattern 8C is not covered by the band image OGC, and the appearance of the ally character image CRA changes depending on the transparency of the band image OGC, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the band image OGC can be displayed on the front side of the effect symbol 8C and on the front side of the ally character image CRA as the background image (FIGS. 76 (J) and 77 (J)). )). According to this configuration, the effect symbol 8C and the ally character image CRA are covered by the band image OGC, and the appearance of the effect symbol 8C and the ally character image CRA changes depending on the transparency of the band image OGC. Can be done.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display a smile image SG different from the band images OGC and OGR, which overlaps with the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R (FIGS. 77 (D) and (J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the variable display in a specific symbol sequence stand out in combination with the band images OGC and OGR, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The smile image SG corresponds to the "second image".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display a smile image SG different from the band images OGC and OGR so as to move in a group overlapping with a plurality of effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R (FIG. 77 (J). )). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the variable display in a specific symbol sequence stand out in combination with the band images OGC and OGR, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the band image display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the band images OGC and OGR are displayed during a predetermined period of the variation display of the effect symbols 8C and 8R. However, the band images OGC and OGR may be displayed in the middle of the variable display, and may be displayed for a short time.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the band image OGR overlapping the right effect symbol 8R and the band image OGC overlapping the middle effect symbol 8C are given as examples. On the other hand, a band image overlapping the left effect symbol 8L may be displayed. Further, a band image that straddles two or more symbol rows may be displayed. For example, a band image overlapping the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R may be displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the band image OGC is displayed on the front side of the ally character image CRA (background image) (FIGS. 76 (D) (J), 77 (D) (J)). Therefore, the transparency of the band image OGC can be increased to facilitate recognition of the ally character image CRA, or the transparency of the band image OGC can be lowered to make the ally character image CRA difficult to recognize.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the band images OGC and OGR are displayed on the front side of the effect symbols 8R and 8C (FIGS. 76 (H) (J) and 77 (H) (J)). Therefore, the transparency of the band images OGC and OGR can be increased to facilitate recognition of the effect symbols 8R and 8C, and the transparency of the band images OGC and OGR can be decreased to make the effect symbols 8R and 8C difficult to recognize.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the transparency of the band images OGC and OGR may be changed with the passage of time. For example, the transparency is set low at the beginning of display, and the transparency is increased according to the fluctuation speed of the effect symbols 8C and 8R. Further, it may be configured to display a band image having another transparency in one fluctuation. For example, in FIGS. 76 and 77, the transparency of the band image OGC overlapping the middle effect symbol 8C is different from the transparency of the band image OGR overlapping the right effect symbol 8R.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the opaque smile image SG is displayed in the foreground (FIGS. 77 (D) (J)). On the other hand, an image having a certain degree of transparency may be used.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A9-1]
A gaming machine that displays variations in a plurality of symbol rows, stops the plurality of symbol rows using one symbol included in the symbol row as a stop symbol, and notifies the lottery result.
A display control means capable of displaying a first image overlapping with at least two symbols constituting the symbol sequence along with a variable display of the symbol sequence is provided.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A9-1.
The display control means displays the first image so as to overlap a symbol of a specific symbol sequence among the plurality of symbol sequences.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A9-1 or the aspect A9-2.
The display control means displays the first image on the back side of the design and on the front side of the background image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A9-1 or the aspect A9-2.
The display control means displays the first image on the front side of the symbol and on the front side of the background image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A9-1 to A9-4.
The display control means can display a second image different from the first image that overlaps the symbols in the symbol sequence.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A9-5.
The display control means moves and displays the second image so as to overlap a plurality of symbols in the symbol sequence.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-7]
The gaming machines according to aspects A9-1 to A9-6.
The display control means makes the transparency of the first image different according to the variable display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the special orbital fluctuation effects A to F will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. This special trajectory variation effect can be performed during the variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the special trajectory fluctuation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the special orbital fluctuation effect A and the special orbital variation effect B.
[Special orbit fluctuation production A]
In the special orbital variation effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

FIGS. 78 (A) to 78 (F) are diagrams for explaining the special orbital fluctuation effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixedly stopped at the "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at the "2" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is fixedly stopped at the "8" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the special variation effect (previous period) is executed. The special variable effect is an effect in which the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed in a variable manner (hereinafter, also referred to as “moving display”). Here, the "3" symbol, the "4" symbol, and the "5" symbol included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Further, the "2" symbol, the "3" symbol, the "4" symbol, and the "5" symbol included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), the special variation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Further, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. As described above, the orbitals YL and YR in the special fluctuation effect (late stage) are different from the orbitals YL and YR in the special variation effect (early stage). That is, the orbits YL and YR change, and the orbit is not specified. In addition, although it was explained here that the orbit changes between the special fluctuation effect (first half) and the special fluctuation effect (second half), the orbit may be changed stepwise in this way, and it may be continuous every moment. It may be configured so that the orbit changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the “6” symbol, and the reach mode is formed. At this time, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden in the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (E), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbols 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence is slowed down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are moved and displayed along the linear trajectory YC. The orbit YC does not change, and the orbit is specified. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction and the "7" symbol stops. do. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, all of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped at the "6" symbol. Even in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display.

[Special orbit fluctuation production B]
In the special trajectory variation effect B, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

FIGS. 78 (G) to 78 (L) are diagrams for explaining the special orbital fluctuation effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixedly stopped at the "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at the "2" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is fixedly stopped at the "8" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (H), the special variation effect (previous period) is executed. The special variable effect is an effect in which the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed in a variable manner (hereinafter, also referred to as “moving display”). Here, the "3" symbol, the "4" symbol, and the "5" symbol included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Further, the "2" symbol, the "3" symbol, the "4" symbol, and the "5" symbol included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. At this time, the vertical direction of the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R is moved and displayed so as to be parallel to the trajectories YL and YR.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (I), the special variation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Further, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. At this time, the vertical direction of the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R is moved and displayed so as to be parallel to the trajectories YL and YR. As described above, the orbitals YL and YR in the special fluctuation effect (late stage) are different from the orbitals YL and YR in the special variation effect (early stage). That is, the orbits YL and YR change, and the orbit is not specified. In addition, although it was explained here that the orbit changes between the special fluctuation effect (first half) and the special fluctuation effect (second half), the orbit may be changed stepwise in this way, and it may be continuous every moment. It may be configured so that the orbit changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (J), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the “6” symbol, and the reach mode is formed. At this time, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden in the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (K), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbols 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence is slowed down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are moved and displayed along the trajectory YC. At this time, the vertical direction of the effect symbol 8C is moved and displayed so as to be parallel to the trajectory YC. The orbit YC does not change, and the orbit is specified. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction and the "7" symbol stops. do. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (L), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, all of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped at the "6" symbol. Even in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display.

FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the special orbital fluctuation effect C and the special orbital variation effect D.
[Special orbit fluctuation production C]
In the special orbital variation effect C, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

79 (A) to 79 (F) are diagrams for explaining the special orbital fluctuation effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixedly stopped at the "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at the "2" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is fixedly stopped at the "8" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the special variation effect (previous period) is executed. The special variable effect is an effect in which the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed in a variable manner (hereinafter, also referred to as “moving display”). Here, the "3" symbol, the "4" symbol, and the "5" symbol included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Further, the "2" symbol, the "3" symbol, the "4" symbol, and the "5" symbol included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. Furthermore, the effect symbols 8L and 8R include symbols of various sizes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), the special variation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Further, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. Furthermore, the effect symbols 8L and 8R include symbols of various sizes. As described above, the orbitals YL and YR in the special fluctuation effect (late stage) are different from the orbitals YL and YR in the special variation effect (early stage). That is, the orbits YL and YR change, and the orbit is not specified. In addition, although it was explained here that the orbit changes between the special fluctuation effect (first half) and the special fluctuation effect (second half), the orbit may be changed stepwise in this way, and it may be continuous every moment. It may be configured so that the orbit changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the “6” symbol, and the reach mode is formed. At this time, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden in the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. When the "6" symbol is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size with the formation of the reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbols 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence is slowed down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are moved and displayed along the linear trajectory YC. Further, the effect symbol 8C includes symbols of various sizes. The orbit YC does not change, and the orbit is specified. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction and the "7" symbol stops. do. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, all of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped at the "6" symbol. Even in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. When the "6" symbol is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size with the fixed stop effect.

[Special orbit fluctuation production D]
In the special orbital variation effect D, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

79 (G) to 79 (L) are diagrams for explaining the special orbital fluctuation effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 79 (G), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixedly stopped at the "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at the "2" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is fixedly stopped at the "8" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (H), the special variation effect (previous period) is executed. The special variable effect is an effect in which the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed in a variable manner (hereinafter, also referred to as “moving display”). Here, the "3" symbol, the "4" symbol, and the "5" symbol included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Further, the "2" symbol, the "3" symbol, the "4" symbol, and the "5" symbol included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. At this time, the vertical direction of the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R is moved and displayed so as to be perpendicular to the trajectories YL and YR. Further, the effect symbols 8L and 8R include symbols of various sizes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (I), the special variation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Further, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. At this time, the vertical direction of the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R is moved and displayed so as to be perpendicular to the trajectories YL and YR. Further, the effect symbols 8L and 8R include symbols of various sizes. As described above, the orbitals YL and YR in the special fluctuation effect (late stage) are different from the orbitals YL and YR in the special variation effect (early stage). That is, the orbits YL and YR change, and the orbit is not specified. In addition, although it was explained here that the orbit changes between the special fluctuation effect (first half) and the special fluctuation effect (second half), the orbit may be changed stepwise in this way, and it may be continuous every moment. It may be configured so that the orbit changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (J), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the “6” symbol, and the reach mode is formed. At this time, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden in the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. When the "6" symbol is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size with the formation of the reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (K), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbols 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence is slowed down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are moved and displayed along the trajectory YC. At this time, the vertical direction of the effect symbol 8C is moved and displayed so as to be perpendicular to the trajectory YC. Further, the effect symbol 8C includes symbols of various sizes. The orbit YC does not change, and the orbit is specified. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction and the "7" symbol stops. do. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (L), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, all of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped at the "6" symbol. Even in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. When the "6" symbol is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size with the fixed stop effect.

FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the special orbital fluctuation effect E and the special orbital variation effect F.
[Special orbit fluctuation production E]
In the special trajectory variation effect E, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

80 (A) to 80 (F) are diagrams for explaining the special orbital fluctuation effect E.
First, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixedly stopped at the "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at the "2" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is fixedly stopped at the "8" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), the special variation effect (previous period) is executed. The special variable effect is an effect in which the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed in a variable manner (hereinafter, also referred to as “moving display”). Here, the "3" symbol, the "4" symbol, and the "5" symbol included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Further, the "2" symbol, the "3" symbol, the "4" symbol, and the "5" symbol included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. Furthermore, the effect symbols 8L and 8R include symbols of various sizes, and the intervals in the arrangement direction of the effect symbols 8L and 8R are not constant.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (C), the special variation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Further, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. Furthermore, the effect symbols 8L and 8R include symbols of various sizes, and the intervals in the arrangement direction of the effect symbols 8L and 8R are not constant. As described above, the orbitals YL and YR in the special fluctuation effect (late stage) are different from the orbitals YL and YR in the special variation effect (early stage). That is, the orbits YL and YR change, and the orbit is not specified. In addition, although it was explained here that the orbit changes between the special fluctuation effect (first half) and the special fluctuation effect (second half), the orbit may be changed stepwise in this way, and it may be continuous every moment. It may be configured so that the orbit changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the “6” symbol, and the reach mode is formed. At this time, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden in the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. When the "6" symbol is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size with the formation of the reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (E), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbols 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence is slowed down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are moved and displayed along the linear trajectory YC. Further, the effect symbols 8C include symbols of various sizes, and the intervals in the arrangement direction of the effect symbols 8C are not constant. The orbit YC does not change, and the orbit is specified. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction and the "7" symbol stops. do. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (F), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, all of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped at the "6" symbol. Even in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. When the "6" symbol is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size with the fixed stop effect.

[Special orbit fluctuation production F]
In the special orbital variation effect F, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

80 (G) to 80 (L) are diagrams for explaining the special orbital fluctuation effect F.
First, as shown in FIG. 80 (G), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixedly stopped at the "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at the "2" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is fixedly stopped at the "8" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (H), the special variation effect (previous period) is executed. The special variable effect is an effect in which the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed in a variable manner (hereinafter, also referred to as “moving display”). Here, the "3" symbol, the "4" symbol, and the "5" symbol included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Further, the "2" symbol, the "3" symbol, the "4" symbol, and the "5" symbol included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. At this time, the vertical direction of the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R has an appropriate angle with respect to the trajectories YL and YR. Further, the effect symbols 8L and 8R include symbols of various sizes, and the intervals in the arrangement direction of the effect symbols 8L and 8R are not constant.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (I), the special variation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Further, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. At this time, the vertical direction of the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R has an appropriate angle with respect to the trajectories YL and YR. Further, the effect symbols 8L and 8R include symbols of various sizes, and the intervals in the arrangement direction of the effect symbols 8L and 8R are not constant. As described above, the orbitals YL and YR in the special fluctuation effect (late stage) are different from the orbitals YL and YR in the special variation effect (early stage). That is, the orbits YL and YR change, and the orbit is not specified. In addition, although it was explained here that the orbit changes between the special fluctuation effect (first half) and the special fluctuation effect (second half), the orbit may be changed stepwise in this way, and it may be continuous every moment. It may be configured so that the orbit changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (J), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the “6” symbol, and the reach mode is formed. At this time, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden in the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. When the "6" symbol is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size with the formation of the reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (K), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbols 8C constituting the middle symbol sequence is slowed down, and then the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "4" symbol, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are moved and displayed along the trajectory YC. At this time, the vertical direction of the effect symbol 8C has an appropriate angle with respect to the trajectory YC. Further, the effect symbols 8C include symbols of various sizes, and the intervals in the arrangement direction of the effect symbols 8C are not constant. The orbit YC does not change, and the orbit is specified. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction and the "7" symbol stops. do. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (L), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, all of the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped at the "6" symbol. Even in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display. When the "6" symbol is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size with the fixed stop effect.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the special trajectory fluctuation effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first variable display (FIGS. 78 (E) (K), 79 (E) (K), 80 (E) (K)) in which the trajectory of the effect symbol is specified. , Second variation display in which the trajectory of the effect symbol is not specified (FIG. 78 (B) (C) (H) (I), FIG. 79 (B) (C) (H) (I), FIG. 80 (B) (C). ) (H) (I)) and can be executed. According to this configuration, the monotonousness of the variable display can be dispelled, and the fun of the game can be improved. The effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "variation display means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second variation display is performed in the first period from the start of the variation to the formation of the reach in which the reach mode is formed by the stop symbol (FIGS. 78 (B) (C) (H) (FIG. 78 (B) (C) (H)). I), FIGS. 79 (B) (C) (H) (I), FIGS. 80 (B) (C) (H) (I)). According to this configuration, the variable display up to the time of reach formation can be made novel, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first variation display is performed in the second period after the reach formation (FIGS. 78 (E) (K), 79 (E) (K), 80 (E) (K). )). According to this configuration, since the trajectory of the fluctuation display is specified after the reach is formed, the fluctuation display becomes easy to understand, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a plurality of symbols constituting the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed including symbols having different sizes (FIGS. 79 (B), (C), (E), and (H). ) (I) (K), FIGS. 80 (B) (C) (E) (H) (I) (K)). According to this configuration, the monotonousness of the variable display can be further eliminated, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the distances between the plurality of symbols constituting the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not constant (FIGS. 80 (B) (C) (E) (H) (I) (I). K)). According to this configuration, the monotonousness of the variable display can be further eliminated, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect symbol 8C is moved in a linear trajectory in the first variation display (FIGS. 78 (E), 79 (E), 80 (E)). According to this configuration, the variable display becomes easier to understand from the comparison with the second variable display, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the special trajectory fluctuation effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the first variation display in which the trajectory of the effect symbol is specified and the second variation display in which the trajectory of the effect symbol is not specified are performed in one variation. On the other hand, the variation display may be performed only by the first variation display in which the trajectory of the effect symbol is specified.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the second variation display is performed in parallel for the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. On the other hand, the second variation display for the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R may be performed in order. For example, the second variation display is performed for the left effect symbol 8L, the left effect symbol 8L is stopped and displayed, and then the second variation display is performed for the right effect symbol 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the second variation display is performed in parallel for the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. On the other hand, the second variation display may be performed on one of the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, and the first variation display may be performed on the other.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the second variation display is performed in parallel for the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. On the other hand, the second variation display may be performed in parallel for the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this case, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be stopped at almost the same time. Further, the middle effect symbol 8C may be stopped after the reach is formed by the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. Furthermore, after the reach is formed by the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, the first variation display may be performed on the middle effect symbol 8C.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8R, and 8C that are variablely displayed include symbols of various sizes. The size of this symbol may be changed stepwise or continuously in the variable display (moving display) in the display screen 7a.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the spacing in the arrangement direction of the effect symbols 8L, 8R, 8C that are variablely displayed is not constant. The interval in the arrangement direction may be changed stepwise or continuously in the variable display (moving display) in the display screen 7a.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, as an example of the case where the trajectory is not specified, an example in which the trajectory is changed in the middle of the fluctuation display is given. On the other hand, when the trajectory is not specified, the case where the movement is not displayed may be included.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A10-1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
A variation display means capable of executing a first variation display in which a trajectory of a symbol to be variablely displayed in a plurality of columns is specified and a second variation display in which the trajectory of the symbol is not specified is provided.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A10-1.
The variation display means performs the second variation display in the first period from the time when the variation starts to the time when the reach is formed by the stop symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A10-2.
The variation display means performs the first variation display in the second period after the reach formation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-3.
In at least one of the first variation display and the second variation display, a plurality of symbols constituting a specific symbol sequence include symbols having different sizes.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-4.
In at least one of the first variation display and the second variation display, the distance between a plurality of symbols constituting a specific symbol sequence is not constant.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-5.
The variation display means moves the symbol in a linear trajectory in the first variation display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-7]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A10-5.
The size of a predetermined symbol among the plurality of symbols constituting the specific symbol sequence is changed according to the variable display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-8]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A10-6.
The distance between a plurality of symbols constituting the specific symbol sequence is changed according to the variable display.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the winning symbol movement effects A to F will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. This hit symbol movement effect can be executed during the variable effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the winning symbol movement effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the hit symbol movement effect A and the hit symbol movement effect B.
[Hit symbol movement production A]
In the hit symbol movement effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

81 (A) to 81 (F) are diagrams for explaining the hit symbol movement effect A.
From the start of the fluctuation to the reach formation, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the "6" symbol is immediately before reaching the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. It shows the situation. The moving direction of the effect symbols 8L, 8R, and 8C in the variable display is downward as shown by the arrow HD.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81B, the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol. In addition, in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the symbol movement effect (previous period) is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying a stopped symbol. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the winning symbols stopped at the “6” symbol are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, a part of the left effect symbol 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), the symbol movement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the entire left effect symbol 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a, and most of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a. After that, the entire effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), the image display effect (first term) is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the ally character image CRA is displayed by moving on the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the ally character image CRA is framed in from the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. The ally character image CRA is moved and displayed in the same direction as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, a plurality of related image KGs related to the "6" symbol, which is the winning symbol, are displayed. The related image KG is an image showing "6" composed of segments.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (F), the image display effect (late stage) is executed. Here, it is shown that the ally character image CRA framed in the display screen 7a is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the related image KG is also displayed.

[Hit symbol movement effect B]
In the hit symbol movement effect B, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

81 (G) to 81 (L) are diagrams for explaining the winning symbol movement effect B.
From the start of the fluctuation to the reach formation, as shown in FIG. 81 (G), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the "6" symbol is immediately before reaching the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. It shows the situation. The moving direction of the effect symbols 8L, 8R, and 8C in the variable display is downward as shown by the arrow HD.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (H), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol. In addition, in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (I), the symbol movement effect (first term) is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying a stopped symbol. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the winning symbols stopped at the “6” symbol are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, a part of the left effect symbol 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (J), the symbol movement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the entire left effect symbol 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a, and most of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a. After that, the entire effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (K), the image display effect (first term) is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the ally character image CRA is displayed by moving on the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the ally character image CRA is framed in from the lower left of the display screen 7a. The ally character image CRA is moved and displayed in the direction opposite to the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as indicated by the arrow ID. The ally character CRA frames in so that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R return from the frame-out direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (L), the image display effect (late stage) is executed. Here, it is shown that the ally character image CRA framed in the display screen 7a is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a plurality of related image KGs related to the "6" symbol, which is the winning symbol, are displayed. The related image KG is an image showing "6" composed of segments.

FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the hit symbol movement effect C and the hit symbol movement effect D.
[Hit symbol movement effect C]
In the hit symbol movement effect C, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

82 (A) to 82 (F) are diagrams for explaining the winning symbol movement effect C.
From the start of the fluctuation to the reach formation, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the "6" symbol is immediately before reaching the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. It shows the situation. The moving direction of the effect symbols 8L, 8R, and 8C in the variable display is downward as shown by the arrow HD.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol. In the middle effect symbol 8C, the "6" symbol is stopped in the center of the display screen 7a, and the "5" symbol and the "7" symbol, which are lost symbols other than the "6" symbol, are also displayed. Lost patterns may be displayed as semi-transparent to make them inconspicuous.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), the symbol movement effect (first term) is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying a stopped symbol. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the winning symbols stopped at the “6” symbol are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, a part of the left effect symbol 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a. The "5" symbol and the "7" symbol as the lost symbols are still displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), the symbol movement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the entire left effect symbol 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a, and most of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a. After that, the entire effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a. The "5" symbol and the "7" symbol as the lost symbols are still displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), the image display effect (first term) is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the ally character image CRA is displayed by moving on the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the ally character image CRA is framed in from the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. The ally character image CRA is moved and displayed in the same direction as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, a plurality of related image KGs related to the "6" symbol, which is the winning symbol, are displayed. The related image KG is an image obtained by reducing the “6” symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (F), the image display effect (late stage) is executed. Here, it is shown that the ally character image CRA framed in the display screen 7a is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the related image KG is also displayed.

[Hit symbol movement effect D]
In the hit symbol movement effect D, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

82 (G) to 82 (L) are diagrams for explaining the hit symbol movement effect D.
From the start of the fluctuation to the reach formation, as shown in FIG. 82 (G), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the "6" symbol is immediately before reaching the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. It shows the situation. The moving direction of the effect symbols 8L, 8R, and 8C in the variable display is downward as shown by the arrow HD.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (H), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol. In the middle effect symbol 8C, the "6" symbol is stopped in the center of the display screen 7a, and the "5" symbol and the "7" symbol, which are lost symbols other than the "6" symbol, are also displayed. Lost patterns may be displayed as semi-transparent to make them inconspicuous.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (I), the symbol movement effect (first term) is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying a stopped symbol. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the winning symbols stopped at the “6” symbol are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID. Further, the "5" symbol and the "7" symbol as the lost symbols included in the effect symbol 8C are also moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID, similarly to the hit symbol. At this time, a part of the left effect symbol 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a. Further, the entire "5" symbol, which is a lost symbol, is framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (J), the symbol movement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the entire left effect symbol 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a, and most of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a. After that, the entire effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (K), the image display effect (first term) is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the ally character image CRA is displayed by moving on the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the ally character image CRA is framed in from the lower left of the display screen 7a. The ally character image CRA is moved and displayed in the direction opposite to the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as indicated by the arrow ID. The ally character CRA frames in so that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R return from the frame-out direction. At this time, a plurality of related image KGs related to the "6" symbol, which is the winning symbol, are displayed. The related image KG is an image obtained by reducing the “6” symbol, and includes images having different sizes. The related image KG is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow GD so as to form a group.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (L), the image display effect (late stage) is executed. Here, it is shown that the ally character image CRA framed in the display screen 7a is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the related images KG are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow GD so as to form a group.

FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the hit symbol movement effect E and the hit symbol movement effect F.
[Hit symbol movement production E]
In the hit symbol movement effect E, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

83 (A) to 83 (F) are diagrams for explaining the winning symbol movement effect E.
From the start of the fluctuation to the reach formation, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the "6" symbol is immediately before reaching the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. It shows the situation. The moving direction of the effect symbols 8L, 8R, and 8C in the variable display is downward as shown by the arrow HD.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol. In addition, in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the symbol movement effect (first term) is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying a stopped symbol. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the winning symbols stopped at the “6” symbol are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, a part of the left effect symbol 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the symbol movement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the entire left effect symbol 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a, and most of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a. After that, the entire effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), the image display effect (first term) is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the ally character image CRA is displayed by moving on the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the ally character image CRA is framed in from the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. The ally character image CRA is moved and displayed in the same direction as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, a plurality of related image KGs related to the "6" symbol, which is the winning symbol, are displayed. The related image KG is an image showing "6" composed of segments.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (F), the image display effect (late stage) is executed. Here, it is shown that the ally character image CRA framed in the display screen 7a is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the related image KG is also displayed. Furthermore, the smile image SG is displayed. The smile image SG is an image different from the related image KG, and is an opaque image.

[Hit symbol movement effect F]
In the hit symbol movement effect F, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

83 (G) to 83 (L) are diagrams for explaining the hit symbol movement effect F.
From the start of the fluctuation to the reach formation, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "7" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the "6" symbol is immediately before reaching the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. It shows the situation. The moving direction of the effect symbols 8L, 8R, and 8C in the variable display is downward as shown by the arrow HD.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (H), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol. In addition, in the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are hidden. Designs other than the "6" design may be inconspicuous as a semi-transparent display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (I), the symbol movement effect (first term) is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying a stopped symbol. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the winning symbols stopped at the “6” symbol are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, a part of the left effect symbol 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (J), the symbol movement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the moving directions of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the winning symbols are changed, and the moving and displaying is performed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID. Most of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are framed out from the lower part of the display screen 7a. After that, the entire effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (K), the image display effect (first term) is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the ally character image CRA is displayed by moving on the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the ally character image CRA is framed in from the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the plurality of smile images SG are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow GD so as to form a group.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (L), the image display effect (late stage) is executed. Here, it is shown that the ally character image CRA framed in the display screen 7a is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a plurality of related image KGs related to the "6" symbol, which is the winning symbol, are displayed. The related image KG is an image showing "6" composed of segments. Further, here as well, the plurality of smile images SG are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow GD so as to form a group.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the winning symbol movement effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a big hit occurs, a big hit notification effect is executed, and then an effect of moving a symbol of the big hit mode is executed (FIGS. 81 (B) to (D) (H) to (H). J), FIGS. 82 (B) to (D) (H) to (J), FIGS. 83 (B) to (D) (H) to (J). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player by starting to move the effect symbol that notifies the jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The jackpot notification effect corresponds to the "first effect", the symbol movement effect corresponds to the "second effect", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "effect execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the moving direction (direction indicated by the arrow ID) of the stopped jackpot symbol is different from the moving direction (direction indicated by the arrow HD) in the variation display. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the movement of the effect symbol that has notified the big hit stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the stopped jackpot symbol is moved and displayed to be framed out from the display screen 7a (FIGS. 81 (D) (J), 82 (D) (J), 83 (D) (FIG. J)). According to this configuration, in addition to the effect symbol that notifies the jackpot start to move, the effect symbol protrudes from the screen, which can surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the stopped jackpot symbol is moved and displayed, the related image KG related to the jackpot symbol and the ally character image CRA not related to the jackpot symbol are displayed (FIGS. 81 (E) (F). ) (K) (L), FIGS. 82 (E) (F) (K) (L), FIG. 83 (E) (F) (K) (L)). According to this configuration, the production after the big hit notification becomes novel, and the fun of the game can be improved. The related image KG corresponds to the "first image", the ally character image CRA corresponds to the "second image", and the image display effect corresponds to the "third effect".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of related images KG are displayed and moved so as to form a group (FIGS. 82 (K) (L)). According to this configuration, the production after the big hit notification becomes even more novel, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the ally character image CRA is framed in to the display screen 7a (FIGS. 81 (E) (K), 82 (E) (K), 83 (E) (K)). According to this configuration, the production after the big hit notification becomes even more novel, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the winning symbol movement effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved and displayed in a direction different from the moving direction in the variable display. On the other hand, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be moved and displayed in the same direction as the moving direction in the variable display.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the related image KG and the smile image SG are displayed on the front side of the ally character image CRA (FIG. In contrast, at least one of the related image KG and the smile image SG is displayed on the back side of the ally character image CRA. It may be displayed on the side. Further, even if at least one of the related image KG and the smile image SG is displayed as a translucent display and overlaps with the ally character image CRA, the ally character image CRA on the back side can be visually recognized. May be good.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, when the related image KG and the smile image SG are moved, they are moved from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the moving direction of the related image KG and the smile image SG may be any direction.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the moving direction is changed in the middle when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved (FIGS. 83 (I) and (J)), but the moving direction is not limited and the direction is not limited. There may be.

[Modification 5]
The display colors and transparency of the related image KG and the smile image SG in the above embodiment may be changed stepwise or continuously in the middle of the display.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B1-1]
It is a gaming machine that displays fluctuations in the symbol and notifies the winner of the lottery according to the stop mode of the symbol.
When the lottery is won, the effect executing means capable of executing the first effect of stopping and displaying the symbol in the winning mode and then performing the second effect of moving the symbol of the stopped and displayed winning mode in a specific direction is provided. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B1-1.
The specific direction is a direction different from the moving direction in the variation display of the symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B1-1 or the aspect B1-2.
In the second effect, the effect executing means causes the symbol of the hitting mode to be framed out from the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3.
After executing the second effect, the effect executing means can execute a third effect of displaying a first image related to the symbol of the hit mode and a second image not related to the symbol of the hit mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B1-4.
In the third effect, the effect executing means displays a plurality of the first images and moves them so as to form a group.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B1-3 or the aspect B1-4.
The effect executing means causes the second image to be framed in the display screen in the third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-3 to B1-6.
In the third effect, the effect executing means displays a third image different from the second image together with the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-8]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B1-7.
The effect executing means moves and displays the third image so that the third image forms a group.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-9]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-8.
In the second effect, the effect executing means moves the symbol of the hitting mode in the first direction as the specific direction, and then moves it in a second direction different from the first direction as the specific direction. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the winning symbol mode change effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. This symbol mode change effect can be executed during the variable effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol mode change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the symbol mode change effect A and the symbol mode change effect B.
[Design mode change effect A]
In the symbol mode change effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

84 (A) to 84 (F) are diagrams for explaining the symbol mode change effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, middle, and right start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

When the effect button 63 is pressed after the reach formation effect, the mode change effect is executed as shown in FIG. 84 (C). The aspect change effect is an effect of changing the aspect of the effect symbol. Specifically, the mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of only the identification information is changed to the embodiment in which the identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra and the pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb are composed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. The medium effect symbol 8C is also changed to an embodiment composed of the identification information 8Ca and the pattern information 8Cb. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a but the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol. The left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all configured to include identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra and pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the stop of the effect symbol, the mode change effect is executed as shown in FIG. 84 (F). The aspect change effect is an effect of changing the aspect of the effect symbol. Specifically, the left middle right effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed from the aspect composed of the identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra and the pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb to the aspect composed only of the identification information. ..

[Design mode change effect B]
In the symbol mode change effect B, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

84 (G) to 84 (L) are diagrams for explaining the symbol mode change effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, middle, and right start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (H), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

When the effect button 63 is pressed after the reach formation effect, the mode change effect is executed as shown in FIG. 84 (I). The aspect change effect is an effect of changing the aspect of the effect symbol. Specifically, the aspect in which the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are composed only of the identification information is changed to the embodiment in which the identification information 8La and 8Ra and the pattern information 8Lb and 8Rb are composed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (J), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. The aspect of the medium effect symbol 8C has not been changed. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a but the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (K), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol. At this time, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are configured to include identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra and pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the stop of the effect symbol, the mode change effect is executed as shown in FIG. 84 (L). The aspect change effect is an effect of changing the aspect of the effect symbol. Specifically, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are changed from the aspect composed of the identification information 8La and 8Ra and the pattern information 8Lb and 8Rb to the aspect composed only of the identification information.

FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the symbol mode change effect C.
[Design mode change effect C]
In the symbol mode change effect C, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

First, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, middle, and right start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown.

When the effect button 63 is pressed during the middle symbol stop effect, the mode change effect is executed as shown in FIG. 85 (D). The aspect change effect is an effect of changing the aspect of the effect symbol. Specifically, the mode in which the middle effect symbol 8C is composed of only the identification information is changed to the embodiment in which the identification information 8Ca and the pattern information 8Cb are composed. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. Stop at. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), the hit notification effect is executed. The hit notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is stopped in a big hit mode. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C is configured to include identification information 8Ca and pattern information 8Cb.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the stop of the effect symbol, the mode change effect is executed as shown in FIG. 85 (F). The aspect change effect is an effect of changing the aspect of the effect symbol. Specifically, the medium effect symbol 8C is changed from an aspect composed of the identification information 8Ca and the pattern information 8Cb to an aspect composed of only the identification information.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 85 (G) to 85 (K), the image display erasing effect is executed. The image display erasing effect is an effect of displaying a plurality of predetermined images and then erasing them. Here, it is an effect of displaying a plurality of smile images SG and then erasing them. Images of different sizes are mixed in the plurality of smile image SGs.

First, as shown in FIG. 85 (G), the effect of displaying the smile image SG on the display screen 7a is repeated, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are hidden by the plurality of smile image SGs. Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (H), the smile image SG is further increased on the display screen 7a, and the state is such that almost all of the effect symbols are covered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (I), the smile images SG on the display screen 7a disappear one by one, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are approaching a state in which they can be visually recognized. Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (J), the smile image SG on the display screen 7a is further reduced to approach a state in which the entire effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R can be seen. Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (K), all the smile images SG are erased from the display screen 7a.

In this series of image display erasing effects, the mode of the effect pattern changes. Specifically, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the normal "6" symbols to "6" symbols as if they were composed of segments. The timing of the change is while the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are difficult to see. Of course, the timing of change is not limited.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (L), the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged and displayed. At this time, a part of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be framed out from the display screen 7a.

FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the symbol mode change effect D.
[Design mode change effect D]
In the symbol mode change effect D, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

First, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, middle, and right start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown.

When the effect button 63 is pressed during the middle symbol stop effect, the mode change effect is executed as shown in FIG. 86 (D). The aspect change effect is an effect of changing the aspect of the effect symbol. Specifically, the mode in which the middle effect symbol 8C is composed of only the identification information is changed to the embodiment in which the identification information 8Ca and the pattern information 8Cb are composed. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. Stop at. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (E), the hit notification effect is executed. The hit notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is stopped in a big hit mode. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C is configured to include identification information 8Ca and pattern information 8Cb.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the stop of the effect symbol, the mode change effect is executed as shown in FIG. 86 (F). The aspect change effect is an effect of changing the aspect of the effect symbol. Specifically, the medium effect symbol 8C is changed from an aspect composed of the identification information 8Ca and the pattern information 8Cb to an aspect composed of only the identification information.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 86 (G) to 86 (I), the image movement effect is executed. The image movement effect is an effect of displaying and moving a plurality of predetermined images. Here, the effect is such that a plurality of ally character image MCGs are moved so as to be framed in from the right end of the display screen 7a and framed out from the left end. Images of different sizes are mixed in the plurality of ally character image MCGs. The ally character image MCG is an image of the ally character similar to the image of the pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb when the mode of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is changed as described later. That is, the ally character image MCG is an image related to the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

First, as shown in FIG. 86 (G), the ally character image MCG is framed in from the right end of the display screen 7a and moved to the left as indicated by the arrow GD. Here, the right effect symbol 8R is covered with the ally character image MCG, which makes it difficult to see. Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (H), the ally character image MCG is further moved to the left on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow GD, and the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are further moved. Becomes difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (I), the ally character image MCG is further moved to the left as indicated by the arrow GD, and the frame is out from the left end of the display screen 7a. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are in a state of being easily visible. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are changed to a mode composed of only the pattern information 8Cb and 8Rb. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L is in a state of being covered with the ally character image MCG. Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (J), when all the ally character image MCGs are framed out from the left end of the display screen 7a, the left middle right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R can be visually recognized. At this time, like the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R, the left effect symbol 8L is also changed to a mode composed of only the pattern information 8Lb. The picture information 8Lb, 8Cb, and 8Rb are the pictures of the ally character similar to the ally character image MCG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (J), the mode change effect is executed. The aspect change effect is an effect of changing the aspect of the effect symbol. Here, from the aspect in which the left middle right effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are composed only of the symbol information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb to the embodiment in which the identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra and the symbol information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb are composed. Be changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (L), a mode change effect is further executed. The aspect change effect is an effect of changing the aspect of the effect symbol. Here, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from the mode in which the identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra and the pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb are composed to the mode in which only the identification information is composed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the design mode change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the player presses the effect button 63 to change the mode of the effect symbol (FIGS. 84 (C) to (E) (I) to (K), FIG. 85 (D). ) (E), FIGS. 86 (D) (E)). According to this configuration, the mode of the effect symbol is changed by pressing the effect button 63, so that the interest of the game can be improved. The effect button 63 corresponds to the "operation means", the aspect of the effect symbol composed only of the identification information corresponds to the "first aspect", and the aspect of the effect symbol composed of the identification information and the pattern information is ". The effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "display control means", which corresponds to the "second aspect".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the mode of a specific effect symbol is changed. Specifically, the modes of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed (FIGS. 84 (C) to (E)), and the modes of the left and right effect symbols 8L, 8L, 8R are changed (FIG. 84). (I)-(K)), the mode of the middle effect symbol 8C is changed (FIGS. 85 (D) (E), FIGS. 86 (D) (E)). According to this configuration, the mode of a specific effect symbol is changed by pressing the effect button 63, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the mode of the effect symbol is changed in the middle of the variable display (FIGS. 84 (C) to (E) (I) to (K), FIGS. 85 (D) (E), FIG. 86. (D) (E)). According to this configuration, since the mode of the effect symbol changes in the middle of the variation display, the range of the variation effect can be expanded and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the aspect of the effect symbol is returned to the original mode (FIGS. 84 (F) (L), 85 (F), FIG. 86 (F)). According to this configuration, since the mode of the effect symbol changes with the stop display, the range of the variable effect can be expanded and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode, a plurality of smile images SG may be displayed (FIGS. 85 (G) to (K)), or a plurality of ally character images may be displayed. MCG is displayed (FIGS. 86 (G) to (J)). According to this configuration, after the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved. The smile image SG and the ally character image CRA correspond to the "predetermined image", and the image display erasing effect for displaying a plurality of smile image SGs and the image movement effect for moving a plurality of ally character image MCGs are "group effects". Is equivalent to.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the aspect of the effect symbol is changed according to the image display erasure effect of displaying a plurality of smile image SGs and the image movement effect of moving a plurality of ally character image MCGs (FIG. 85 (K), FIG. 86 (J)). According to this configuration, after the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, the player can be further surprised and the interest of the game can be improved. The aspect of the “6” symbol composed of the segments of FIG. 85 (K) and the aspect of the effect symbol composed of only the symbol information of FIG. 86 (J) correspond to the “third aspect”.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the pattern mode change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is pressed after the reach formation effect, but of course, the mode of the effect symbol may be changed by pressing the effect button 63 before the reach formation effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the effect of urging the press of the effect button 63 is not particularly performed, but the effect of urging the press of the effect button 63 may be performed. For example, a button image imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a message image such as "press" is displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the mode of the effect symbol is changed with the image display erasure effect of displaying a plurality of smile image SGs and with the image movement effect of moving a plurality of ally character image MCGs. At this time, all aspects of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were changed (FIGS. 85 (K) and 86 (J)). On the other hand, the configuration may be such that only the mode of a specific effect symbol is changed. That is, it may be configured to change the mode of at least one of the left, middle, and right effects symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
It is a gaming machine that displays fluctuations in the symbol and notifies the winner of the lottery according to the stop mode of the symbol.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A display control means for changing the aspect of the symbol from the first aspect to the second aspect when the operation means is operated.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B2-1.
The display control means changes a specific symbol among the symbols from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B2-1 or the aspect B2-2.
The display control means changes the aspect of the symbol from the first aspect to the second aspect in the middle of the variable display of the symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B2-3.
When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the display control means changes the aspect of the symbol from the second aspect to the first aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B2-3 or the aspect B2-4.
The display control means executes a group effect of displaying a plurality of predetermined images after the symbol is stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B2-5.
The display control means changes the aspect of the symbol to the third aspect in accordance with the group effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B2-6.
The display control means further changes the symbol changed to the third aspect to the fourth aspect (FIG. 85 (L), FIG. 86 (K)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-8]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B2-7.
The display control means returns the symbol changed to the fourth aspect to the first aspect (FIG. 86 (L)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the group notice continuous effects A to F will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. This group notice continuous effect can be performed during the variable effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the group advance notice continuous effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the group advance notice continuous effect A and the group advance notice continuous effect B.
[Group notice continuous production A]
In the group notice continuous effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

87 (A) to 87 (F) are diagrams for explaining the group notice continuous effect A.
After the variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach formation effect, as shown in FIGS. 87 (B) and 87 (C), the first group notice effect is executed. The first group notice effect is an effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG1 so that the ally character images MCG1 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of ally character images MCG1 having different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do. Here, the ally character MCG1 is moved and displayed at the first speed as indicated by the arrow v1.

In FIG. 87 (B), the ally character image MCG1 is an opaque image, and the ally character image MCG1 is overlapped with the right effect symbol 8R. In FIG. 87 (C), the ally character image MCG1 is moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character image MCG1 is overlapped with the left effect symbol 8L.

After the first group notice effect, the second group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 87 (D) and 87 (E). The second group notice effect is an effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG2 so that the ally character images MCG2 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of ally character images MCG2 having different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do. Here, the ally character MCG2 is moved and displayed at the second speed as indicated by the arrow v2.

In FIG. 87 (D), the ally character image MCG2 is an opaque image, and the ally character image MCG2 is in a state of overlapping the right effect symbol 8R and the left effect symbol 8L. In FIG. 87 (E), the ally character image MCG2 is moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character image MCG2 is overlapped with the left effect symbol 8L. In addition, the middle symbol stop effect is executed here. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a but the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol.

[Group notice continuous production B]
In the group notice continuous effect B, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

87 (G) to 87 (L) are diagrams for explaining the group notice continuous effect B.
After the fluctuation start effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 87 (G). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach formation effect, as shown in FIGS. 87 (H) and 87 (I), the first group notice effect is executed. The first group notice effect is an effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG1 so that the ally character images MCG1 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of ally character images MCG1 having different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do. Here, the ally character MCG1 is moved and displayed at the first speed as indicated by the arrow v1.

In FIG. 87 (H), the ally character image MCG1 is an opaque image, and the ally character image MCG1 is overlapped with the right effect symbol 8R. In FIG. 87 (I), the ally character image MCG1 is moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character image MCG1 is overlapped with the left effect symbol 8L.

After the first group notice effect, the second group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 87 (J) and 87 (K). The second group notice effect is an effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG2 so that the ally character images MCG2 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of ally character images MCG2 having different sizes frame in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, move from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a. Out. Here, the ally character MCG2 is moved and displayed at the second speed as indicated by the arrow v2.

In FIG. 87 (J), the ally character image MCG2 is an opaque image, and the ally character image MCG2 is in a state of overlapping the right effect symbol 8R and the left effect symbol 8L. In FIG. 87 (K), the ally character image MCG2 is moved to the lower side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the middle symbol stop effect is executed here. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a but the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (L), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol.

FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the group advance notice continuous effect C and the group advance notice continuous effect D.
[Group notice continuous production C]
In the group notice continuous effect C, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (F) are diagrams for explaining the group notice continuous effect C.
After the variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach formation effect, as shown in FIGS. 88 (B) and 88 (C), the first group notice effect is executed. The first group notice effect is an effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG1 so that the ally character images MCG1 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of ally character images MCG1 having different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do.

In FIG. 88B, the ally character image MCG1 is an opaque image, and the ally character image MCG1 is overlapped with the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the movement is displayed at the first speed as indicated by the arrow v1. In FIG. 88C, the ally character image MCG1 is moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character image MCG1 is overlapped with the left effect symbol 8L. At this time, the enemy character image TCG is displayed so as to cover the right effect symbol. The moving speed of the ally character image MCG changes with the display of the enemy character image TCG. Specifically, as shown by the arrow v3, the movement is displayed at a third speed smaller than the first speed.

After the first group notice effect, the second group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 88 (D) and 88 (E). The second group notice effect is an effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG2 so that the ally character images MCG2 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of ally character images MCG2 having different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do. Here, the ally character MCG2 is moved and displayed at the second speed as indicated by the arrow v2.

In FIG. 88 (D), the ally character image MCG2 is an opaque image, and the ally character image MCG2 is in a state of overlapping the right effect symbol 8R and the left effect symbol 8L. In FIG. 88 (E), the ally character image MCG2 is moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character image MCG2 is overlapped with the left effect symbol 8L. In addition, the middle symbol stop effect is executed here. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a but the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (F), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol.

[Group notice continuous production D]
In the group notice continuous effect D, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

FIGS. 88 (G) to 88 (L) are diagrams for explaining the group notice continuous effect D.
After the fluctuation start effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 88 (G). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach formation effect, as shown in FIGS. 88 (H) and 88 (I), the first group notice effect is executed. The first group notice effect is an effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG1 so that the ally character images MCG1 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of ally character images MCG1 having different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do. Here, the ally character MCG1 is moved and displayed at the first speed as indicated by the arrow v1.

In FIG. 88 (H), the ally character image MCG1 is an opaque image, and the ally character image MCG1 is overlapped with the right effect symbol 8R. In FIG. 88 (I), the ally character image MCG1 is moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character image MCG1 is overlapped with the left effect symbol 8L.

After the first group notice effect, the second group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 88 (J) (K). The second group notice effect is an effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG2 so that the ally character images MCG2 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of ally character images MCG2 having different sizes frame in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, move from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a. Out.

In FIG. 88 (J), the ally character image MCG2 is an opaque image, and the ally character image MCG2 is in a state of overlapping the right effect symbol 8R and the left effect symbol 8L. At this time, as shown by the arrow v2, the movement is displayed at the second speed. In FIG. 88 (K), the ally character image MCG2 is moved to the lower side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the middle symbol stop effect is executed here. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. At this time, the ally character image MCG2 is moved and displayed at the fourth speed as shown by the arrow v4. The fourth speed changes according to the moving speed of the medium effect symbol 8C. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a but the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (L), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol.

FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the group advance notice continuous effect E and the group advance notice continuous effect F.
[Group notice continuous production E]
In the group notice continuous effect E, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

FIGS. 89 (A) to 89 (F) are diagrams for explaining the group notice continuous effect E.
After the fluctuation start effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 89 (A). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach formation effect, as shown in FIGS. 89 (B) and 89 (C), the first group notice effect is executed. The first group notice effect is an effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG1 so that the ally character images MCG1 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of ally character images MCG1 having different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do.

In FIG. 89B, the ally character image MCG1 is an opaque image, and the ally character image MCG1 is overlapped with the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the movement is displayed at the first speed as indicated by the arrow v1. In FIG. 89C, the ally character image MCG1 is moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character image MCG1 is overlapped with the left effect symbol 8L. At this time, the enemy character image TCG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The enemy character image TCG is displayed so as to overlap the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The moving speed of the ally character image MCG changes with the display of the enemy character image TCG. Specifically, as shown by the arrow v3, the movement is displayed at a third speed smaller than the first speed.

After the first group notice effect, the second group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 89 (D) and 89 (E). The second group notice effect is an effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG2 so that the ally character images MCG2 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of ally character images MCG2 having different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do. Here, the ally character MCG2 is moved and displayed at the second speed as indicated by the arrow v2.

In FIG. 89 (D), the ally character image MCG2 is an opaque image, and the ally character image MCG2 is in a state of overlapping the right effect symbol 8R and the left effect symbol 8L. In FIG. 89 (E), the ally character image MCG2 is moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character image MCG2 is overlapped with the left effect symbol 8L. In addition, the middle symbol stop effect is executed here. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a but the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol.

[Group notice continuous production F]
In the group notice continuous effect F, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

FIGS. 89 (G) to 89 (L) are diagrams for explaining the group notice continuous effect F.
After the fluctuation start effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 89 (G). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach formation effect, as shown in FIGS. 89 (H) and 89 (I), the first group notice effect is executed. The first group notice effect is an effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG1 so that the ally character images MCG1 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of ally character images MCG1 having different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do.

In FIG. 89 (H), the ally character image MCG1 is an opaque image, and the ally character image MCG1 is overlapped with the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the movement is displayed at the first speed as indicated by the arrow v1. In FIG. 89C, the ally character image MCG1 is moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character image MCG1 is overlapped with the left effect symbol 8L. At this time, the enemy character image TCG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The enemy character image TCG is displayed so as to overlap the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The moving speed of the ally character image MCG changes with the display of the enemy character image TCG. Specifically, as shown by the arrow v3, the movement is displayed at a third speed smaller than the first speed.

After the first group notice effect, the second group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 89 (J) (K). The second group notice effect is an effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG2 so that the ally character images MCG2 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of ally character images MCG2 having different sizes frame in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, move from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a. Out.

In FIG. 89 (J), the ally character image MCG2 is an opaque image, and the ally character image MCG2 is in a state of overlapping the right effect symbol 8R and the left effect symbol 8L. At this time, the enemy character image TCG displayed in the first group notice effect continues to be displayed, and the ally character image MCG2 is moved and displayed at the third speed as shown by the arrow v3. In FIG. 89 (K), the ally character image MCG2 is moved to the lower side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the middle symbol stop effect is executed here. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. At this time, the ally character image MCG2 is moved and displayed at the fourth speed as shown by the arrow v4. The fourth speed changes according to the moving speed of the medium effect symbol 8C. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a but the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (L), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of continuous production of group notice.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first group notice effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG1 so as to form a group is executed, and then a plurality of ally character images MCG2 are formed in a group. Execute the second group notice effect to move the ally character image MCG2 (FIGS. 87 (B) to (E) (H) to (K), FIGS. 88 (B) to (E) (H) to (K). , FIGS. 89 (B) to (E) (H) to (K)). According to this configuration, the advance notice effect in the variable effect becomes novel, and the fun of the game can be improved. The ally character MCG1 corresponds to the "first image", the first group notice effect corresponds to the "first effect", the ally character MCG2 corresponds to the "second image", and the second group advance notice effect is ". It corresponds to the "second effect", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "effect execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the moving speed of the ally character image MCG1 in the first group notice effect and the moving speed of the ally character image MCG2 in the second group notice effect are changed (FIGS. 88 (B) (C)). (J) (K), FIGS. 89 (B) (C) (H) to (K)). According to this configuration, the advance notice effect in the variable effect becomes even more novel, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the ally character image MCG1 in the first group notice effect and the ally character image MCG2 in the second group notice effect are moved in different directions (FIGS. 87 (H) to (K), FIGS. 88 (H) to (K), FIGS. 89 (H) to (K)). According to this configuration, the advance notice effect in the variable effect becomes even more novel, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the enemy character image TCG that overlaps the effect symbol in at least one of the first group advance notice effect and the second group advance notice effect is displayed (FIGS. 88 (C) (I) and 89 (C)). (I) (J)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player will be surprised by the display of the enemy character image TCG, and the interest of the game can be improved. The enemy character image TCG corresponds to the "third image".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the enemy character image TCG is displayed overlaid on the effect symbol to make a specific effect symbol difficult to see (FIGS. 88 (C) (I), 89 (C) (I)). (J)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player will be surprised by the display of the enemy character image TCG, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, at least one of the ally character image MCG1 in the first group notice effect and the ally character image MCG2 in the second group notice effect is displayed on the front side of the enemy character image TCG (FIG. 89 (C). ) (I) (J)). According to this configuration, the movement display of the ally character images MCG1 and MCG2 stands out, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the group notice continuous production.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the ally character images MCG1 and MCG2 are moved at a third speed smaller than the first speed along with the display of the enemy character image TCG. At this time, the third speed may be set to "0", and the movement of the ally character images MCG1 and MCG2 may be temporarily stopped. In that case, it is conceivable to restart the movement of the ally character images MCG1 and MCG2 at the timing when the enemy character image TCG is hidden. Alternatively, the third speed may be finely changed.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, a part of the effect pattern is covered with the enemy character image TCG. On the other hand, the enemy character image TCG may be displayed so as to cover the entire display screen 7a so as to cover the entire effect symbol. By doing so, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the effect pattern temporarily, so that there is a possibility that expectations for the subsequent variable display may increase, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the fourth speed is set according to the moving speed of the medium effect symbol 8C. The fourth speed may be the same as the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C, or may be twice or half the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the first group notice effect and the second group notice effect are executed after the reach formation, but the execution timing of the first group notice effect and the second group notice effect is not particularly limited. For example, both the first group notice effect and the second group notice effect may be executed before the reach formation. Further, for example, the first group notice effect may be executed before the reach formation, and the second group notice effect may be executed after the reach formation. As the timing before reach formation, it is conceivable to set the timing immediately after the start of fluctuation or the timing of stopping the left symbol. As the timing after the reach formation, it is conceivable to set the timing immediately after the reach formation as in the present embodiment or the timing after the fluctuating medium effect symbol becomes visible.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the effect symbol may be promoted at the timing when the effect symbol becomes difficult to see by the enemy character image TCG, the ally character image MCG1 and the MCG2. For example, the reach symbol is promoted to an advantageous reach symbol.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, at least one of the enemy character image TCG, the ally character image MCG1 and the MCG2 may be an image having transparency such as transparent or translucent, or the transparency may be changed during the production. ..

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B3-1]
It is a gaming machine that displays fluctuations in the symbol and notifies the winner of the lottery according to the stop mode of the symbol.
The first effect of moving the plurality of the first images so that the first images form a group is executed, and then the plurality of the second images are formed so that the second images different from the first images form a group. A production execution means capable of executing a second production to be moved is provided.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B3-1.
The effect executing means changes at least one of the moving speed of the first image in the first effect and the moving speed of the second image in the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B3-1 or the aspect B3-2.
The effect executing means moves the first image in the first effect and the second image in the second effect in different directions.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3.
The effect executing means displays a third image overlapping the symbol in at least one of the first effect and the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4.
The effect executing means makes a specific symbol difficult to see by displaying the third image on the symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B3-4 or the aspect B3-5.
The effect executing means displays at least one of the first image in the first effect and the second image in the second effect on the front side of the third image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, a plurality of image movement effects A to F will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. This multiple image movement effect can be performed during the variable effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a plurality of image movement effects, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of image movement effects A and a plurality of image movement effects B.
[Multiple image movement effect A]
In the multiple image movement effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

90 (A) to 90 (F) are diagrams for explaining the plurality of image movement effects A.
After the variation start effect, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach formation effect, the image movement effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 90 (B) to 90 (E). In the image movement effect, a plurality of ally character image MCGs framed in from the lower end of the display screen 7a are moved upward and framed out from the upper end, and a plurality of enemy character image TCGs framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a are performed. The effect of moving it downward and frame-out from the lower end is performed in parallel.

In FIG. 90B, four ally character image MCGs are moved and displayed on the display screen 7a in the direction indicated by the arrow MD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, three enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed on the front side of the ally character image MCG in the direction indicated by the arrow TD.

In FIG. 90C, on the display screen 7a, three enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, all the ally character image MCGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character image TCG is displayed.

In FIG. 90 (D), on the display screen 7a, five ally character image MCGs are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow MD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, three enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed on the front side of the ally character image MCG in the direction indicated by the arrow TD. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize them.

In FIG. 90 (E), on the display screen 7a, two enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, all the ally character image MCGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character image TCG is displayed. In addition, the middle symbol stop effect is executed here. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a but the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol. When all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the image movement effect ends.

[Multiple image movement effect B]
In the plurality of image movement effect B, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

90 (G) to 90 (L) are diagrams for explaining the plurality of image movement effects B.
After the fluctuation start effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 90 (G). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach formation effect, the image movement effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 90 (H) to 90 (K). In the image movement effect, a plurality of ally character image MCGs framed in from the lower end of the display screen 7a are moved upward and framed out from the upper end, and a plurality of enemy character image TCGs framed in from the right end of the display screen 7a. The effect of moving to the left and frame-out from the left end is performed in parallel.

In FIG. 90 (H), four ally character image MCGs are moved and displayed on the display screen 7a in the direction indicated by the arrow MD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, three enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed on the front side of the ally character image MCG in the direction indicated by the arrow TD.

In FIG. 90 (I), on the display screen 7a, three enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, all the ally character image MCGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character image TCG is displayed.

In FIG. 90 (J), on the display screen 7a, five ally character image MCGs are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow MD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, three enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed on the front side of the ally character image MCG in the direction indicated by the arrow TD.

In FIG. 90 (K), on the display screen 7a, two enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, all the ally character image MCGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character image TCG is displayed. In addition, the middle symbol stop effect is executed here. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a but the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (L), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol. When all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the image movement effect ends.

FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the plurality of image movement effects C and the plurality of image movement effects D.
[Multiple image movement effect C]
In the multiple image movement effect C, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

91 (A) to 91 (F) are diagrams for explaining the plurality of image movement effects C.
After the fluctuation start effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 91 (A). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach formation effect, the image movement effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 91 (B) to 91 (E). In the image movement effect, a plurality of ally character image MCGs framed in from the lower end of the display screen 7a are moved upward and framed out from the upper end, and a plurality of enemy character image TCGs framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a are performed. The effect of moving it downward and frame-out from the lower end is performed in parallel.

In FIG. 91B, four ally character images MCG1 are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow MD1 on the display screen 7a. Further, two ally character images MCG2 different from the ally character image MCG1 are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow MD2. Furthermore, the three enemy character images TCG are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD. As for the front-back relationship between the images, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the innermost side, and the ally character image MCG1, the enemy character image TCG, and the ally character image MCG2 are displayed in this order from the back side.

In FIG. 91 (C), on the display screen 7a, three enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, the ally character images MCG1 and MCG2 are all framed out from the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character image TCG is displayed.

In FIG. 91 (D), five friendly character images MCG1 are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow MD1 on the display screen 7a. Further, the two ally character images MCG2 are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow MD2. Furthermore, the three enemy character images TCG are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD. As for the front-back relationship between the images, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the innermost side, and the ally character image MCG1, the enemy character image TCG, and the ally character image MCG2 are displayed in this order from the back side.

In FIG. 91 (E), on the display screen 7a, two enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, the ally character images MCG1 and MCG2 are all framed out from the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character image TCG is displayed. In addition, the middle symbol stop effect is executed here. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a but the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol. When all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the image movement effect ends.

[Multiple image movement effect D]
In the multiple image movement effect D, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

FIGS. 91 (G) to 91 (L) are diagrams for explaining the plurality of image movement effects D.
After the fluctuation start effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 91 (G). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach formation effect, the image movement effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 91 (H) to 91 (K). In the image movement effect, a plurality of ally character image MCGs framed in from the lower end of the display screen 7a are moved upward and framed out from the upper end, and a plurality of enemy character image TCGs framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a are performed. The effect of moving it downward and frame-out from the lower end is performed in parallel.

In FIG. 91 (H), four ally character images MCG1 are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow MD1 on the display screen 7a. Further, two ally character images MCG2 different from the ally character image MCG1 are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow MD2. Furthermore, one enemy character image TCG2 having a display color different from that of the two enemy character images TCG1 and the enemy character image TCG1 is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD. As for the front-back relationship between the images, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the innermost side, and the ally character image MCG1, the enemy character image TCG1, TCG2, and the ally character image MCG2 are displayed in this order from the back side. There is.

In FIG. 91 (I), on the display screen 7a, two enemy character images TCG1 and one enemy character image TCG2 are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. .. Here, the ally character images MCG1 and MCG2 are all framed out from the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character images TCG1 and TCG2 are displayed.

In FIG. 91 (J), five friendly character images MCG1 are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow MD1 on the display screen 7a. Further, the two ally character images MCG2 are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow MD2. Furthermore, two enemy character images TCG1 and one enemy character image TCG2 are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD. As for the front-back relationship between the images, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the innermost side, and the ally character image MCG1, the enemy character image TCG1, TCG2, and the ally character image MCG2 are displayed in this order from the back side. There is.

In FIG. 91 (K), one enemy character image TCG1 and one enemy character image TCG2 are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a. .. Here, the ally character images MCG1 and MCG2 are all framed out from the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character images TCG1 and TCG2 are displayed. In addition, the middle symbol stop effect is executed here. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "6" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a but the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (L), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "6" symbol. When all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the image movement effect ends.

FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the plurality of image movement effects E and the plurality of image movement effects F.
[Multiple image movement effect E]
In the multiple image movement effect E, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

92 (A) to 92 (F) are diagrams for explaining the plurality of image movement effects E.
After the fluctuation start effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 92 (A). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Further, the enemy character image TCG is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TDB.

After the reach formation effect, the image movement effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 92 (B) to 92 (E). In the image movement effect, a plurality of ally character image MCGs framed in from the lower end of the display screen 7a are moved upward and framed out from the upper end, and a plurality of enemy character image TCGs framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a are performed. The effect of moving it downward and frame-out from the lower end is performed in parallel.

In FIG. 92B, four ally character image MCGs are moved and displayed on the display screen 7a in the direction indicated by the arrow MD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, three enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed on the front side of the ally character image MCG in the direction indicated by the arrow TD.

In FIG. 92 (C), on the display screen 7a, three enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, all the ally character image MCGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character image TCG is displayed.

In FIG. 92 (D), on the display screen 7a, five ally character image MCGs are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow MD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, three enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed on the front side of the ally character image MCG in the direction indicated by the arrow TD. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize them.

In FIG. 92 (E), on the display screen 7a, two enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, all the ally character image MCGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character image TCG is displayed. Then, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, which are the reach symbols, are changed to the "7" symbols, and the middle symbol stop effect is executed here. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "7" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. If it is a big hit, the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "7" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a but the "8" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "7" symbol. When all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the image movement effect ends.

[Multiple image movement effect F]
In the plurality of image movement effect F, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed so as to move downward. The arrangement of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the same. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order, such as "design → ...".

92 (G) to 92 (L) are diagrams for explaining the plurality of image movement effects F.
After the fluctuation start effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 92 (G). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol forms a reach mode and stops. Here, it is shown that the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stop at the “6” symbol to form a reach mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Further, the enemy character image TCG is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TDB.

After the reach formation effect, the image movement effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 92 (H) to 92 (K). In the image movement effect, a plurality of ally character image MCGs framed in from the lower end of the display screen 7a are moved upward and framed out from the upper end, and a plurality of enemy character image TCGs framed in from the right end of the display screen 7a. The effect of moving to the left and frame-out from the left end is performed in parallel.

In FIG. 92 (H), four ally character image MCGs are moved and displayed on the display screen 7a in the direction indicated by the arrow MD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, three enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed on the front side of the ally character image MCG in the direction indicated by the arrow TD.

In FIG. 92 (I), on the display screen 7a, three enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, all the ally character image MCGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character image TCG is displayed.

In FIG. 92 (J), on the display screen 7a, five ally character image MCGs are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow MD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, three enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed on the front side of the ally character image MCG in the direction indicated by the arrow TD. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize them.

In FIG. 92 (K), on the display screen 7a, two enemy character image TCGs are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TD on the front side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, all the ally character image MCGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character image TCG is displayed. Then, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, which are the reach symbols, are changed to the "7" symbols, and the middle symbol stop effect is executed here. The middle effect symbol 8C is an effect in which the moving speed of the middle effect symbol 8C is slowed down and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol included in the middle effect symbol 8C are displayed, and the state in which the "7" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. If it is a big hit, the "7" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is lost, the "7" symbol does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a but the "8" symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. I will continue to explain it as a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "7" symbol. When all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the image movement effect ends.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the multiple image movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect of moving the plurality of ally character images MCG and MCG1 in the directions indicated by the arrows MD and MD1 and the movement of the plurality of enemy character images TCG, TCG1 and TCG2 in the directions indicated by the arrows TD. The production is executed in parallel (FIGS. 90 (B) (D) (H) (J), FIGS. 91 (B) (D) (H) (J), FIGS. 92 (B) (D) (H). (J)). According to this configuration, a plurality of ally character images MCG, MCG1 and a plurality of enemy character images TCG, TCG1, and TCG2 are moved and displayed in parallel, so that the variation effect becomes novel and the fun of the game is improved. Can be done. The ally character images MCG and MCG1 correspond to the "first image", the directions indicated by the arrows MD and MD1 correspond to the "first direction", and the effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG and MCG1 is "first". The enemy character images TCG, TCG1 and TCG2 correspond to the "second image", the direction indicated by the arrow TD corresponds to the "second direction", and a plurality of enemy character images TCG, TCG1 and TCG2 correspond to "1 production". The effect of moving the image corresponds to the "second effect", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "effect execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the ally character image MCG1 is moved, a plurality of ally character images MCG2 are moved (FIGS. 91 (B) (D) (H) (J)). Further, when the enemy character image TCG1 is moved, the enemy character images TCG2 having different display colors are moved (FIGS. 91 (H) to (K)). According to this configuration, the variable effect becomes even more novel, and the fun of the game can be improved. The ally character image MCG2 and the enemy character image TCG2 correspond to the "third image".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect of moving a plurality of ally character images MCG and MCG1 in the directions indicated by the arrows MD and MD1 is intermittently executed (FIGS. 90 (B) (D) (H) (J)). , FIG. 91 (B) (D) (H) (J), FIG. 92 (B) (D) (H) (J)). According to this configuration, since the movement effect of the ally character images MCG and MCG1 is intermittently executed, the variable effect becomes even more novel, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect of continuously moving a plurality of enemy character images TCG, TCG1, and TCG2 in the direction indicated by the arrow TD is executed (FIGS. 90 (B) to (E) (H) to (H). K), FIGS. 91 (B) to (E) (H) to (K), FIGS. 92 (B) to (E) (H) to (K)). According to this configuration, since the movement effect of the enemy character images TCG, TCG1 and TCG2 is continuously executed, the variable effect becomes more novel and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed, the execution of the effect of moving the ally character images MCG, MCG1, MCG2 and the enemy character images TCG, TCG1 and TCG2 is stopped. (FIG. 90 (F) (L), FIG. 91 (F) (L), FIG. 92 (F) (L)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the end of the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, before moving and displaying the plurality of ally character images MCG, MCG1, MCG2 and the plurality of enemy character images TCG, TCG1, TCG2, the enemy character image TCG is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TDB. (Fig. 92 (A) (G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player the expectation that something will happen, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the multiple image movement effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the ally character image MCG2 and the enemy character image TCG2 as the "third image" are moved in the directions indicated by the arrow MD2 and the directions indicated by the arrow TD, respectively. On the other hand, the moving direction of the "third image" is not particularly limited. For example, the ally character image MCG2 may be moved in a direction different from that of the ally character image MCG1. Further, for example, the enemy character image TCG2 may be moved in a direction different from that of the enemy character image TCG1. Further, the moving speed of the "third image" is not particularly limited. For example, the ally character image MCG2 may be moved at a speed different from that of the ally character image MCG1. Further, for example, the enemy character image TCG2 may be moved at a speed different from that of the enemy character image TCG1. According to these configurations, the chaos in the image movement effect is increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the ally character images MCG, MCG1, MCG2 and the enemy character images TCG, TCG1 and TCG2 are moved so as to draw a straight line trajectory, respectively. On the other hand, at least one of the ally character images MCG, MCG1, MCG2 and the enemy character images TCG, TCG1 and TCG2 may be moved so as to draw a curved trajectory. In this case, at least a part of the curved trajectory drawn by the image may be displayed together with the image.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the effect of moving the ally character images MCG, MCG1 and MCG2 is intermittently executed. On the other hand, the effect of moving the ally character images MCG, MCG1 and MCG2 may be continuously executed. Further, the effect of moving the ally character images MCG, MCG1 and MCG2 may be executed only once without repeating.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the effect of moving the enemy character images TCG, TCG1 and TCG2 is continuously executed. On the other hand, the effect of moving the enemy character images TCG, TCG1 and TCG2 may be intermittently executed. Further, the effect of moving the enemy character images TCG, TCG1 and TCG2 may be executed only once without repeating.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the ally character images MCG, MCG1, MCG2 and the enemy character images TCG, TCG1 and TCG2 are opaque images. On the other hand, at least one of the ally character images MCG, MCG1, MCG2 and the enemy character images TCG, TCG1 and TCG2 may have transparency. Alternatively, the transparency of at least one of the friendly character images MCG, MCG1, MCG2 and the enemy character images TCG, TCG1 and TCG2 may be changed in the middle of the movement display.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B4-1]
It is a gaming machine that displays fluctuations in the symbol and notifies the winner of the lottery according to the stop mode of the symbol.
Execution of an effect that can be executed in parallel with a first effect of moving a plurality of first images in a first direction and a second effect of moving a plurality of second images in a second direction different from the first direction. Equipped with means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B4-1.
The effect executing means moves a plurality of third images in either the first effect or the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2.
The effect executing means can intermittently execute the first effect during the variable display of the symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-3.
The effect executing means can continuously execute the second effect during the variable display of the symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4.
When all of the symbols are stopped and displayed, the effect executing means stops the execution of the first effect and the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-5.
The effect executing means can execute a third effect of moving the second image in a third direction before executing the first effect and the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The effect mode selection effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. This effect mode selection effect is executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the effect mode selection effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Production mode selection effect A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the effect mode selection effect A. The effect mode selection effect has a period in which the effect mode can be switched by the player's operation during the change of the decorative symbol, and a period in which the effect mode is not switched in spite of the player's operation during the same change. It is a production.

Here, the gaming machine 1 can select a plurality of production modes in which the background image, music, and the like are different during the fluctuation production in the normal state. The effect mode is switched by the player operating the select button 68. In the effect mode selection effect A, when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are all displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 becomes an effective period (operation valid period), and the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2. When even one of 8R2 is displayed as deceleration fluctuation or stopped, the switching of the effect mode by the operation of the select button 68 becomes an invalid period (operation invalid period). That is, when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are all difficult to see, the effect mode switching is effective, and when even one of the symbols is visible, the effect mode switching is invalid.

The gaming machine 1 is set with a "battle effect mode", a "dark effect mode", and a "happy effect mode", and one of the effect modes is executed. In the "battle production mode", an image of an enemy character and an ally character fighting is displayed. A dark background is displayed in the "dark effect mode". In the "happy production mode", the background image of the heart is displayed.

In the effect mode selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the effect mode suggestion image, the background image of the enemy character and the ally character, and the hold are displayed on the display screen 7a. The icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C2, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The variable display of special symbols (variation of special symbols) is indicated by, and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. In FIG. 93 (A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed fluctuations corresponding to the current special map fluctuations (the fluctuations).

The effect mode suggestion image is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a, and suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "battle effect mode" is selected here, the character image of the "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Here, the effect mode suggestion image does not move from the upper left position of the display screen 7a. In addition, it is continuously displayed over multiple fluctuations. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the effect mode switching becomes an effective period (operation valid period), and when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is shown in FIG. 93 (B). Switch to "dark production mode".

As shown in FIG. 93 (B), when the effect mode is switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed at the same position. Specifically, the currently selected "dark effect mode" character image is displayed inside the rectangular image. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are continuously displayed in high-speed fluctuation. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the period during which the effect mode switching is effective (operation valid period) continues, and when the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is changed. It switches to the "happy production mode" shown in FIG. 93 (C).

As shown in FIG. 93 (C), when the effect mode is further switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed again at the same position. Specifically, the currently selected "happy effect mode" character image is displayed inside the rectangular image. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are continuously displayed in high-speed fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L2 decreases to display the deceleration fluctuation, and the symbol of the left decorative symbol 8L2 becomes visible. Since a part of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 (left decorative symbol 8L2) is displayed as a deceleration fluctuation display and the symbols can be visually recognized, the switching of the effect mode becomes an invalid period (operation invalid period).

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L2 temporarily stops at "3". Further, the fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R2 is reduced to display the deceleration fluctuation, and the symbol of the right decorative symbol 8R2 can be visually recognized. Since some of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 (left decorative symbol 8L2 and right decorative symbol 8R2) are visible, the period in which the effect mode switching is invalid (operation invalid period) continues. When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is not switched, and instead, a post-variation effect mode change suggestion image composed of a character image of "switches after the end" is displayed. The effect suggestion image after the end of the fluctuation suggests that the effect mode is not switched in this change, but the effect mode is switched after the end of this change.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R2 temporarily stops at "5", the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative symbol 8C2 decreases and the deceleration fluctuation display is displayed, and then the temporary stop at "7". do. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixedly stopped in the loss mode of "375". Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible, the effect mode switching is invalid (operation invalid period). After the fluctuation ends, the display of the effect mode change suggestion image disappears after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the display. Further, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears by the pending digestion.

FIG. 93 (G) shows a state in which the next fluctuation has started. The next fluctuation is started, and the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed as high-speed fluctuations. Since the effect suggestion image for changing the effect mode is displayed (FIG. 93 (E)) after the end of the change due to the previous change, the effect mode is switched immediately after the start of the next change regardless of whether or not the player operates the image. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image is switched to the currently selected "battle effect mode". The hold icon 9A shifts to the right and becomes a variable icon (hold icon) 9C as shown in FIG. 93 (H). Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the effect mode switching becomes an effective period (operation valid period), and when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is shown in FIG. 93 (I). Switch to "dark production mode".

As shown in FIG. 93 (I), when the effect mode is switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed at the same position. Specifically, the currently selected "dark effect mode" character image is displayed inside the rectangular image. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are continuously displayed in high-speed fluctuation. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the period during which the effect mode switching is effective (operation valid period) continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (J), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L2 decreases to display the deceleration fluctuation, and the symbol of the left decorative symbol 8L2 becomes visible. Since a part of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 (left decorative symbol 8L2) is displayed as a deceleration fluctuation display and the symbols can be visually recognized, the switching of the effect mode becomes an invalid period (operation invalid period). When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is not switched, and instead, a post-variation effect mode change suggestion image composed of a character image of "switches after the end" is displayed. The effect suggestion image after the end of the fluctuation suggests that the effect mode is not switched in this change, but the effect mode is switched after the end of this change.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (K), the left decorative symbol 8L2 temporarily stops at "6". Further, the fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R2 is reduced to display the deceleration fluctuation, and the symbol of the right decorative symbol 8R2 can be visually recognized. Since some of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 (left decorative symbol 8L2 and right decorative symbol 8R2) can be visually recognized, the effect mode switching is invalid (operation invalid period). After the fluctuation ends, the display of the effect mode change suggestion image disappears after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (L), the right decorative symbol 8R2 temporarily stops at "3", the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative symbol 8C2 decreases and the deceleration fluctuation display is displayed, and then the temporary stop at "3". do. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixedly stopped in the loss mode of "633". The effect mode suggestion image is maintained in the displayed state. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible, the effect mode switching is invalid (operation invalid period). Further, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears by the pending digestion. As a result, the hold icon 9C disappears and the screen switches to the standby screen.

FIG. 93 (M) shows a state in which the standby screen is switched to. Since the effect suggestion image for changing the effect mode after the end of the change is displayed during the change in FIG. 93 (J), the effect mode is switched immediately after the end of the change and the standby screen is switched regardless of whether or not the player operates the image. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image is switched to the currently selected "happy effect mode". The effect mode suggestion image is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, suggesting the currently selected effect mode. Since the "happy effect mode" is selected here, the character image of the "happy effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are not displayed, the effect mode switching becomes an effective period (operation valid period), and when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is switched.

When a ball enters the first starting port 20 while the standby screen of FIG. 93 (M) is displayed, the variable icon 9C is displayed and the decorative symbol 8L2, as shown in FIG. 93 (N). 8C2 and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation. The effect mode suggestion image is moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a and the size is restored to the original size. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the switching of the effect mode is an effective period (operation valid period).

[Production mode selection effect B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the effect mode selection effect B. The effect mode selection effect has a period in which the effect mode can be switched by the player's operation during the change of the decorative symbol, and a period in which the effect mode is not switched in spite of the player's operation during the same change. It is a production.

Here, the gaming machine 1 can select a plurality of production modes in which the background image, music, and the like are different during the fluctuation production in the normal state. The effect mode is switched by the player operating the select button 68. In the effect mode selection effect B, when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are all displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 becomes an effective period (operation valid period), and the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2. When even one of 8R2 is displayed as deceleration fluctuation or stopped, the switching of the effect mode by the operation of the select button 68 becomes an invalid period (operation invalid period). That is, when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are all difficult to see, the effect mode switching is effective, and when even one of the symbols is visible, the effect mode switching is invalid.

The gaming machine 1 is set with a "battle effect mode", a "dark effect mode", and a "happy effect mode", and one of the effect modes is executed. In the "battle production mode", an image of an enemy character and an ally character fighting is displayed. A dark background is displayed in the "dark effect mode". In the "happy production mode", the background image of the heart is displayed.

In the effect mode selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the effect mode suggestion image, the background image of the enemy character and the ally character, and the hold are displayed on the display screen 7a. The icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C2, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The variable display of special symbols (variation of special symbols) is indicated by, and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. In FIG. 94 (A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed fluctuations corresponding to the current special map fluctuations (the fluctuations).

The effect mode suggestion image is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a, and suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "battle effect mode" is selected here, the character image of the "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Here, the effect mode suggestion image does not move from the upper left position of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the display of the effect mode suggestion image disappears after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the display. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the effect mode switching becomes an effective period (operation valid period), and when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is shown in FIG. 94 (B). Switch to "dark production mode".

As shown in FIG. 94 (B), when the effect mode is switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed and newly displayed at the same position. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image in which the currently selected "dark effect mode" character image is displayed inside the rectangular image is newly displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the display of the effect mode suggestion image disappears after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the image was newly displayed. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are continuously displayed in high-speed fluctuation. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the period during which the effect mode switching is effective (operation valid period) continues, and when the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is changed. It switches to the "happy production mode" shown in FIG. 94 (D).

As shown in FIG. 94 (D), when the effect mode is switched, the effect mode suggestion image whose display content is changed is newly displayed. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image in which the currently selected "happy effect mode" character image is displayed inside the rectangular image is newly displayed. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are continuously displayed in high-speed fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L2 decreases to display the deceleration fluctuation, and the symbol of the left decorative symbol 8L2 becomes visible. Since a part of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 (left decorative symbol 8L2) is displayed as a deceleration fluctuation display and the symbols can be visually recognized, the switching of the effect mode becomes an invalid period (operation invalid period). The display of the effect mode suggestion image disappears after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has passed since the image was newly displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L2 temporarily stops at "3". Further, the fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R2 is reduced to display the deceleration fluctuation, and the symbol of the right decorative symbol 8R2 can be visually recognized. Since some of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 (left decorative symbol 8L2 and right decorative symbol 8R2) are visible, the period in which the effect mode switching is invalid (operation invalid period) continues. When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is not switched, and instead, a post-variation effect mode change suggestion image composed of a character image of "switches after the end" is displayed. The effect suggestion image after the end of the fluctuation suggests that the effect mode is not switched in this change, but the effect mode is switched after the end of this change.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R2 temporarily stops at "5", the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative symbol 8C2 decreases and the deceleration fluctuation display is displayed, and then the temporary stop at "7". do. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixedly stopped in the loss mode of "375". Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible, the effect mode switching is invalid (operation invalid period). After the end of the fluctuation, the display of the effect mode change suggestion image disappears after a predetermined period has elapsed after the display. Further, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears by the pending digestion.

FIG. 94 (H) shows a state in which the next fluctuation has started. The next fluctuation is started, and the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed as high-speed fluctuations. Since the effect suggestion image for changing the effect mode is displayed (FIG. 94 (F)) after the end of the change due to the previous change, the effect mode is switched immediately after the start of the next change regardless of whether or not the player operates the image. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image is switched to the currently selected "battle effect mode". The hold icon 9A shifts to the right and becomes a variable icon (hold icon) 9C as shown in FIG. 94 (I). Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the switching of the effect mode is an effective period (operation valid period). The display of the effect mode suggestion image disappears after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has passed since the image was newly displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (J), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L2 decreases to display the deceleration fluctuation, and the symbol of the left decorative symbol 8L2 becomes visible. Since a part of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 (left decorative symbol 8L2) is displayed as a deceleration fluctuation display and the symbols can be visually recognized, the switching of the effect mode becomes an invalid period (operation invalid period). The effect mode suggestion image remains disappeared.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (K), the left decorative symbol 8L2 temporarily stops at "6". Further, the fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R2 is reduced to display the deceleration fluctuation, and the symbol of the right decorative symbol 8R2 can be visually recognized. Since some of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 (left decorative symbol 8L2 and right decorative symbol 8R2) can be visually recognized, the effect mode switching is invalid (operation invalid period). When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is not switched, and instead, a post-variation effect mode change suggestion image composed of a character image of "switches after the end" is displayed. The effect suggestion image after the end of the fluctuation suggests that the effect mode is not switched in this change, but the effect mode is switched after the end of this change. The effect mode suggestion image remains disappeared.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (L), the right decorative symbol 8R2 temporarily stops at "3", the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative symbol 8C2 decreases and the deceleration fluctuation display is displayed, and then the temporary stop at "3". do. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixedly stopped in the loss mode of "633". The effect mode suggestion image remains disappeared. After the end of the fluctuation, the display of the effect mode change suggestion image disappears after a predetermined period has elapsed after the display. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible, the effect mode switching is invalid (operation invalid period). Further, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears by the pending digestion. As a result, the hold icon 9C disappears and the screen switches to the standby screen.

FIG. 94 (M) shows a state in which the standby screen is switched to. Since the effect suggestion image for changing the effect mode after the end of the change is displayed during the change in FIG. 94 (K), the effect mode is switched immediately after the end of the change and the standby screen is switched regardless of whether or not the player operates the image. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image is switched to the currently selected "dark effect mode". The effect mode suggestion image is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, suggesting the currently selected effect mode. Since the "dark effect mode" is selected here, the character image of the "dark effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are not displayed, the effect mode switching becomes an effective period (operation valid period), and when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is switched.

When a ball enters the first starting port 20 while the standby screen of FIG. 94 (M) is displayed, the variable icon 9C is displayed and the decorative symbol 8L2, as shown in FIG. 94 (N). 8C2 and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation. The effect mode suggestion image is moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a and the size is restored to the original size. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the switching of the effect mode is an effective period (operation valid period).

[Production mode selection effect C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the effect mode selection effect C. The effect mode selection effect has a period in which the effect mode can be switched by the player's operation during the change of the decorative symbol, and a period in which the effect mode is not switched in spite of the player's operation during the same change. It is a production.

Here, the gaming machine 1 can select a plurality of production modes in which the background image, music, and the like are different during the fluctuation production in the normal state. The effect mode is switched by the player operating the select button 68. In the effect mode selection effect C, unlike the effect mode selection effect AB, when even one of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 is displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the effect mode switching by operating the select button 68 is effective (operation). (Valid period), and when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are all displayed as deceleration fluctuations or stopped, the switching of the effect mode by the operation of the select button 68 becomes an invalid period (operation invalid period). That is, when it is difficult to visually recognize even one of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the effect mode switching is effective, and when all the symbols are visible, the effect mode switching is invalid.

The gaming machine 1 is set with a "battle effect mode", a "dark effect mode", and a "happy effect mode", and one of the effect modes is executed. In the "battle production mode", an image of a battle between an enemy character and an ally character is displayed. A dark background is displayed in the "dark effect mode". In the "happy production mode", the background image of the heart is displayed.

In the effect mode selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the effect mode suggestion image, the background image of the enemy character and the ally character, and the hold are displayed on the display screen 7a. The icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C2, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The variable display of special symbols (variation of special symbols) is indicated by, and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. In FIG. 95 (A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed fluctuations corresponding to the current special map fluctuations (the fluctuations).

The effect mode suggestion image is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a, and suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "happy effect mode" is selected here, the character image of the "happy effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Here, the effect mode suggestion image does not move from the upper left position of the display screen 7a. In addition, it is continuously displayed over multiple fluctuations. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the switching of the effect mode is an effective period (operation valid period).

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L2 decreases to display the deceleration fluctuation, and the symbol of the left decorative symbol 8L2 becomes visible. A part of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 (left decorative symbol 8L2) became a deceleration fluctuation display and the symbols became visible, but since not all the symbols became visible, the effect mode could be switched. The valid period (operation valid period) is maintained. When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is switched to the "battle effect mode" shown in FIG. 95 (C).

As shown in FIG. 95 (C), when the effect mode is switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed again at the same position. Specifically, the character image of the currently selected "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. In the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, the left decorative symbol 8L2 is temporarily stopped at "6". Further, the fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R2 is reduced to display the deceleration fluctuation, and the symbol of the right decorative symbol 8R2 can be visually recognized. Some of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 (left decorative symbol 8L2 and right decorative symbol 8R2) are now visible, but not all of them are visible, so switching the production mode. Is maintained for a valid period (operation valid period). When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is switched to the "dark effect mode" shown in FIG. 95 (D).

As shown in FIG. 95 (D), when the effect mode is switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed again at the same position. Specifically, the currently selected "dark effect mode" character image is displayed inside the rectangular image. In the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2, the right decorative symbol 8R2 temporarily stops at "3", the fluctuation speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 decreases, and the deceleration fluctuation display is displayed. As a result, since all the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible, the switching of the effect mode is switched to the invalid period (operation invalid period). When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is not switched, and instead, a post-variation effect mode change suggestion image composed of a character image of "switches after the end" is displayed. The effect suggestion image after the end of the fluctuation suggests that the effect mode is not switched in this change, but the effect mode is switched after the end of this change.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (E), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 temporarily stops at "5". As a result, the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixedly stopped in the loss mode of "633". Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible, the effect mode switching is invalid (operation invalid period). After the change is completed, the display of the effect mode change suggestion image is maintained until the change is completed. Further, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears by the pending digestion.

FIG. 95 (F) shows a state in which the next fluctuation has started. The next fluctuation is started, and the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed as high-speed fluctuations. Since the effect suggestion image for changing the effect mode is displayed (FIG. 95 (D)) after the end of the change due to the previous change, the effect mode is switched immediately after the start of the next change regardless of whether or not the player operates the image. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image is switched to the currently selected "happy effect mode". The hold icon 9A shifts to the right and becomes the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the switching of the effect mode is an effective period (operation valid period).

As shown in FIG. 95 (G), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuations, then decelerated all at once and displayed in deceleration fluctuations. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are all displayed with deceleration fluctuations and the symbols are visible, the switching of the effect mode is switched to the invalid period (operation invalid period). As shown in FIG. 95 (H), when the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is not switched, but instead, the effect mode is changed after the variation, which is composed of the character image of "switches after the end". A suggestion image is displayed. As described above, the effect suggestion image for changing the effect mode after the end of the fluctuation suggests that the effect mode is not switched in the current variation, but the effect mode is switched after the end of the current variation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (I), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed again at high speed. As a result, the switching of the effect mode becomes an effective period (operation valid period) again during the same fluctuation. At the same time, a mode re-switchable suggestion image composed of a character image of "mode re-switchable!" Is displayed. When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is switched to the "battle effect mode" shown in FIG. 95 (J).

As shown in FIG. 95 (J), when the effect mode is switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed again at the same position. Specifically, the character image of the currently selected "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 maintain the high-speed fluctuation display, the switching of the effect mode is an effective period (operation valid period).

As shown in FIG. 95 (K), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuations, then decelerated all at once and displayed in deceleration fluctuations. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are all displayed with deceleration fluctuations and the symbols are visible, the switching of the effect mode is switched to the invalid period (operation invalid period). As shown in FIG. 95 (L), when the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is not switched, but instead, the effect mode is changed after the variation, which is composed of the character image of "switches after the end". A suggestion image is displayed. As described above, the effect suggestion image for changing the effect mode after the end of the fluctuation suggests that the effect mode is not switched in the current variation, but the effect mode is switched after the end of the current variation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (M), the left decorative symbol 8L2 temporarily stops at "3". Next, the right decorative symbol 8R2 temporarily stops at "3". After that, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C2 temporarily stops at "3". As a result, the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixedly stopped in the loss mode of "633". Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible, the effect mode switching is invalid (operation invalid period). After the fluctuation ends, the display of the effect mode change suggestion image and the effect mode suggestion image disappears. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears by pending digestion.

FIG. 95 (N) shows a state in which the next fluctuation has started. The next fluctuation is started, and the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed as high-speed fluctuations. Since the effect suggestion image for changing the effect mode is displayed (FIG. 95 (L)) after the end of the change due to the previous change, the effect mode is switched immediately after the start of the next change regardless of whether or not the player operates the image. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image is switched to the currently selected "dark effect mode". The hold icon 9A shifts to the right and becomes the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the switching of the effect mode is an effective period (operation valid period).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the effect mode selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, a first period (FIG. 93 (FIG. 93)) in which the effect mode can be switched by the operation of the select button 68 by the player while the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are changing. A) to (C)), after the first period, during the same fluctuation as the first period, the second period (FIG. 93) in which the effect mode is not switched despite the operation of the select button 68 by the player. (D) to (F)) can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 94 and 95.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 (E) to (G) and (J) to (M), when the player operates the select button 68 during the second period, the first is In the second period, the effect mode is not switched, and the effect in which the effect mode is switched can be executed after the fluctuation during the second period is completed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 94 and 95.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 (E) and 93 (J), when the player operates the select button 68 in the second period, the fluctuation during the second period ends. After that, a suggestion image suggesting that the effect mode is switched is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 94 and 95.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 (E) to 93 (G), when the player operates the select button 68 in the second period, the fluctuation during the second period is followed. The effect mode is switched when the speed is changed, and the effect mode suggestion image suggesting the effect mode after the switch is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 94 and 95.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 (J) to 93 (M), when the player operates the select button 68 in the second period, the fluctuation during the second period ends. The effect mode is switched on the standby screen after switching, and the effect mode suggestion image suggesting the effect mode after the switch is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 94 and 95.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, after the first period, the second period is started when the moving speeds of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 change. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the effect mode selection effect.
[Modification 1]
The contents of the effect mode selection effects A to C may be combined as appropriate.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images and an operation means that can be operated by a player.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
A first period in which the effect mode can be switched by the operation of the operation means by the player during the change of the decorative pattern, and
After the first period, in the same fluctuation as the first period, it is possible to execute an effect having a second period in which the effect mode is not switched despite the operation of the operation means by the player. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1.
When the player operates the operating means in the second period, the effect mode is not switched in the second period, and the effect mode is switched after the fluctuation during the second period is completed. The production can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B5-2.
When the player operates the operating means during the second period, a suggestion image suggesting that the effect mode is switched after the variation during the second period is completed is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-3.
When the player operates the operating means in the second period, the effect mode is switched at the time of the next change of the change during the second period, and the effect suggesting the effect mode after the switch. Mode suggestion image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-3.
When the player operates the operating means in the second period, the effect mode is switched on the standby screen after the fluctuation during the second period is completed, and the effect mode after the switch is changed. Suggestion effect mode Suggestion image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-5.
After the first period, when the moving speed of the decorative symbol changes, the second period is started.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the separated and combined effects A to C of the effect symbols will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. In FIGS. 96 to 98, various movable accessories, various decorative members, and various background images arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings. FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the separation / combination effect A of the effect symbols, FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the separation / combination effect B of the effect symbols, and FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the separation / combination effect C of the effect symbols. It is a figure to do.

In this effect symbol separation and coalescence effect, when the effect symbol composed of the number symbol and the character symbol is separated from the number symbol and the character symbol, the number symbol and the character symbol are combined again. It is a production. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the separation / coalescence effect of the effect pattern is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 to obtain an image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Here, first, the effect symbol will be described, and then the effect symbol separation / combination effect A, the effect symbol separation / combination effect B, and the effect symbol separation / combination effect C will be described in order.

[Direction design]
The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are composed of a number symbol and a character symbol as a three-dimensional image of a coin shape. The character design is a three-dimensional image, and the image is arranged so as to fit within the outer shape of the coin shape. The number pattern is a three-dimensional image, and a part of the number figure is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image. It is in a state of protruding toward the character, arranged on the front side of the character's design, and united, and the numerical design covers at least a part of the character's design. As for the effect symbol, the symbol of the character corresponding to the symbol of the number is attached to the symbol of the number.

Specifically, the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" excluding the number "7" all have the same bright green color. .. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. Each of the numerical symbols (odd number symbol and even number symbol) is composed of different character symbols having a plurality of colors (full color), and the character symbol is displayed in a large size as the main body of the effect symbol. To. Therefore, the size of the numerical symbol is smaller than the size of the character symbol attached to the numerical symbol. In this way, since the numerical symbols (odd-numbered symbols and even-numbered symbols) each have a color, for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same number symbol and temporarily stopped. When the reach is formed and then the production is developed, the player is developed with the color of the number pattern temporarily stopped and displayed as the number of experiences of the production developed via the reach increases. It is possible for the player to have the opportunity to discover the relationship (law) between the production and the production. As a result, the numerical symbols (odd-numbered symbols and even-numbered symbols) each have a color, which can contribute to the improvement of the interest.

Specifically, in the production symbol, the number "1" is attached with the character A, the number "2" is attached with the character B, the number "3" is attached with the character C, and the number "4" is assigned. Is attached with a character D, a character E is attached to the number "5", a character F is attached to the number "6", a character G is attached to the number "7", and a character is attached to the number "8". An H is attached, a character I is attached to the number "9", and a symbol of a different character having a plurality of colors (full color) is attached to each of the symbols of the number. In addition, for example, the character A may be attached to the number "1" and the number "7" and overlap each other, and the character C may be attached to the number "3" and the number "8" and overlap each other. In this case, the number "7" is a character A having a display mode different from that of the character A attached to the number "1", and the number "8" is displayed differently from the character C attached to the number "3". It is assumed that the character C is an aspect.

In the state where the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the center of the number symbol in the effect symbol is arranged on the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. It becomes a state. In the display screen 7a, the vertically long strip-shaped region having a distance length obtained by dividing the horizontal distance dimension of the display screen 7a into three equal parts is the left vertical strip-shaped region as the variable region of the left effect symbol 8L and the middle as the variable region of the middle effect symbol 8C. It is arranged as a right vertical strip region as a variable region of the side vertical strip region and the right effect symbol 8R. In this way, the position where the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed is hereinafter referred to as a “stop position”. It should be noted that the variable effect (variable display) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is different between the separate and combined effect A of the effect symbol and the separate and combined effects B and C of the effect symbol. The explanation will be described later.

Briefly explaining the variable icon and the hold icon, the variable icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A are stocked. You can do it. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged in the order of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and so on, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. Is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the reserved display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). It is larger than the dimension (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad.

[Separation and union production A of production symbols]
Next, the separation / combination effect A of the effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 96. As shown in FIG. 96A, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the symbol 8Lb of the character B is attached to the symbol 8La of the number “2” in which the left effect symbol 8L has a bright blue color at the stop position. The middle effect symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the symbol 8Cb of the character C attached to the symbol 8Ca of the number "3" having a bright green color, and the right effect symbol 8R is the symbol of the number "6" having a bright blue color. The symbol 8Rb of the character F is attached to 8Ra and the display is stopped, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a because the loss is confirmed.

Here, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the hold icon 9A is not digested and there are only three stocked icons. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), the effect symbol is changed (variable display). ) Is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is not digested and only two stocked icons exist. ..

Fluctuation of effect symbol When the effect (variation display) is started, the effect symbol slowly floats slowly from the stop position to the separated and united position separated by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) from the stop position. Move (at low speed).

When the left effect symbol 8L has been moved to the separated and united position, the left effect symbol 8L starts to move vertically from the upper side to the lower side of the left vertical strip-shaped region, whereas the symbol 8Lb of the character B starts to move vertically from the upper side to the lower side. The rightmost point of the elliptical arc curve of the symbol 8La passes through the separation and coalescence position, and the left side is a flat curve that is open. The movement is started in a display mode in which the display screen 7a pops out toward the lower side of the left side. In this way, when the left effect symbol 8L moves to the separated and united position and rises, the left effect symbol 8L starts to be separated into the symbol 8La of the number "2" and the symbol 8Lb of the character B. The left-side variation curve 8LaK is arranged in the left-side vertical strip-shaped region.

When the symbol 8Lb of the character B starts to move to the lower side, the symbol 8Lb of the character C following the symbol 8Lb of the character B (that is, the character corresponding to the symbol 8La of the number "3" following the symbol 8La of the number diagram "2"). The symbol 8Lb) of C has a display mode in which it penetrates from the outside of the upper side of the left vertical strip-shaped region to the inside, and moves downward. When the symbol 8La of the number "2" starts to move clockwise along the left fluctuation curve 8LaK, the symbol 8La of the number "4" following the symbol 8La of the number "3" is on the left side of the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that it penetrates from the upper side to the inside, and moves clockwise toward the separation / coalescence position along the left fluctuation curve 8LaK.

When the right effect symbol 8R has been moved to the separated and united position, the right effect symbol 8R starts to move vertically from the upper side to the lower side of the right vertical strip-shaped region, whereas the number "6" is obtained in the right effect symbol 8R. The front side of the symbol 8Ra so that the leftmost point of the elliptical arc curve passes through the separation and coalescence position and is counterclockwise along the right fluctuation curve 8RaK, which is a flat curve with the right side open. The movement starts in a display mode that pops out toward the lower side of the right side of the display screen 7a. In this way, when the right effect symbol 8R moves to the separated and united position and emerges, the right effect symbol 8R starts to be separated into the symbol 8Ra of the number "6" and the symbol 8Rb of the character F. The right-side variation curve 8RaK is arranged in the right-side vertical strip-shaped region.

When the symbol 8Rb of the character F starts to move to the lower side, the symbol 8Rb of the character G following the symbol 8Rb of the character F (that is, the character corresponding to the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" following the symbol 8Ra of the number diagram "6"). The symbol 8Rb) of G has a display mode in which it penetrates from the outside of the upper side of the right vertical strip-shaped region to the inside, and moves downward. When the symbol 8Ra of the number "6" starts to move counterclockwise along the right fluctuation curve 8RaK, the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" following the symbol 8Ra of the number "6" is displayed on the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that it penetrates from the upper side of the right side to the inside, and moves counterclockwise toward the separation / coalescence position along the right fluctuation curve 8RaK.

When the middle effect symbol 8C has been moved to the separated and united position, the middle effect symbol 8C starts to move the character C symbol 8Cb vertically from the upper side to the lower side of the middle vertical strip-shaped region, whereas the number "3" The symbol 8Ca is leftward along the horizontally long medial variation curve 8CaK, which is a flat curve in which the lowest point of the elliptical curve passes through the separation and coalescence position and is closed. Start moving towards. In this way, when the middle effect symbol 8C moves to the separated and united position and rises, the middle effect symbol 8C starts to be separated into the symbol 8Ca of the number "3" and the symbol 8Cb of the character C. The upper curve portion and the lower curve portion of the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK are arranged in the middle vertical strip-shaped region, whereas the right curved portion of the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK is the middle vertical strip-shaped region. It is arranged in a state of straddling the boundary between the middle vertical strip region and the right vertical strip region, and the left curve part of the middle variation curve 8CaK is from the middle vertical strip region to the left vertical strip region. It is arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the middle vertical band-shaped area and the left vertical band-shaped area.

When the symbol 8Cb of the character C starts to move to the lower side, the symbol 8Cb of the character D following the symbol 8Cb of the character C (that is, the character corresponding to the symbol 8Ca of the number "4" following the symbol 8Ca of the number diagram "3"). The symbol 8Cb) of D is displayed so as to invade from the outside of the upper side of the middle vertical strip-shaped region to the inside, and moves downward. When the symbol 8Ca of the number "3" starts to move to the left along the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK, the symbol 8Ca of the number "4" following the symbol 8Ca of the number "3" is the most of the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK. The display mode is such that it penetrates from the vertical line passing through the upper point to the right side, and moves toward the separation / coalescence position along the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK, while the symbol 8Ca of the number "3" is the middle side fluctuation curve. When the vertical line passing through the uppermost point of 8CaK is reached, the display mode is such that the vertical line is sucked from the left side of the vertical line and disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the effect symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIGS. 96 (C) and 96 (D), the character symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed toward the lower side. Along with the display mode that fluctuates at high speed, the number pattern gradually changes from opaque to translucent at high speed while gradually increasing (accelerating) from low speed along each fluctuation curve. It becomes a variable display mode. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation.

After that, the effect symbol decelerates immediately before the temporary stop, changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and moves to the separated / combined position. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), in the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Lb that invades from the outside of the upper side of the left vertical strip-shaped region to the inside and moves downward gradually from high speed to a speed. While lowering (decelerating), it gradually changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, and the character A's symbol 8Lb moves toward the separation / coalescence position and invades from the upper side of the left side of the display screen 7a to the inside. The number "1" that moves along the left fluctuation curve 8LaK gradually changes from a translucent state to an opaque state while gradually slowing down (decelerating) from high speed. The symbol 8La moves toward the separation / coalescence position. At this time, the symbols of the characters other than the symbol 8Lb of the character A gradually change from the translucent state to the transparent state, and when the symbol 8Lb of the character A arrives at the separated and united position, the state is hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). At this time, the symbols of the numbers other than the symbol 8La of the number "1" gradually change from the translucent state to the transparent state, and when the symbol 8La of the number "1" arrives at the separated and united position, It becomes a hidden state (it disappears from the display screen 7a). When the numerical pattern 8La moving along the left-side fluctuation curve 8LaK invades from the upper side of the left side of the display screen 7a to the inside, it moves only in the left vertical strip-shaped region, and the middle side adjacent to the right side of the left vertical strip-shaped region. Does not invade the vertical strip area.

At the same time that the symbol 8Lb of the character A reaches the separation and coalescence position, the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color also reaches the separation and coalescence position, and the symbol 8La of the number "1" is placed in front of the symbol 8Lb of the character A. It will be in a united state. When the symbol 8La of the number "1" and the symbol 8Lb of the character A are combined at the separated and united position, a part of the symbol 8Lb of the character moves (here, the character A in the symbol 8Lb of the character A). The display mode in which the two corners on the head of the head are closed and opened is repeated). When the symbol 8La of the number "1" and the symbol 8Lb of the character A are united at the separated and united position, the symbol 8La of the number "1" and the symbol 8Lb of the character A remain in this combined state (that is, the symbol 8La of the number "1" and the symbol 8Lb of the character A. In small increments in the vertical direction based on the separation / coalescence position (for example, 2.5mm in the upward direction and 2.5mm in the downward direction (that is, only 5mm in the runout width) based on the separation / coalescence position). )) The moving left effect symbol 8L may be in the state of the first temporary stop display. In this case, a display mode in which a part of the symbol 8Lb of the character A moves may be used, or a stationary display mode in which a part of the symbol 8Lb of the character A does not move may be used.

When the symbol 8La of the number "1" and the symbol 8Lb of the character A are united (or when the first temporary stop display of the left effect symbol 8L is displayed), the right effect symbol 8R is subsequently displayed in FIG. 96. As shown in (F), the character symbol 8Rb that invades from the outside to the inside of the upper side of the right vertical strip-shaped region and moves downward gradually decreases (decelerates) from high speed to opaque from a translucent state. The symbol 8Rb of the character G gradually changes to the state, moves toward the separation and coalescence position, and the numerical symbol 8La that invades from the upper side to the inside of the right side of the display screen 7a and moves along the right fluctuation curve 8RaK is high speed. The speed gradually decreases (decelerates) from the semitransparent state to the opaque state, and the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" having a bright red color moves toward the separation and coalescence position. At this time, the symbols of the characters other than the symbol 8Rb of the character G gradually change from the translucent state to the transparent state, and when the symbol 8Rb of the character G arrives at the separated and united position, the state is hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). At this time, the symbols of the numbers other than the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" gradually change from the translucent state to the transparent state, and when the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" arrives at the separated and united position, It becomes a hidden state (it disappears from the display screen 7a). When the numerical symbol 8Ra that moves along the right fluctuation curve 8RaK invades from the upper side of the right side of the display screen 7a to the inside, it moves only in the right vertical strip-shaped region, and the middle side adjacent to the left side of the right vertical strip-shaped region. Does not invade the vertical strip area.

At the same time that the symbol 8Rb of the character G reaches the separation and coalescence position, the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" having a bright red color also reaches the separation and coalescence position, and the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" is placed in front of the symbol 8Rb of the character G. It will be in a united state. When the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" and the symbol 8Rb of the character G are combined at the separated and united position, a part of the symbol 8Rb of the character moves (here, the character G in the symbol 8Rb of the character G). The display mode of moving the sword held by the right hand up and down is repeated). When the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" and the symbol 8Rb of the character G are united at the separated and united position, the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" and the symbol 8Rb of the character G remain in this combined state (that is, the mutual symbol 8Rb of the character G). In small increments in the vertical direction based on the separation / coalescence position (for example, 2.5mm in the upward direction and 2.5mm in the downward direction (that is, only 5mm in the runout width) based on the separation / coalescence position). )) The moving right effect symbol 8R may be in the state of the first temporary stop display. In this case, a display mode in which a part of the symbol 8Rb of the character G moves may be used, or a stationary display mode in which a part of the symbol 8Rb of the character G does not move may be used.

When the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" and the symbol 8Rb of the character G are united (or when the first temporary stop display of the right effect symbol 8R is displayed), the middle effect symbol 8C is subsequently displayed in FIG. 96. As shown in (G), the character symbol 8Cb that invades from the outside of the upper side of the middle vertical band-shaped region to the inside and moves downward gradually decreases (decelerates) from high speed to opaque from a translucent state. The character F's symbol 8Cb moves toward the separation and coalescence position, and invades from the vertical line passing through the uppermost point of the middle-side variation curve 8CaK to the right side to reach the middle-side variation curve 8CaK. The number symbol 8Ca moving along gradually changes from a translucent state to an opaque state while gradually slowing down (decelerating) from high speed, and the number "6" symbol 8Ca with a bright blue color is separated and united. Move towards position. At this time, the symbols of the characters other than the symbol 8Cb of the character F gradually change from the translucent state to the transparent state, and when the symbol 8Cb of the character F arrives at the separated and united position, the state is hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). At this time, the symbols of the numbers other than the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" gradually change from the translucent state to the transparent state, and when the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" arrives at the separated and united position, It will be in a hidden state (it will be in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a). When the numerical symbol 8Ca moving along the middle-side variation curve 8CaK invades to the right from the vertical line passing through the uppermost point of the middle-side variation curve 8CaK, in addition to the middle-side vertical band-shaped region, the middle-side vertical is long. It may invade and move to the right vertical strip area adjacent to the right side of the strip region, or it may invade and move to the left vertical strip region adjacent to the left side of the middle vertical strip region. In this respect, the number symbols 8Ca moving along the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK are the number symbols 8La moving along the left fluctuation curve 8LaK and the number symbols 8Ra moving along the right fluctuation curve 8RaK. Is different.

At the same time that the symbol 8Cb of the character F reaches the separation and coalescence position, the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" having a bright blue color also reaches the separation and coalescence position, and the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" is placed in front of the symbol 8Cb of the character F. It will be in a united state. When the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" and the symbol 8Cb of the character F are united at the separated and united position, a part of the symbol 8Cb of the character moves (here, the character F in the symbol 8Cb of the character F). The display mode of moving the sword held by the right hand up and down is repeated). When the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" and the symbol 8Cb of the character F are united at the separated and united position, the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" and the symbol 8Cb of the character F remain in this united state (that is, the mutual symbol 8Cb of the character F). In small increments in the vertical direction based on the separation / coalescence position (for example, 2.5mm in the upward direction and 2.5mm in the downward direction (that is, only 5mm in the runout width) based on the separation / coalescence position). )) The moving left effect symbol 8L may be in the state of the first temporary stop display. In this case, a display mode in which a part of the symbol 8Cb of the character F moves may be used, or a stationary display mode in which a part of the symbol 8Cb of the character F does not move may be used.

In this way, when the left effect symbol 8L is in a state where the symbol 8La having the number "1" and the symbol 8Lb of the character A are united (or when the state of the first temporary stop display of the left effect symbol 8L is reached), the character The display mode in which the two corners on the head of the character A in the symbol 8Lb of A are closed and opened is repeated, and then the symbol 8Ra whose right effect symbol 8R is the number "7" and the symbol 8Rb of the character G are arranged. In the combined state (or in the state of the first temporary stop display of the right effect symbol 8R), the display mode in which the sword held by the character G's right hand in the character G symbol 8Rb is moved up and down is repeated, and then. , When the middle effect symbol 8C is in a state where the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" and the symbol 8Cb of the character F are combined (or in the state of the first temporary stop display of the middle effect symbol 8C), the symbol of the character F is displayed. By repeating the display mode of moving the sword held by the right hand of the character F in 8Cb up and down, as shown in FIG. 96 (H), at the separated and united position, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R The number symbol and the character symbol in the above are combined, and a part of the character symbol is moved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (I), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R move from the separated united position to the stop position in a state where the numerical symbol and the character symbol are united. It moves slowly (slowly) in a display mode that slowly precipitates downward, and when it reaches the stop position, it moves in small steps in the vertical direction based on the stop position (for example, 2.5 mm upward based on the stop position). It is in a state of temporary stop display, which is a display mode in which the display mode moves downward by 2.5 mm (that is, the runout width is only 5 mm). The numbers in the left effect symbol 8L are generated by starting the movement of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R from the separated united position to the stop position in a state where the number symbol and the character symbol are united. The symbol 8La of "1" derails from the orbit of the left variable curve 8LaK, the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" in the middle effect symbol 8C derails from the orbit of the middle variable curve 8CaK, and the number "7" in the right effect symbol 8R. The symbol 8Ra of is derailed from the orbit of the right fluctuation curve 8RaK. If the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in the state of the first temporary stop display at the separated and united position, the temporary stop display here becomes the second temporary stop display. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in the state of the second temporary stop display.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop position as shown in FIG. 96 (J), and the symbols of the same number are not aligned, and the loss is confirmed. When the stop display is performed, the display mode in which a part of the character symbol in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is moved ends, and the character symbol becomes a stationary display mode. When the loss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect (variation display) of the above-mentioned effect symbol is started again, and the left If the effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, while the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect are displayed. When the symbols 8R are aligned and stopped and displayed with the same number, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started.

In the separated and united effect A of the effect symbols, the numerical symbol 8La in the left effect symbol 8L invades from the upper side of the left side of the display screen 7a to the inside along the left side variation curve 8LaK, and the left side variation curve 8LaK. It passed the separation and coalescence position, which is the rightmost point, and moved clockwise in a display mode in which it popped out toward the lower side of the left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the numerical symbol 8La in the left effect symbol 8L moved clockwise along the flat left fluctuation curve 8LaK. However, the upper end of the left variable curve 8LaK in which the number symbol 8La in the left effect symbol 8L invades from the upper side of the left side of the display screen 7a to the inside is arranged in the depth direction, and the number symbol 8La in the left effect symbol 8L is displayed on the display screen. By arranging the lower end of the left variable curve 8LaK that protrudes toward the lower side of the left side of 7a toward the front (that is, the upper end of the left variable curve 8LaK is arranged on the back side and the lower end of the left variable curve 8LaK is on the front side). The left fluctuation curve 8LaK may be arranged three-dimensionally (by arranging it). Along with this, the size of the number symbol 8La in the left effect symbol 8L that invades from the upper side of the left side of the display screen 7a to the inside becomes smaller, and the number in the left effect symbol 8L that pops out toward the lower side of the left side of the display screen 7a. The size of the symbol 8La is increased. Along with this, the normal on the surface (front surface) of the number symbol 8La in the left effect symbol 8L moves so as to be parallel to the tangential direction of the left fluctuation curve 8LaK, and in the separated and united position, FIG. 96 The surface (front surface) of the numerical symbol 8La in the left effect symbol 8L shown in (F) faces forward (player side).

Further, the numerical symbol 8Ra in the right effect symbol 8R invades from the upper side of the right side of the display screen 7a to the inside along the right fluctuation curve 8RaK, and determines the separation / coalescence position which is the leftmost point of the right fluctuation curve 8RaK. It passed and moved counterclockwise in a display mode in which it popped out toward the lower side of the right side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the numerical symbol 8Ra in the right effect symbol 8R moved counterclockwise along the flat right fluctuation curve 8RaK. However, the upper end of the right variable curve 8RaK in which the numerical symbol 8Ra in the right effect symbol 8R invades from the upper side of the right side of the display screen 7a to the inside is arranged in the depth direction, and the numerical symbol 8Ra in the right effect symbol 8R is displayed on the display screen. By arranging the lower end of the right variable curve 8RaK that protrudes toward the lower side of the right side of 7a toward the front (that is, the upper end of the right variable curve 8RaK is arranged on the back side and the lower end of the right variable curve 8RaK is on the front side). The right-hand side variation curve 8RaK may be arranged three-dimensionally (by arranging it). Along with this, the size of the number symbol 8Ra in the right effect symbol 8R that invades from the upper side of the right side of the display screen 7a to the inside becomes smaller, and the number in the right effect symbol 8R that pops out toward the lower side of the right side of the display screen 7a. The size of the symbol 8Ra of is increased. Along with this, the normal on the surface (front surface) of the number symbol 8Ra in the right effect symbol 8R moves so as to be parallel to the tangential direction of the right fluctuation curve 8RaK, and in the separated and united position, FIG. 96 The surface (front surface) of the numerical symbol 8Ra in the right effect symbol 8R shown in (G) faces forward (player side).

Further, the numerical symbol 8Ca in the middle effect symbol 8C penetrates to the right from the vertical line passing through the uppermost point of the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK along the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK, and is the most of the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK. It passed through the separation and coalescence position, which is the lower point, and moved clockwise again in a display manner in which it was sucked in from the left side of the vertical line passing through the uppermost point of the middle variation curve 8CaK. At this time, the numerical symbol 8Ca in the middle effect symbol 8C moved clockwise along the planar middle variation curve 8CaK. However, by arranging the uppermost point of the middle-side variation curve 8CaK in the depth direction and arranging the separation and coalescence position which is the lowermost point of the middle-side variation curve 8CaK in the front direction (that is, the middle-side variation). By arranging the uppermost point of the curve 8CaK on the back side and arranging the separation and coalescence position which is the lowermost point of the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK on the front side), the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK is arranged three-dimensionally. May be good. Along with this, a medium effect symbol that invades from the vertical line passing through the uppermost point of the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK to the right side or is sucked from the left side of the vertical line passing through the uppermost point of the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK. The size of the numerical symbol 8Ca in 8C becomes smaller, and the size of the numerical symbol 8Ca in the medium effect symbol 8C passing through the separation / coalescence position which is the lowermost point of the middle variation curve 8CaK becomes larger. Along with this, the normal on the surface (front surface) of the numerical symbol 8Ca in the middle effect symbol 8C moves so as to be parallel to the tangential direction of the right fluctuation curve 8RaK, and is shown in FIG. 96 (G). In front of the separated / combined position, the surface (front surface) of the numerical symbol 8Ca in the middle effect symbol 8C is in a state of facing forward (player side), and when passing through the separated / combined position, It rotates again and moves so that the normal on the surface (front surface) of the numerical symbol 8Ca in the middle effect symbol 8C is parallel to the tangential direction of the right fluctuation curve 8RaK.

Further, the character symbol 8Lb in the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Cb in the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Rb in the right effect symbol 8R move vertically from the upper side to the lower side of each of the vertically elongated strip-shaped regions described above. It started to fluctuate. However, when moving from the upper side to the lower side of each vertically long strip-shaped area, the size of the character's symbol is changed from a small state to a gradually increasing state, and the depth direction is set as a movement display mode of the character's symbol. It may be held so that the character's design approaches from the back side to the front side.

[Separation and union production B of production symbols]
Next, the separation / combination effect B of the effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 97. In the above-mentioned separation / combination effect A of the effect symbols, the effect pattern is executed until the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started and stopped, whereas in the effect symbol separation / combination effect B, the customer waiting state is reached. In the state where the standby screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, the game is executed when the player starts the game and the game ball enters the start port, or the player is playing the game. It is executed when the game screen is switched to the standby screen and displayed on the display screen 7a due to the state that the game ball does not enter the mouth for a while. It is different from the separation / combination effect B of the design. Further, in the separated / combined effect A of the effect symbol, the numerical symbol and the character symbol are separated or combined at the separated / combined position, whereas in the separated / combined effect B of the effect symbol, the stop position is reached. In the above, the separation / combination effect A of the effect symbol and the separation / combination effect B of the effect symbol are different in that the numerical symbol and the character symbol are separated or combined.

Here, the player who sits in front of the gaming machine 1 and plays the game finishes the game and leaves the seat after the loss is confirmed and displayed. In a state where the screens of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are switched to the standby screen in the waiting state for customers, the player (or another player) sits in front of the gaming machine 1 again and plays the game. The case of performing the above will be described.

First, in a state where the standby screen in which the game machine 1 is in the customer waiting state is displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIGS. 97 (A) and 97 (B), the left effect symbol 8L is a character at the stop position. (Here, the display mode in which the two corners on the head of the character A in the symbol 8Lb of the character A are closed and opened is repeated). The middle effect symbol 8C has a display mode in which a part of the character symbol 8Cb moves at the stop position (here, the display mode in which the sword held by the character F's right hand in the character F symbol 8Cb moves up and down is repeated. The right effect symbol 8R has a display mode in which a part of the character's symbol 8Rb moves at the stop position (here, the sword held by the character G's right hand in the character G's symbol 8Rb is moved up and down. The moving display mode is repeated). In other words, although the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R themselves are stopped and displayed at the stop position, one of the character symbols in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. The display mode is such that the part moves, and the number symbol is separated from the character symbol and is hidden (the number symbol disappears from the display screen 7a).

After that, when a player (or another player) sits in front of the game machine 1 and starts the game, and the game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), In order to start the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol, the left effect symbol 8L is united by displaying (appearing) the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color on the front side of the symbol 8Lb of the character A again. In the middle effect symbol 8C, the symbol 8Ca having the number "6" having a bright blue color is displayed (appeared) again on the front side of the symbol 8Cb of the character F and is united. In the right effect symbol 8R, the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" having a bright red color is displayed (appeared) again on the front side of the symbol 8Rb of the character G and is stopped. It will be in the displayed state. When the stop display is performed, the display mode in which a part of the character symbol in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is moved ends, and the character symbol becomes a stationary display mode.

When the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a state where the number symbol and the character symbol are combined, then, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), the effect symbol changes. The effect (variable display) is started, and after the effect symbol moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which the effect symbol once floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) from the stop position (in other words, the effect symbol stops). Since the display was canceled, the display mode was changed so that the effect design was about to move.) Then, the speed gradually increased from low speed toward the lower side, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state at high speed. It becomes a variable display mode. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation.

After that, the effect symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 97 (E), the left effect symbol 8L has a bright blue number at the stop position. The symbol 8La of "2" is attached with the symbol 8Lb of the character B and temporarily stopped, and the symbol 8R of the right effect symbol 8R is attached with the symbol 8Rb of the character F to the symbol 8Ra of the number "6" having a bright blue color. Then, the symbol 8Cb of the character C is attached to the symbol 8Ca of the number "3" in which the middle effect symbol 8C has a bright green color, and the temporary stop display is displayed.

In the state where the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, a part of the symbol 8Lb of the character B moves (here, the two corners on the head of the character B in the symbol 8Lb of the character B are closed. The display mode of opening and closing is repeated). Further, in the state where the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, a part of the symbol 8Rb of the character F moves (here, the sword held by the right hand of the character F in the symbol 8Rb of the character F is moved up and down. The moving display mode is repeated). Further, in the state where the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, a part of the symbol 8Cb of the character C moves (here, the sword held by both arms of the character C in the symbol 8Cb of the character C is moved up and down. The display mode that moves to is repeated). In the state of the temporary stop display, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are further increased in small increments in the vertical direction based on the stop position (for example, in the upward direction based on the stop position. The display mode may be such that the movement is 5 mm and downwards by 2.5 mm (that is, the runout width is only 5 mm).

When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the temporary stop display, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop position as shown in FIG. 97 (F). , The symbols with the same number do not match, and the loss is confirmed. When the stop display is performed, the display mode in which a part of the character symbol in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is moved ends, and the character symbol becomes a stationary display mode. When the loss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In the state of the temporary stop display, if the display mode is such that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R move in small steps in the vertical direction based on the stop position, the display mode moves to the stop position. It will be displayed as stopped.

After that, although the player is playing a game, the state in which the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 continues for a while, which is humiliating to the player, but is shown in FIG. 97 (F). The game screen is switched to the standby screen in which the game machine 1 is in the customer waiting state, and the standby screen is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the game screen is switched to the standby screen, as shown in FIG. 97 (G), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed at the stop position in FIG. 97 (F), are respectively. The number figure is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

Specifically, when the game screen is switched to the standby screen, the left effect symbol 8L stopped and displayed at the stop position in FIG. 97 (F) is separated from the symbol 8Lb of the character B by the symbol 8La of the number "2". The medium effect symbol 8C that is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a) and is only the symbol 8Lb of the character B and is stopped and displayed at the stop position in FIG. 97 (F) is the symbol of the number "3" from the symbol 8Cb of the character C. 8Ca is separated and hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), only the character C symbol 8Cb is displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R stopped and displayed at the stop position in FIG. 97 (F) is a number from the character F symbol 8Rb. The symbol 8Ra of "6" is separated and hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and only the symbol 8Rb of the character F becomes. In other words, although the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R themselves are stopped and displayed at the stop position, one of the character symbols in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. The display mode is such that the part moves, and the number symbol is separated from the character symbol and is hidden (the number symbol disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the figures of each number are separated from the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R and hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the standby screen in which the game machine 1 is in the customer waiting state is displayed. Is displayed on the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 97 (H), a part of the character B's symbol 8Lb in the left effect symbol 8L moves at the stop position (here, the character B's). The display mode in which the two corners on the head of the character B in the symbol 8Lb are closed and opened is repeated), and a part of the symbol 8Rb of the character F in the right effect symbol 8R is displayed. (Here, the display mode in which the sword held by the character F's right hand in the symbol 8Rb of the character F is moved up and down is repeated). The display mode is such that a part of the character C's symbol 8Cb in the middle effect symbol 8C moves (here, the display mode in which the sword held by both arms of the character C in the character C's symbol 8Cb moves up and down is repeated. It has become).

In the separated and united effect B of the effect symbols, the display mode in which a part of the character B symbol 8Lb in the left effect symbol 8L in FIG. 97 (H) moves is the character B symbol 8Lb in the left effect symbol 8L in FIG. 97 (E). The display mode in which a part of the character C in the middle effect symbol 8C in FIG. 97 (H) moves is the same as the display mode in which a part of the character C moves. The display mode is the same as the display mode in which a part of the character C symbol 8Cb in 8C moves, and the display mode in which a part of the character F symbol 8Rb in the right effect symbol 8R in FIG. 97 (H) moves is shown in FIG. 97. This is the same moving display mode as the display mode in which a part of the symbol 8Rb of the character F in the right effect symbol 8R in (E) moves.

After that, when the player plays a game and the game ball finally enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 97 (I), the left effect symbol 8L is bright on the front side of the character A symbol 8Lb. The symbol 8La of the number "2" having a blue color is displayed (appeared) again and is in a state of being united and stopped and displayed, and the middle effect symbol 8C has a bright green color on the front side of the symbol 8Cb of the character F. The symbol 8Ca of the number "3" is displayed (appeared) again and is in a state of being united and stopped and displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R is a number "6" having a bright blue color on the front side of the symbol 8Rb of the character G. The symbol 8Ra of "" is displayed (appeared) again, and is in a state of being united and stopped and displayed. When the stop display is performed, the display mode in which a part of the character symbol in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is moved ends, and the character symbol becomes a stationary display mode. Here, when the player plays a game and the game ball finally enters the first start port 20, the game ball continuously enters the first start port 20, and two hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a. It is in a state where there are only two items that are displayed in the above and are stocked without being digested.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 97 (J), the effect symbol is once again moved upward from the stop position. After moving slowly (at a low speed) in a display mode that floats for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (in other words, the stop display of the effect symbol is canceled, so that the effect symbol is about to move. After that, the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed toward the lower side, and fluctuates at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. When the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed in the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, the hold icon 9A is not digested and only one is in stock.

After that, when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, while the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C. , When the right effect symbols 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same number of symbols, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started.

In the separated and combined effect B of the effect symbols, as shown in FIGS. 97 (A), (B), (G), and (H), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect are displayed during standby. Although the symbol 8R itself is stopped and displayed at the stop position, a part of the character symbol in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R moves, and the number symbol is separated from the character symbol. It was in a state of being hidden (a state in which the numerical symbol disappeared from the display screen 7a). At this time, in addition to the display mode in which a part of the character symbol moves, there may be a case in which each effect symbol itself, which is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image, rotates in a spinning manner. For example, in the left effect symbol 8L, the right side of the left effect symbol 8L rotates to the left side of the left effect symbol 8L toward the front side, or the left effect symbol 8L rotates with the vertical vertical line passing through the center of the coin as the rotation axis. The left side of is rotated to the right side of the left effect symbol 8L facing the front side. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R also rotate in the same manner as the left effect symbol 8L. Of course, when the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R, and the left effect symbol 8L are in a rotating display mode, the display mode in which a part of the character's symbol moves is continued.

Further, in the separated and combined effect B of the effect symbols, as shown in FIGS. 97 (A), (B), (G), and (H), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect are displayed during standby. Although the symbol 8R itself is stopped and displayed at the stop position, a part of the character symbol in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R moves, and the number symbol is separated from the character symbol. It was in a state of being hidden (a state in which the numerical symbol disappeared from the display screen 7a). At this time, the voices such as "game", "still to come", and "waiting" by the voice actors corresponding to the symbols of any of the characters in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are spoken by the speaker 67. It may be output (flowed) from.

[Separation and union production C of production design]
Next, the separation / combination effect C of the effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 98. In the above-mentioned separation / combination effect A of the effect symbols, the effect is executed until the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started and stopped, and in the effect symbol separation / combination effect B, the waiting state is waiting for customers. When the screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, the game is executed when the player starts the game and the game ball enters the start port, or the game ball to the start port of the player playing the game. Is executed when the game screen is switched to the standby screen and displayed on the display screen 7a due to the state in which the ball does not enter for a while. In terms of being executed in the opening screen) or in a specific round (specific round screen) during the game in which profits are given to the player, the separate and combined effects A and B of the effect symbols and the separate and combined effects C of the effect symbols are It's different. Further, in the separated / combined effect A of the effect symbol, the numerical symbol and the character symbol are separated or combined at the separated / combined position, and in the separated / combined effect B of the effect symbol, the numerical symbol is combined with the numerical symbol at the stop position. The character's symbol is separated or merged, and in the effect symbol separation and coalescence effect C, when a hit is displayed, the number symbol and the character's symbol are separated, and when the hit game is completed, the number symbol is completed. And the character's symbol are united, and the separation / combination effect A and B of the effect symbol and the separation / combination effect B of the effect symbol are different.

As shown in FIG. 98 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the symbol 8Lb of the character B is attached to the symbol 8La of the number “2” in which the left effect symbol 8L has a bright blue color at the stop position. The middle effect symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the symbol 8Cb of the character C attached to the symbol 8Ca of the number "3" having a bright green color, and the right effect symbol 8R is the symbol of the number "6" having a bright blue color. The symbol 8Rb of the character F is attached to 8Ra and the display is stopped, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a because the loss is confirmed.

Here, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon is not displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the hold icon 9A is not digested and there are only two stocked icons. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the effect symbol changes (variable display). ) Is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed in the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, the hold icon 9A is not digested and only one is in stock.

Fluctuations of the effect symbol When the effect (variation display) is started, the effect symbol moves slowly (in other words, at a low speed) in a display mode in which the effect symbol once floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) from the stop position. And, since the stop display of the effect symbol was canceled, the effect pattern was changed to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from low speed toward the lower side. It becomes a display mode that changes to and changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation.

After that, the effect symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the left effect symbol 8L has a bright blue number at the stop position. The symbol 8Lb of the character F is attached to the symbol 8La of "6" and temporarily stopped, and the display mode of moving the sword held by the right hand of the character F in the symbol 8Lb of the character F up and down is repeated, and the middle effect symbol 8C is bright. The symbol 8Cb of the character F is attached to the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" having a blue color, and the temporary stop is displayed. The symbol 8Rb of the character F is attached to the symbol 8Ra of the number "6" in which the symbol 8R has a bright blue color, and the temporary stop is displayed. Is done. That is, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the symbols of the same number (here, the symbol of the number "6" having a bright blue color) and temporarily stopped and displayed.

After that, the display mode in which the sword held by the character F's right hand in the symbol 8Lb of the character F is moved up and down ends, the symbol of the character F becomes a stationary display mode, the left effect symbol 8L is stopped and displayed, and the symbol of the character F is stopped. The display mode in which the sword held by the right hand of the character F in 8Cb is moved up and down is completed, the symbol of the character F becomes a stationary display mode, the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped and displayed, and the right hand of the character F in the symbol 8Rb of the character F is displayed. The display mode in which the sword held in is moved up and down ends, the character F symbol becomes a stationary display mode, and the right effect symbol 8R is stopped and displayed. That is, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed together with the symbols having the same number (here, the symbol of the number "6" having a bright blue color).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), the variable display position 9Cd, and the first hold display position 9Ad. -When the 4th hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A are also hidden (when they disappear from the display screen 7a), a large message image MG1 "big hit" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the big hit display. It becomes the screen of.

At the timing when this jackpot display screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, the symbol "6" having a bright blue color from the symbols 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb of the character F in the effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. 8La, 8Ca, and 8Ra are separated from each other.

Subsequently, when the message image MG1 is hidden (when it disappears from the display screen 7a), the jackpot opening is started as shown in FIG. 98 (E), and the same number is displayed on the jackpot opening screen of FIG. 98 (C). Character F symbols 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "character F symbol") in the effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R aligned with the symbol of "6". The display mode is such that a plurality of characters intrude from the upper right side of the display screen 7a toward the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 98 (F), the character F symbol is displayed on the display screen during the jackpot opening (big hit opening screen). A display mode in which a plurality of characters appear (appear) one after another from the upper right side of the display screen 7a toward the lower left side of the display screen 7a and disappear from the lower left side of the display screen 7a is repeatedly performed. The jackpot opening is started, and the character F symbol invading from the upper right side of the display screen 7a has a display mode in which a part of the character F symbol moves (here, the character F in the character F symbol). The display mode in which the sword held by the right hand is moved up and down is repeated).

When the jackpot opening is completed, the symbols of the plurality of characters F are hidden on the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and round 1 is started (the screen of round 1 is displayed) as shown in FIG. 98 (G). Is displayed). On the upper left side of the display screen 7a, a message image MG2 "Round 1" indicating Round 1 is displayed. After that, when the round is digested and the specific land, round 5, is started (the screen of round 5, which is the specific round screen is displayed), as shown in FIG. 98 (H), the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The message image MG3 "Round 5" indicating the round 5 is displayed, and a plurality of symbols of the character F appear (appear) one after another from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a from the lower side of the display screen 7a. The disappearing display mode is repeated. Round 5, which is a specific land, is started, and the character F symbol invading from the upper side of the display screen 7a has a display mode in which a part of the character F symbol moves (here, in the character F symbol). The display mode in which the sword held by the right hand of the character F is moved up and down is repeated). The display mode in which a part of the character F symbol in FIG. 98 (H) moves is the same as the display mode in which a part of the character F symbol in FIGS. 98 (E) and 98 (F) moves. The direction in which the character F symbol in 98 (H) moves (the direction from the upper left side to the lower right side of the display screen 7a (the straight line direction downward to the left)) and the direction in which the character F symbol moves in FIG. 98 (F). (The direction from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a (direction of the vertical line)) is different.

When the round 5 which is a specific land is completed, the symbols of the plurality of characters F are hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and then all the rounds are digested and the jackpot ending is started. As shown in 98 (I), it is large in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number of big hits is "number of big hits: 1" in the upper row, and the number of acquired game balls is "total number: XXX" in the lower row. The message image MG4 is displayed (note that a number is displayed in "XXXX").

At the timing when this jackpot ending screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, the symbols 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra and the character F of the numbers "6" having a bright blue color in the effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. It returns to the state where 8Lb, 8Cb, and 8Rb are united again.

When the jackpot ending is completed, as shown in FIG. 98 (J), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 98 (C) from the jackpot ending screen are stopped. It switches to the game screen in the state of being stopped and displayed at the position and is displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 98 (K), the effect symbol is once again moved upward from the stop position. After moving slowly (at a low speed) in a display mode that floats for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (in other words, the stop display of the effect symbol is canceled, so that the effect symbol is about to move. After that, the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed toward the lower side, and fluctuates at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is not digested and there is no stock at all.

After that, when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, while the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C. , When the right effect symbols 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same number of symbols, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started.

In the separate and combined effect C of the effect symbols, when the round 5 which is a specific land is started, the symbol of the character F moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 98 (G). A display mode in which a plurality of characters appear (appear) one after another and disappear from the lower side of the display screen 7a has been repeatedly performed. At this time, a display mode may be included in which the symbols of other characters appear (appear) from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a and disappear from the lower side of the display screen 7a among the symbols of the character F. .. At this time, the design of the other character is also in a display mode in which a part of the design of the other character moves. In this way, for example, when the screen for switching from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, which is advantageous for the player, is displayed on the display screen 7a after the jackpot game is completed, FIG. 98 (G). ), The screen that switches to the right-handed game may be displayed on the display screen 7a after the jackpot game is completed due to the appearance of the symbols of other characters among the symbols of the character F. Can be given to the player.

Further, in the separation and coalescence effect C of the effect symbols, when the round 5 which is a specific land is started, the symbol of the character F moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 98 (G). A display mode in which a plurality of characters appear (appear) one after another and disappear from the lower side of the display screen 7a has been repeatedly performed. At this time, a part of the character F's symbol was displayed in a moving manner. The display mode in which a part of the character F symbol moves is the same as the display mode in which a part of the character F symbol moves when the temporary stop display is displayed in FIG. 98 (C). However, in FIG. 98 (G), as a display mode in which a part of the symbol of the character F moves, unlike the display mode in which a part of the symbol of the character F moves when the temporary stop is displayed in FIG. 98 (C), the character The display mode may be such that a part of the symbol F has a different operation. In this way, for example, when the screen for switching from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, which is advantageous for the player, is displayed on the display screen 7a after the jackpot game is completed, FIG. 98 (G). ), The screen for switching to the right-handed game may be displayed on the display screen 7a after the jackpot game is completed by setting the display mode so that a part of the character F's symbol behaves differently. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

Further, when the jackpot opening is started, a plurality of characters F symbols appear (appear) one after another from the upper right side of the display screen 7a toward the lower left side of the display screen 7a and disappear from the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The embodiment was repeated. However, in the opposite direction, a plurality of characters F symbols appear (appear) one after another from the lower left side of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and disappear from the upper right side of the display screen 7a. May be. Further, for example, there may be a display mode in which a plurality of characters F's symbols enter the display screen 7a from the outside of the display screen 7a in a swirling manner, and are sucked in and disappear while spinning toward the center of the display screen 7a. In the opposite direction to the above, a display mode may be adopted in which a plurality of characters F's design circulates from the center of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen so as to swirl and disappears. Further, for example, a display mode in which a plurality of symbols of the character F appear (appear) from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear from the left side of the display screen 7a may be repeated, or in the opposite direction. A display mode in which a plurality of symbols of the character F appear (appear) from the left side to the right side of the display screen 7a and disappear from the right side of the display screen 7a may be repeated.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the separation and coalescence effect of the effect pattern.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left effect symbol 8L which is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image, the middle effect symbol 8C which is a coin-type three-dimensional image, and the right effect symbol 8R which is a coin-type three-dimensional image showing the result of the lottery. (Multiple types of images) are stopped and displayed on the image display device 7 (display device) via variable display, and the image display device 7 (display device) has a character symbol (first image) and a numerical symbol (first image). A character symbol (first image) and a numerical symbol (first image) can be displayed from a state in which the character symbol (first image) and the numerical symbol (second image) are separated. After the two images) are combined, the first effect of stopping and displaying the combined character symbol (first image) and the numerical symbol (second image) can be executed. (FIGS. 96 (C) to (J) for the effect symbol separation / combination effect A, FIGS. 97 (A) to (C) for the effect symbol separation / combination effect B, and FIGS. 98 (D) for the effect symbol separation / combination effect C). ~ (J)). According to this configuration, the character symbol (first image) and the number symbol (second image) are combined from the state in which the character symbol (first image) and the number symbol (second image) are separated. Later, since the combined character symbol (first image) and the number symbol (second image) are stopped and displayed, the character symbol (first image) and the number symbol (first image) are displayed. It is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented novel effect of separation and coalescence by 2 images). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first effect of the effect symbol separation / combination effect A of FIG. 96, the effect symbol separation / combination effect B of FIG. 97, and the effect symbol separation / combination effect C of FIG. 98, the character A numerical symbol (second image) is placed and united in the lower center of the symbol (predetermined position of the first image) and in front of the character symbol (first image), and the numerical symbol (second image) is combined. ) Can cover at least a part of the character's design (first image). According to this configuration, even if the character symbol (first image) and the numerical symbol (second image) are separated, the character symbol is in the lower center (predetermined position of the first image) of the character symbol. Since the number symbol (second image) is placed in front of the symbol (first image) and combined, each time it is separated and combined, the character symbol (first image) and the number are combined. Since the positional relationship with the design (second image) does not change, it is less likely to be annoying to the effect of separating and merging the character design (first image) and the numerical design (second image). be able to.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the character symbol (first image) and the numerical symbol (second image) are combined, the combined character symbol (first image) and the numerical symbol (second image) are combined. It is possible to execute a second effect in which at least a part of the character's symbol (first image) moves until the image) is stopped and displayed (separate and combined effect of the effect symbol). A is FIG. 96 (F) to (I), the effect symbol separation / combination effect B is FIG. 97 (E), and the effect symbol separation / combination effect C is FIG. 98 (C). According to this configuration, after the character symbol (first image) and the numerical symbol (second image) are combined, at least a part of the character symbol (first image) is moved. After that, it can be suggested that the character symbol (first image) and the numerical symbol (second image) are stopped and displayed. Further, after the character symbol (first image) and the numerical symbol (second image) are combined, at least a part of the character symbol (first image) is displayed so that the character symbol (first image) moves. It is also possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the timing at which the numerical symbol (second image) is combined with the first image) is the timing of the stop display.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the character symbol (first image) and the numerical symbol (second image) are combined, the combined character symbol (first image) and the numerical symbol (second image) are combined. When the image) is stopped and displayed, a third effect of separating the character symbol (first image) and the numerical symbol (second image) can be executed (effect). FIG. 96 (B) is shown in the separated and combined effect A of the symbol, FIG. 97 (G) is shown in the separated and combined effect B of the effect symbol, and FIG. 98 (D) is shown in the separated and combined effect C of the effect symbol. According to this configuration, when the display is stopped, the character symbol (first image) and the number symbol (second image) are separated from each other, so that the character symbol (first image) is separated. ) And the number pattern (second image) by the player himself to discover the combination of the character pattern (first image) and the number pattern (second image). Can be done.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the character symbol (first image) and the numerical symbol (second image) are combined and displayed as a stop, a standby screen (predetermined screen) and a jackpot opening screen (predetermined screen) are displayed. , It is possible to switch to a specific round screen (predetermined screen) and execute a fourth effect in which at least a part of the character's symbol (first image) moves (separation and coalescence of the effect symbols). FIG. 97 (A), (B), (H) in the effect B, and FIGS. 98 (E), (F), (H) in the effect C, in which the effect symbols are separated and combined. According to this configuration, when the stop display is displayed, the character symbol (first image) and the number symbol (second image) are separated from each other instead of switching to the predetermined screen with the stop display state. Since the display mode is such that at least a part of the character's design (first image) moves, the player's line of sight can be directed to the character's design (first image), which is predetermined. On the screen, the player can be prompted to pay attention to the character's design (first image).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the production symbol separation / combination effect B is shown in FIGS. 97 (A), (B), (H), and the effect symbol separation / combination effect C is shown in FIGS. 98 (E), (F). In the effect of 4, the number pattern (second image) can be hidden on the standby screen (predetermined screen), the jackpot opening screen (predetermined screen), and the specific round screen (predetermined screen). According to this configuration, when the stop display is displayed, the character symbol (first image) and the number symbol (second image) are separated from each other instead of switching to the predetermined screen with the stop display state. In addition, since the numerical symbol (second image) is hidden, the player's line of sight can be directed toward the character's symbol (first image).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the separation / combination effect of the effect pattern.
[Modification 1]
The separation / combination effect A of the effect symbols of FIG. 96, the separation / combination effect B of the effect symbols of FIG. 97, and the separation / combination effect C of the effect symbols of FIG. 98 are based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It was to be done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the separated and combined effect B of the effect symbols of FIG. 97 and the separated and combined effect C of the effect symbols of FIG. 98, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It was displayed fluctuating toward. However, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R may be variablely displayed from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this case, in the display area 7a, the horizontal strip-shaped region having a distance length obtained by dividing the vertical distance dimension of the display area 7a into three equal parts is the upper horizontal strip-shaped region as a variable region of the left effect symbol 8L arranged on the uppermost side. The middle horizontal strip-shaped region is arranged as the variable region of the middle effect symbol 8C arranged on the middle side, and the lower horizontal strip-shaped region is arranged as the variable region of the right effect symbol 8R arranged on the lowermost side.

[Modification 3]
In the separated and combined effect A of the effect symbol of FIG. 96, the separated and combined effect B of the effect symbol of FIG. 97, and the separated and combined effect C of the effect symbol of FIG. 98, the left effect symbol 8L which is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image and the coin-shaped three-dimensional image At least a part of the character symbol (first image) in the middle effect symbol 8C, which is an image, and the right effect symbol 8R (a plurality of types of images), which is a coin-shaped stereoscopic image, is displayed in a moving manner. However, the display mode in which the character symbol (first image) moves within the coin outline of the coin-shaped stereoscopic image may be used. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to increasing the player's interest in the separation and coalescence effect of the effect pattern by increasing the variation to the display mode in which the character symbol moves.

[Modification 4]
In the separated and combined effect A of the effect symbol of FIG. 96, the separated and combined effect B of the effect symbol of FIG. 97, and the separated and combined effect C of the effect symbol of FIG. 98, the numerical symbol and the character symbol are separated or combined. Was there. The separated sound may be output (flowed) from the speaker 67 when the numerical symbol and the character symbol are separated, or the combined sound may be output (flowed) from the speaker 67 when the numerical symbol and the character symbol are combined. It may be output (flowed) from. The separated sound and the combined sound include, for example, "Don", "Dung", "Gacha", "Hugh", "Kacha", "Pew", "Picon", etc., and the separated sound and the combined sound are different. Alternatively, the separated sound and the combined sound may be the same sound.

[Modification 5]
In the separated / combined effect A of the effect symbol of FIG. 96, the separated / combined effect B of the effect symbol of FIG. 97, and the separated / combined effect C of the effect symbol of FIG. 98, the number "1" is attached with the character A and the number "2". Is attached with the character B, the number "3" is attached with the character C, the number "4" is attached with the character D, the number "5" is attached with the character E, and the number "6" is attached with the character E. A character F is attached, a character G is attached to the number "7", a character H is attached to the number "8", a character I is attached to the number "9", and a plurality of numbers are attached to each of the numbers. It was composed of different character symbols with the same color (full color). However, when the number symbol and the character symbol are separated and then the number symbol and the character symbol are merged again, the combination of the number symbol and the character symbol is different before and after the separation and coalescence. You may do it. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may be a hit because the combination of the numerical symbol and the character symbol is different before and after the separation and coalescence.

[Modification 6]
In the separated / combined effect A of the effect symbol of FIG. 96, the separated / combined effect B of the effect symbol of FIG. 97, and the separated / combined effect C of the effect symbol of FIG. 98, the effect symbol is composed of a numerical symbol and a character symbol. The design of the character and the design of the character were separated and united. However, for the hold icon and the variable icon, the item symbol and the character symbol may be separated and combined. For example, if the hold icon or variable icon is composed of an item symbol and a character symbol, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is a sword (item symbol) and a warrior character. It is composed of (character design) and the warrior character (character design) is holding a sword (item design) in his right hand. That is, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is in a state where the sword (item symbol) and the warrior character (character symbol) are united. After that, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is changed accordingly. When starting to move to the first hold display position 9Ad, the warrior character (character symbol) throws a sword (item symbol) from the right hand toward the first hold display position 9Ad in a parabolic manner. As a result, the hold icon 9A is in a state in which the sword (item symbol) is separated from the warrior character (character symbol). Then, when the warrior character (character symbol) moves from the second hold display position 9Ad to the first hold display position 9Ad, the warrior character (character symbol) at the first hold display position 9Ad is the sword (of the item) thrown earlier. Since the design) is falling, you will be in a state where you can grab and hold this falling sword (item design) again with your right hand. That is, the hold icon 9A that has moved to the first hold display position 9Ad is in a state in which the sword (item symbol) and the warrior character (character symbol) are united again.

After that, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad starts moving to the variable display position 9Cd, the warrior character (character symbol) moves the sword (item symbol) from the right hand to the variable display position 9Cd. Throw in a parabolic manner. As a result, the hold icon 9A is in a state in which the sword (item symbol) is separated from the warrior character (character symbol). Then, when the warrior character (character symbol) moves from the first hold display position 9Ad to the variable display position 9Cd, the warrior character (character symbol) drops the sword (item symbol) thrown earlier at the variable display position 9Cd. Because it has been done, it will be in a state of grasping and holding this falling sword (design of the item) again with the right hand. That is, the variable icon 9C moved to the variable display position 9Cd is in a state where the sword (item symbol) and the warrior character (character symbol) are united again. In this way, with respect to the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C, it is possible to produce an effect in which the item symbol and the character symbol are separated and united (of course, the item symbol and the character symbol are also used for the hold icon 9B). It is possible to perform a production that separates and coalesces).

[Modification 7]
In the separated / combined effect A of the effect symbol of FIG. 96, the separated / combined effect B of the effect symbol of FIG. 97, and the separated / combined effect C of the effect symbol of FIG. The character's design was arranged so that it fits within the outer shape of the coin. However, instead of the coin-shaped stereoscopic image, it is composed of a numerical symbol and a character symbol as a card-type vertically elongated rectangular stereoscopic image, and the character symbol is arranged so as to fit within the outline of the vertically elongated rectangular shape. You may do so. In this case, the number symbols are arranged in the center of the lower side of the outer shape of the vertically long rectangular shape, and are arranged and united on the front side of the character design so as not to jump out to the outer shape of the vertically long rectangular shape. It may be arranged so as to cover at least a part of the character, or it may be arranged so as to protrude downward from the outer shape of a vertically long rectangular shape and arranged in front of the character's design to be united, and the number's design may be used. It may be arranged so as to cover at least a part of the character's design. Further, instead of the three-dimensional image of the coin shape, the size of the character symbol is not limited within the outer shape of the predetermined shape such as the coin shape, and the effect symbol is a three-dimensional numerical symbol and a three-dimensional character symbol. It may be composed of. In this case, the numerical symbols are arranged and united on the front side of the character symbol, and are arranged so that the numerical symbols cover at least a part of the character symbol.

[Modification 8]
In the separated / combined effect A of the effect symbol of FIG. 96, the separated / combined effect B of the effect symbol of FIG. 97, and the separated / combined effect C of the effect symbol of FIG. The character's design is arranged so that it fits within the outer shape of the coin shape, and the numerical design protrudes downward from the lower center of the character's design (that is, the lower center of the outer shape of the coin shape). It was placed in front of the character's symbol and united, and the number symbol covered at least a part of the character's symbol. However, as long as the number symbol covers at least a part of the character symbol, it may be in another position. For example, the number symbol may be placed at the center of the character symbol (the center point of the coin). good.

[Modification 9]
The separated and combined effect A of the effect symbol of FIG. 96, the separated and combined effect B of the effect symbol of FIG. 97, and the separated and combined effect C of the effect symbol of FIG. 98 may not have a part of the described effect, and others. The effect of may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B6-1]
It is a gaming machine that displays multiple types of images showing the results of a lottery on a display device via variable display and then stops and displays them.
The display device can display a first image and a second image different from the first image.
After the first image and the second image are united from the state in which the first image and the second image are separated, the combined first image and the second image are stopped and displayed. Perform the production of
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1.
In the first effect, the second image is arranged and united at a predetermined position of the first image on the front side of the first image, and at least a part of the first image is displayed in the second image. cover,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B6-2.
After the first image and the second image are combined, at least a part of the first image moves until the combined first image and the second image are stopped and displayed. Perform 2 productions,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-3.
After the first image and the second image are combined, when the combined first image and the second image are stopped and displayed, the first image and the second image are separated thereafter. Perform the third production,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-4.
After the first image and the second image are combined and stopped and displayed, the screen is switched to a predetermined screen to execute a fourth effect in which at least a part of the first image moves.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B6-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B6-5.
In the fourth effect, the second image is hidden on the predetermined screen.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the character suggestion effects A to C straddling a plurality of fluctuations will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. In FIGS. 99 to 101, various movable accessories, various decorative members, and various background images arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings. FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining a character suggestion effect A straddling a plurality of fluctuations, FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining a character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations, and FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining a character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations. It is a figure for demonstrating the character suggestion effect C.

This character suggestion effect that straddles a plurality of fluctuations is an effect in which a character appears, and then the character is used as a fluctuation icon, and in the plurality of fluctuations, the degree of expectation of a hit for the fluctuation is suggested. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 when an instruction to execute a character suggestion effect straddling a plurality of fluctuations is included. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, the effect symbol will be described first, and the character suggestion effect A straddling a plurality of variations, the character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of variations, and the character suggestion effect C straddling a plurality of variations will be described in order.

[Direction design]
First, the production design will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. In the variable production (variable display) of multiple production symbols, each production symbol is number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7""→Number" 8 "->Number" 9 "->Number" 1 "->Number" 2 "-> ... The reel is rotated in this order. The number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" excluding the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

Fluctuation of effect symbol When the effect (variation display) is started, the effect symbol stopped and displayed at the stop position once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which it floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm). After that (in other words, since the stop display of the effect symbol was canceled, the display mode is such that the effect symbol is about to move), the speed is gradually increased from low speed toward the lower side from an opaque state. The display mode changes to a translucent state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed at the stop position (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). ). In the state where the temporary stop is displayed, the effect symbol is loosely arranged in small increments in the vertical direction (for example, 2.5 mm in the upward direction and 2.5 mm in the downward direction (that is, only a runout width of 5 mm) based on the stop position). It becomes a moving display mode. The background image is, for example, a normal background image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, a seafloor image, or an underground image, and is a still image or a moving image. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the background image is a normal background image and the city image is displayed.

[Character suggestion effect A that straddles multiple fluctuations]
Next, the character suggestion effect A straddling a plurality of fluctuations will be described with reference to FIG. 99. Here, the number of game balls that have entered the first start port 20 is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a as an image called a hold icon, and the first special figure hold display of the display devices 40 arranged on the game board 2 is displayed. It shall be displayed by the vessel 43a. As described above, the first special figure holding indicator 43a may be described as the storage number (hereinafter, "special figure 1 holding number") of the operation holding (first special figure holding) of the first special symbol display 41a. Yes.) Is displayed.

In the character suggestion effect A that straddles a plurality of fluctuations, the number of reserved balls has reached a predetermined number (here, 3 balls), and the number of balls that have not yet been subjected to the symbol fluctuation (that is, the fluctuation display has not been started yet). When the number of reserved balls (here, 3 balls), which is not the number of balls, reaches a predetermined number, the game is started (executed). It is possible to change the number of reserved balls at which the character suggestion effect A straddling a plurality of fluctuations is started. In the present embodiment, when the waiting screen in the customer waiting state is displayed on the display screen 7a, the player has a pressing operation of the effect button 63 provided on the front frame 53 and a select having up / down / left / right pressing buttons. Various items are displayed by displaying the setting screen by pressing the button 68 (upper pressing operation of the upper pressing button, right pressing operation of the right pressing button, lower pressing operation of the lower pressing button, left pressing operation of the left pressing button). Among them, in the item of "stop notification", the number of reserved balls can be set to either 3 balls (value 3) or 4 balls (value 4). As the default of the stop notification (value set as the initial value at the time of power recovery), 4 balls (value 4) are set as the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that the player has set the number of reserved balls to 3 balls (value 3) as a stop notification.

At the time when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started, there are two reserved balls (special figure 1 reserved number is a value 2), and the four reserved balls in the first special figure reserved indicator 43a of the display group 40. Of the LEDs, the two LEDs from the left are lit (red lit) and the remaining two LEDs are extinguished. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20 during the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol, the number of reserved balls increases from 2 to 3 as shown in FIG. 99 (A). (Fig. 1 The number of holds increases from value 2 to value 3), three LEDs from the left of the four LEDs in the first special figure hold display 43a of the display units 40 are lit (lighted in red), and the remaining one LED is lit. It will be turned off.

In order to notify the player that the number of reserved balls has reached 3 balls, the message image MG "Number of reserved balls: 3 balls" is displayed on the right side of the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the sword is held with the right hand. The holding character CRA (hereinafter, may be referred to as “character CRA in the first posture”) is displayed small on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Although the position where the character CRA is displayed is within the variable region of the left effect symbol 8L, the character CRA is placed behind the left effect symbol 8L and in front of the background image (not shown), so that the left effect symbol 8L is displayed. It is designed not to interfere with visibility.

After that, at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "6" having a bright blue color, the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "5" having a bright green color, and the middle effect symbol 8C is bright. Temporary stop display is performed by the number "7" having a red color, and then, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are stopped and displayed. , Loss is confirmed. At this time, the message image MG is displayed on the right side of the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the character CRA of the first posture is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. It is in a state. At this point, the player has stopped the operation of the handle 60 to suspend the firing of the game ball.

When the four LEDs on the first special figure holding indicator 43a of the indicators 40 shift to the left, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. When this shift is started, the two LEDs from the left are lit (lighted in red) and the remaining two LEDs are turned off.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), the character CRA of the first posture displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a faces the center of the display screen 7a. When the character CRA reaches the center of the display screen 7a by changing its posture while increasing its size, the character CRA is in a posture of holding a sword with both arms (hereinafter, "character CRA of the second posture"). May be described). At this time, the message image MG is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a) on the right side of the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the character CRA moves between the variable region of the left effect symbol 8L and the variable region of the middle effect symbol 8C during or after the movement is completed, the character CRA is shown behind the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C. By arranging it in front of the background image, the visibility of the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C is not impaired.

When the character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, it becomes a fluctuation icon that suggests the degree of expectation of hitting the fluctuation to the player by changing the posture of the character CRA or expanding a part of the character CRA.

The character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA or enlarging a part of the character CRA during the variable production (variable display) of the effect symbol. It is in a state of being. In this way, the posture of the character CRA that has become a variable icon does not change, and a part of the character CRA that has become a variable icon is not enlarged, which suggests to the player that the expectation of hitting the change is low. is doing.

After that, at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color, the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "3" having a bright green color, and the middle effect symbol 8C is bright. Temporary stop display is performed by the number "2" having a blue color, and then, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are stopped and displayed. , Loss is confirmed. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA.

When the four LEDs on the first special figure holding indicator 43a of the indicators 40 shift to the left, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. When this shift is started, only the first LED from the left lights up (lights up in red), and the remaining three LEDs go out.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), the character CRA of the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. The display is continued with the character CRA straddling a plurality of fluctuations.

After that, during the variable production (variable display) of the effect symbol, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the character CRA changes to the third posture in which the sword is released and both arms are spread, and the character in the third posture. The upper body of the CRA (that is, a part of the character CRA) is enlarged and displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. In this way, the posture of the character CRA that has become a variable icon has changed, and further, a part of the character CRA that has become a variable icon has been enlarged, so that the player is not low in expectation of hitting the change. Suggests to. The character CRA in the third posture is arranged behind the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R and in front of the background image (not shown), so that the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect are produced. The visibility of the symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are not impaired.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (G), the character CRA in the third posture is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is provisionally represented by the number "8" having a bright blue color. The stop display is displayed, the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "8" having a bright blue color, and a reach is formed in which the middle effect symbol 8C is changing. If a reach is formed when the character suggestion effect A that straddles a plurality of fluctuations is started, the so-called normal reach is not achieved, and the reach effect has a higher degree of expectation than the normal reach.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. 99 (H), from the screen of the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol. By switching to the battle effect screen, the normal background image, which is a background image, is switched to the battle effect background image, which is a dedicated background image for the battle effect that is not included in the normal background image, and the battle effect is started. The background images for battle production are still images and moving images in the old castle and the base. In this battle production, the character CRA appears again from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a reach production with a high degree set in advance. If the character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, it will be a loss, whereas if the character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, it will be a big hit. The character CRA in the battle effect is a posture different from the first posture to the third posture, and changes to a plurality of types of battle postures.

In the battle production, the character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, and by switching from the battle production screen to the variable display (variable production) screen of the production symbol again, the background image for the battle production is switched to the normal background image. At the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "8" having a bright blue color, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "9" having a bright green color, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed as a bright blue color. The temporary stop is displayed by the number "8" having. When the screen of the battle effect is switched to the screen of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol, the character CRA of the second posture is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (I), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol, are stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. As described above, the character CRA in the second posture is arranged behind the middle effect symbol 8 and in front of the background image (not shown) so as not to impair the visibility of the middle effect symbol 8C. There is.

When the character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, the screen of the battle production is switched to the screen of the variable display (variable production) of the production symbol again, and the left production symbol 8L is bright blue at the stop position. The temporary stop is displayed by the number "8" having a bright blue color, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped by the number "8" having a bright blue color, and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "8" having a bright blue color. It becomes a state. Even if the screen of the battle effect is switched to the screen of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol, the character CRA of the second posture is not displayed again on the display screen 7a. After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed in the same symbol (here, the number "8" having a bright blue color), the hit is confirmed, and multiple fluctuations are straddled. The character suggestion effect A ends. After that, the winning game in which the profit is given to the player is started. In FIG. 99 (E), only the first LED from the left out of the four LEDs in the first special figure hold indicator 43a of the indicators 40 is lit (lights in red), and the remaining three LEDs are turned off. That is, there was one reserved ball that was the target of the character suggestion effect A that straddles multiple fluctuations, but even after the winning game is over, this reserved ball becomes one ball. On the other hand, the character suggestion effect A that straddles a plurality of fluctuations is not performed again.

When the four LEDs on the first special figure holding indicator 43a of the indicators 40 shift to the left, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. When this shift is started, all the LEDs, that is, the four LEDs are turned off.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 99 (J), the posture of the character CRA does not change, but the upper body of the character CRA in the second posture (that is, a part of the character CRA). Is enlarged and displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, and the display is continued with the character CRA straddling a plurality of fluctuations. In this way, although the posture of the character CRA that has become a variable icon does not change, a part of the character CRA that has become a variable icon has been enlarged, so that the degree of expectation for the change is a battle effect. Although it is not high compared to, it suggests to the player that it is not low. In the state where a part of the character CRA in the second posture is enlarged, the character CRA in the second posture is behind the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, and is a background image (not shown). By arranging it in front of, the visibility of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is not impaired.

After that, although a part of the second posture character CRA was enlarged, the character CRA returned to the original size, and at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L was temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5" having a bright green color. , The right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "4" having a bright blue color, and the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color. After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (K), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol, are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the character suggests across multiple fluctuations. Direction A ends. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. The character CRA may be hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a) when the fluctuation is completed.

The player operates the handle 60 again to fire the game ball before the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. After that, two game balls continuously enter the first starting port 20, and two LEDs from the left of the four LEDs on the first special figure hold indicator 43a of the indicators 40 are lit (red lit). ) Then, the remaining two LEDs are turned off.

When the four LEDs on the first special figure holding indicator 43a of the indicators 40 shift to the left, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. When this shift is started, the first LED from the left lights up (lights up in red) and the remaining three LEDs turn off, and as shown in FIG. 99 (L), the effect pattern is varied (variable display). ) Is started, and when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, while the left effect symbol 8L, middle. When the effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same number and displayed as a stop, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started.

In the character suggestion effect A that straddles multiple fluctuations, the message image MG of "number of holds: 3 balls" is displayed, and when the character CRA of the first posture is displayed small on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the player At this point, the operation of the handle 60 was stopped, and the launch of the game ball was interrupted. When the character suggestion effect A straddling a plurality of fluctuations is started (during the execution of the character suggestion effect A straddling a plurality of fluctuations), the player operates the handle 60 again to launch the game ball, and the first start is performed. Even if a game ball enters the mouth 20, the value increases if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not the maximum, but the character suggestion effect A that straddles multiple fluctuations with respect to the increased number of reserved balls is not performed, and multiple Character suggestion across fluctuations Character CRA becomes a fluctuation icon in a state of straddling the number of fluctuations corresponding to the value of the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 at the time when the effect A is started, and suggests the degree of expectation for fluctuations to the player.

In the character suggestion effect A that straddles a plurality of fluctuations, when the number of reserved balls reaches 3, the number of balls that have not yet been subjected to the symbol fluctuation (that is, the number of balls whose fluctuation display has not yet started). In order to notify the player that the number of reserved balls has reached three, the message image MG "Number of reserved balls: 3 balls" is displayed on the right side of the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button 63 may emit light in a predetermined color (for example, emit light in white) together with the message image MG or instead of the message image MG, or the effect button 63 may vibrate. Further, the handle 60 may emit light in a predetermined color (for example, light emission that blinks white) together with the message image MG or instead of the message image MG, or air is sent out from the handle 60 to operate the handle 60. The palm of the player may be stimulated with air.

[Character suggestion effect B that straddles multiple fluctuations]
Next, the character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations will be described with reference to FIG. 100. In the above-mentioned character suggestion effect A that straddles multiple fluctuations, when the number of reserved balls set by the player is reached, the character becomes a fluctuation icon and suggests the degree of expectation for fluctuations across multiple fluctuations. In the character suggestion effect B that straddles multiple fluctuations, the character fluctuates while executing when the number of reserved balls reaches 8 balls, displaying each specific image corresponding to the reserved balls, and suggesting the degree of expectation for the specific image. When it comes to an icon, a character suggestion effect A that straddles multiple fluctuations and a character suggestion effect that straddles multiple fluctuations are suggested in that a specific image collides with the character that has become this variable icon to suggest the degree of expectation for fluctuations. It is different from B.

Here, the number of game balls that have entered the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a as an image called a hold icon, and the display devices 40 arranged on the game board 2 are displayed. It shall be displayed by the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b. As described above, the first special figure holding indicator 43a may be described as the storage number of the operation holding (first special figure holding) of the first special symbol display 41a (hereinafter, referred to as "special figure 1 holding number"). The second special figure holding indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure holding) (hereinafter, "special figure holding"). FIG. 2 may be described as "number of holds").

In the character suggestion effect B that straddles multiple fluctuations, the special figure 1 hold number becomes a value 4, the special figure 2 hold number becomes a value 4, the number of hold balls reaches 8 balls, and it is still used for the symbol change. It starts when the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that does not exist (that is, the number of balls whose fluctuation display has not started yet), reaches eight.

At the time when the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started, the special figure 1 hold number becomes a value 4 and becomes the maximum, the special figure 2 hold number becomes a value 3, the hold ball is 7 balls, and the display device. All four LEDs in the first special figure hold indicator 43a of the class 40 are lit (lighted in red), and after the four LEDs in the second special figure hold indicator 43b of the display class 40, three LEDs are lit from the left (lighting in red). It lights up in red), and the remaining one LED is off. When a game ball enters the second starting port 21 during the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol, the number of reserved special figures 2 changes from a value of 3 to a value of 4 as shown in FIG. 100 (A). The number of reserved balls increased from 7 to 8 balls, all four LEDs in the first special figure holding indicator 43a of the indicators 40 were lit (lighted in red), and the first of the indicators 40. 2 All four LEDs on the special figure hold indicator 43b are lit (lighted in red).

In order to notify the player that the number of reserved balls has reached eight, the message image MG "Number of reserved balls: 8 balls" is displayed on the right side of the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the sword is held with the right hand. The holding character CRA (hereinafter, may be referred to as “character CRA in the first posture”) is displayed small on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Although the position where the character CRA is displayed is within the variable region of the left effect symbol 8L, the character CRA is placed behind the left effect symbol 8L and in front of the background image (not shown), so that the left effect symbol 8L is displayed. It is designed not to interfere with visibility.

After that, at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "6" having a bright blue color, the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "5" having a bright green color, and the middle effect symbol 8C is bright. Temporary stop display is performed by the number "7" having a red color, and then, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are stopped and displayed. , Loss is confirmed. At this time, the message image MG is displayed on the right side of the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the character CRA of the first posture is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. It is in a state. At this point, the player has stopped the operation of the handle 60 to suspend the firing of the game ball.

When the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are stopped and displayed, the identification having a predetermined shape in a row from the upper center of the display screen 7a to the right side. Eight image IGs are arranged side by side. The number of specific image IGs is the total number of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number. In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 hold number is preferentially digested among the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number. Therefore, after all the special figure 2 hold numbers are digested, the special figure 2 hold number is subsequently consumed. Digestion of 1 hold number is started. As a result, the first specific image IG arranged at a specific position slightly to the left of the upper center of the display screen 7a corresponds to the first LED from the left after the four LEDs in the second special figure holding display 43b. The second specific image IG to the right of the first specific image IG corresponds to the second LED from the left after the four LEDs in the second special figure hold indicator 43b, and is the second specific image IG. The third specific image IG to the right of the third specific image IG corresponds to the third LED from the left after the four LEDs in the second special figure hold display 43b, and the fourth specific image IG to the right of the third specific image IG. The image IG corresponds to the fourth LED from the left after the four LEDs in the second special figure holding display 43b, and the fifth specific image IG to the right of the fourth specific image IG is the first special image IG. The sixth specific image IG to the right of the fifth specific image IG corresponds to the first LED from the left after the four LEDs in the figure hold display 43a, and the sixth specific image IG to the right of the fifth specific image IG is 4 in the first special figure hold display 43a. It corresponds to the second LED from the left after one LED, and the seventh specific image IG to the right of the sixth specific image IG is three from the left after the four LEDs in the first special figure holding display 43a. The 8th specific image IG to the right of the 7th specific image IG corresponds to the LED of the eye, and corresponds to the 4th LED from the left after the 4 LEDs in the 1st special figure holding display 43a. Is.

Of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number, the special figure 2 hold number is preferentially digested. Therefore, when the special figure 2 hold number starts to be digested, the second display device 40 is used. The four LEDs on the special figure hold indicator 43b shift to the left. Along with this, the second specific image IG to the eighth specific image IG are also shifted to the left all at once, the first specific image IG is pushed out by the second specific image IG and thrown out from the specific position, and the second specific image is specified to the specific position. The image IG moves, and the subsequent specific image IG also moves. When all the reserved numbers of the special figure 2 are exhausted, the digestion of the reserved numbers of the special figure 1 is subsequently started, and the four LEDs in the first special figure reserved indicator 43a of the indicators 40 are shifted to the left side. Along with this, the 5th specific image IG to the 8th specific image IG are also shifted to the left all at once, the 5th specific image IG is pushed out by the 6th specific image IG and thrown out from the specific position, and the 6th specific image is specified to the specific position. The image IG moves, and the subsequent specific image IG also moves.

The specific image IG represents a difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the specific image IG due to the difference in shape and color. For example, of the five specific image IGs: yellow (gold) star-shaped specific image IG, smile specific image IG, red spherical specific image IG, blue spherical specific image IG, and white spherical specific image IG, yellow. The (gold) star-shaped specific image IG has the highest expectation of hitting, the smiling specific image IG has the second highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical specific image IG has the third highest expectation of hitting. The blue spherical specific image IG has the fourth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical specific image IG has the lowest expectation of hitting.

Here, the first specific image IG is a blue spherical specific image IG, the second specific image IG to the sixth specific image IG are white spherical specific image IGs, and the seventh specific image IG is red. It is a spherical specific image IG, and the eighth specific image IG is a white spherical specific image IG. As described above, the specific image IG is a so-called look-ahead image suggesting a prior result, and the player is highly interested in the eight specific image IGs displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the four LEDs on the second special figure holding indicator 43b of the indicators 40 shift to the left, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started as shown in FIG. 100 (C). When this shift is started, the three LEDs from the left on the second special figure hold indicator 43b are lit (lit in red) and the remaining one LED is turned off, and the second specific image IG to the eighth specific are specified. The image IG also shifts to the left all at once, the blue spherical first specific image IG is pushed out by the second specific image IG and thrown out from the specific position, the second specific image IG moves to the specific position, and the subsequent specific image The IG will continue to move.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started, the character CRA in the first posture displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a changes its posture while increasing its size toward the center of the display screen 7a. When the character CRA reaches the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRA is in a posture of holding a sword with both arms (hereinafter, may be referred to as "character CRA of the second posture"). At this time, the message image MG is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a) on the right side of the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the character CRA moves between the variable region of the left effect symbol 8L and the variable region of the middle effect symbol 8C during or after the movement is completed, the character CRA is shown behind the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C. By arranging it in front of the background image, the visibility of the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C is not impaired.

When the character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, it becomes a fluctuation icon that suggests the degree of expectation of hitting the fluctuation to the player by changing the posture of the character CRA or expanding a part of the character CRA.

The blue spherical first specific image IG thrown out from the specific position collides with the character CRA displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in a parabolic manner and explodes. Due to this explosion, an effect image is displayed. The effect image may suggest to the player by changing the posture of the character CRA or enlarging a part of the character CRA depending on the color and size. The color of the effect image is the same as the color of the specific image IG, or a color of the same type. The shape and size of the effect image are more complicated (for example, a more complicated polygonal shape) as the expectation of hitting suggested by the specific image IG is higher, and the size is also increased.

Although the blue spherical first specific image IG thrown out from the specific position collides with the character CRA and explodes, the posture of the character CRA does not change and a part of the character CRA does not expand. The character CRA in two postures is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In this way, the posture of the character CRA that has become a variable icon does not change, and a part of the character CRA that has become a variable icon is not enlarged, which suggests to the player that the expectation of hitting the change is low. is doing.

After that, at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color, the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "3" having a bright green color, and the middle effect symbol 8C is bright. Temporary stop display is performed by the number "2" having a blue color, and then, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are stopped and displayed. , Loss is confirmed. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA.

When the four LEDs on the second special figure holding indicator 43b of the indicators 40 shift to the left, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started as shown in FIG. 100 (E). When this shift is started, the two LEDs from the left on the second special figure hold indicator 43b are lit (lit in red) and the remaining two LEDs are turned off, and the third specific image IG to the eighth specific are specified. The image IG also shifts to the left all at once, the white spherical second specific image IG is pushed out by the third specific image IG and thrown out from the specific position, the third specific image IG moves to the specific position, and the subsequent specific image The IG will continue to move.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started, the character CRA of the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA, and the character CRA is displayed. Is continued to be displayed in a state where it straddles multiple fluctuations. At this time, the seventh specific image IG changes from the specific image IG of the red sphere to the specific image IG of the yellow (gold) star shape.

The white spherical second specific image IG thrown out from the specific position collides with the character CRA displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in a parabolic manner and explodes, but the attitude of the character CRA changes. There is no character CRA, and a part of the character CRA is not enlarged, and the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In this way, the posture of the character CRA that has become a variable icon does not change, and a part of the character CRA that has become a variable icon is not enlarged, which suggests to the player that the expectation of hitting the change is low. is doing.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned to the same symbol, are stopped and displayed, and the loss continues, and after all the special figure 2 hold numbers are exhausted, the special figure 1 hold is continued. The digestion of numbers begins. After that, the effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol, and are stopped and displayed, and the loss continues. When the LED shifts to, as shown in FIG. 100 (F), the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. When this shift is started, the first LED from the left on the first special figure hold indicator 43a is lit (lit in red), the remaining three LEDs are turned off, and the seventh specific image IG to the eighth are turned off. The specific image IG also shifts to the left all at once, the yellow (gold) star-shaped 7th specific image IG is pushed out by the 8th specific image IG and thrown out from the specific position, and the 8th specific image IG moves to the specific position. do.

The yellow (gold) star-shaped seventh specific image IG thrown out from a specific position collides with the character CRA displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in a parabolic manner and explodes, causing the character CRA to sword. The upper body (that is, a part of the character CRA) in the character CRA in the third posture is enlarged and displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. ing. In this way, the posture of the character CRA that has become a variable icon has changed, and further, a part of the character CRA that has become a variable icon has been enlarged, so that the player is not low in expectation of hitting the change. Suggests to. The character CRA in the third posture is arranged behind the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R and in front of the background image (not shown), so that the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect are produced. The visibility of the symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are not impaired.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (G), the character CRA in the third posture is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is provisionally represented by the number "8" having a bright blue color. The stop display is displayed, the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "8" having a bright blue color, and a reach is formed in which the middle effect symbol 8C is changing. If a reach is formed while the character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations is started, the so-called normal reach is not achieved, and the reach effect has a higher degree of expectation than the normal reach.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, the right effect symbol 8R, and the white spherical eighth specific image IG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. 100 (H), the effect symbols By switching from the variable display (variable effect) screen to the battle effect screen, the normal background image, which is the background image, is switched to the battle effect background image, which is a dedicated background image for the battle effect that is not included in the normal background image. , Battle production starts. The background images for battle production are still images and moving images in the old castle and the base. In this battle production, the character CRA appears again from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a reach production with a high degree set in advance. If the character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, it will be a loss, whereas if the character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, it will be a big hit. The character CRA in the battle effect is a posture different from the first posture to the third posture, and changes to a plurality of types of battle postures.

In the battle production, the character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, and by switching from the battle production screen to the variable display (variable production) screen of the production symbol again, the background image for the battle production is switched to the normal background image. , A white spherical eighth specific image is displayed at a specific position, and at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "8" having a bright blue color, and the middle effect symbol 8C has a number "9" having a bright green color. , And the right effect symbol 8R is displayed as a temporary stop with the number "8" having a bright blue color. When the screen of the battle effect is switched to the screen of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol, the character CRA of the second posture is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (I), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol, are stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. As described above, the character CRA in the second posture is arranged behind the middle effect symbol 8 and in front of the background image (not shown) so as not to impair the visibility of the middle effect symbol 8C. There is.

When the character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, the screen of the battle production is switched to the screen of the variable display (variable production) of the production symbol again, and the left production symbol 8L is bright blue at the stop position. The temporary stop is displayed by the number "8" having a bright blue color, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped by the number "8" having a bright blue color, and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "8" having a bright blue color. It becomes a state. Even if the screen of the battle effect is switched to the screen of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol, the character CRA of the second posture is not displayed again on the display screen 7a. After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed in the same symbol (here, the number "8" having a bright blue color), the hit is confirmed, and multiple fluctuations are straddled. The character suggestion effect B ends. After that, the winning game in which the profit is given to the player is started. In FIG. 100 (F), only the first LED from the left out of the four LEDs in the first special figure hold indicator 43a of the indicators 40 is lit (lit in red), and the remaining three LEDs are turned off. That is, there was one reserved ball that was the target of the character suggestion effect B that straddles multiple fluctuations, but even after the winning game is over, this reserved ball becomes one ball. On the other hand, the character suggestion effect B that straddles a plurality of fluctuations is not performed again.

When the four LEDs in the first special figure holding indicator 43a of the indicators 40 shift to the left, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started as shown in FIG. 100 (J). When this shift is started, all four LEDs in the first special figure holding indicator 43a are turned off, and the white spherical eighth specific image IG is thrown out from the specific position.

The white spherical eighth specific image IG thrown out from the specific position collides with the character CRA displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in a parabolic manner and explodes, but the attitude of the character CRA changes. There is no character CRA, and a part of the character CRA is not enlarged, and the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In this way, the posture of the character CRA that has become a variable icon does not change, and a part of the character CRA that has become a variable icon is not enlarged, which suggests to the player that the expectation of hitting the change is low. is doing.

After that, at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "5" having a bright green color, the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "4" having a bright blue color, and the middle effect symbol 8C is bright. The number "1" with green color indicates a temporary stop display. After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (K), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol, are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the character suggests across multiple fluctuations. Direction B ends. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. The character CRA may be hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a) when the fluctuation is completed.

The player operates the handle 60 again to fire the game ball before the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. After that, two game balls continuously enter the first starting port 20, and two LEDs from the left of the four LEDs on the first special figure hold indicator 43a of the indicators 40 are lit (red lit). ) Then, the remaining two LEDs are turned off.

When the four LEDs on the first special figure holding indicator 43a of the indicators 40 shift to the left, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. When this shift is started, the first LED from the left lights up (lights up in red) and the remaining three LEDs turn off, and as shown in FIG. 100 (L), the effect pattern is varied (variable display). ) Is started, and when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, while the left effect symbol 8L, middle. When the effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same number and displayed as a stop, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started.

In the character suggestion effect B that straddles multiple fluctuations, the message image MG of "number of holds: 8 balls" is displayed, and when the character CRA of the first posture is displayed small on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the player At this point, the operation of the handle 60 was stopped, and the launch of the game ball was interrupted. By starting the character suggestion effect B that straddles a plurality of fluctuations, the number of specific image IGs is reduced. Therefore, when the character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations is started (during the execution of the character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations), the player operates the handle 60 again to launch the game ball, and the first Even if a game ball enters the 1 start port 20 or the 2nd start port 21, the value increases if the special figure 1 hold number is not the maximum, and the value increases if the special figure 2 hold number is not the maximum. The character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations with respect to the increased number of reserved balls is not performed, and the number of specific image IGs is increased so as not to be displayed on the display screen 7a.

In the character suggestion effect B that straddles multiple fluctuations, when the number of reserved balls reaches eight, the number of balls that have not yet been subjected to the symbol fluctuation (that is, the number of balls whose fluctuation display has not yet started). In order to notify the player that the number of reserved balls has reached eight, the message image MG "Number of reserved balls: 8 balls" is displayed on the right side of the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button 63 may emit light in a predetermined color (for example, emit light in white) together with the message image MG or instead of the message image MG, or the effect button 63 may vibrate. Further, the handle 60 may emit light in a predetermined color (for example, light emission that blinks white) together with the message image MG or instead of the message image MG, or air is sent out from the handle 60 to operate the handle 60. The palm of the player may be stimulated with air.

In the character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations, the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 are arranged separately in the game area 3 formed in the game board 2. However, a unitized starting port unit in which the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 are combined may be arranged in the game area 3. For example, the starting port unit is provided with a first starting port 20 on the left side and a second starting port 21 on the right side, and the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 are separated by a predetermined distance (for example, 5 cm). It may be arranged. In this case, the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 may be arranged on the same horizontal line, or the first starting port 20 may be arranged above the second starting port 21. The first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 may be arranged on a straight line descending to the right, or the first starting port 20 may be arranged below the second starting port 21 so that the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 may be arranged on a straight line. The starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 may be arranged on a straight line rising to the right.

Further, one entry port is provided on the upstream side (upper side) of the start port unit, and the game ball that has entered the entry port is distributed to the left downstream side or the right downstream side via the distribution device, and the left downstream side. The game ball distributed to the left downstream side enters the first starting port 20 provided on the left downstream side, and the game ball distributed to the right downstream side enters the second starting port 21 provided on the right downstream side. You may do so. The sorting device has a shape in which the letter Y (or letter T) is turned upside down, and the members of the left side protrusion, the center protrusion, and the right side protrusion are the right end of the left side protrusion at the lower end of the center protrusion. And the left end of the right side protrusion are connected (integrally) and formed, and a through hole is formed at the lower end of the center protrusion. A rotating shaft is inserted through this through hole. As a result, the sorting device is pivotally supported by the rotation axis, so that it can be rotated to the left and tilted (counterclockwise) or rotated to the right and tilted. It can be rotated (rotated clockwise).

When the sorting device is tilted in the direction of distributing the game ball to the left downstream side, the central protrusion prevents the game ball from entering the right downstream side, and in this state. When a game ball enters the entrance, the ball enters the left surface of the central protrusion, collides with the left surface of the central protrusion, flows down to the upper surface of the left protrusion, and pushes the left protrusion downward by the weight of the game ball. The ball enters the first starting port 20 provided on the left downstream side. When the left side protrusion is pushed downward by the weight of the game ball, the distribution device rotates to the left and tilts, and the central protrusion prevents the game ball from entering the left downstream side, and the distribution device becomes the game ball. Will be tilted in the direction of distribution to the right downstream side. In this state, when the game ball enters the entrance again, the ball that has entered collides with the right surface of the central protrusion and flows down to the upper surface of the right protrusion, and the right protrusion is due to the weight of the game ball. Is pushed downward and enters the second starting port 21 provided on the right downstream side. When the right protruding portion is pushed downward by the weight of the game ball, the sorting device rotates to the right and tilts, and the central protruding portion prevents the game ball from entering the right downstream side. In this way, each time the game ball enters the entrance, the distribution device is tilted in the direction of distributing the game ball to the left downstream side and in the direction of distributing the game ball to the right downstream side. It is designed to tilt repeatedly with each other. As a result, the game ball launched by the player by operating the handle 60 enters the ball entry port provided in the start port unit, reaches the value 4 at which the maximum number of reserved figures 1 is reached, and the special figure 2 is reached. When the value 4 at which the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum and the number of balls held reaches 8 balls, the character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations is started.

[Character suggestion effect C that straddles multiple fluctuations]
Next, the character suggestion effect C straddling a plurality of fluctuations will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the above-mentioned character suggestion effect A that straddles multiple fluctuations, when the number of reserved balls set by the player is reached, the character becomes a fluctuation icon, suggesting the degree of expectation for fluctuations across multiple fluctuations, and straddling multiple fluctuations. However, in the character suggestion effect B, when the number of reserved spheres reaches eight, it is executed and the specific images corresponding to the reserved spheres are displayed respectively to suggest the degree of expectation for the specific image, and when the character becomes a variable icon, In contrast to suggesting the degree of expectation for fluctuations by colliding a specific image toward the character that has become this fluctuation icon, in character suggestion effect C that straddles multiple fluctuations, when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a hit. Multiple fluctuations are made in that the game ball enters the second starting port 21 opened to the character and the character becomes a fluctuation icon for the number of reserved balls to the second starting port 21 to indicate the degree of expectation for the fluctuation. The character suggestion effect A straddling the character suggestion effect A, the character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations, and the character suggestion effect C straddling a plurality of fluctuations are mutually different. Further, in the above-mentioned character suggestion effects A and B straddling a plurality of fluctuations, the hold icons 9A and 9B and the fluctuation icons 9C are not displayed at all, whereas in the character suggestion effects C straddling a plurality of fluctuations, the hold icons 9A and 9A are not displayed. The character suggestion effects A and B straddling a plurality of fluctuations are different from the character suggestion effects C straddling a plurality of fluctuations in that 9B and the variation icon 9C are displayed.

First, to briefly explain the variable icon and the hold icon, the variable icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is an image display device. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed on the lower center of the display screen 7a of 7. The area to the left of the variable display position is provided with a first hold display area as the first special figure hold, and the area to the right of the variable display position is provided with the second hold display area as the second special figure hold. Has been done. In the first hold display area, four hold icons 9A can be displayed in a straight line in a straight line, and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a. In the second hold display area, four hold icons 9B can be displayed in a straight line in a straight line, and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Bd are the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd. The display positions 9Bd are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

The variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A and 9B (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon") have different shapes and colors, and the expected degree of winning for the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A and 9B at the time of lottery. Represents the difference between. For example, of the five icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a smile icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon is the most successful. The expectation is high, the smile icon has the second highest expectation, the red spherical icon has the third highest expectation, the blue spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation, and the white spherical icon has the highest expectation. Is the one with the lowest expectation of winning. Therefore, the player is highly interested in the variable icon 9C and the hold icons 9A and 9B. The variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, 9B, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd are on the foremost side. Since they are arranged, the visibility is not hindered by the effect symbols, effect images, characters, and the like.

The character suggestion effect C that straddles a plurality of fluctuations is started when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a hit (a hit for a normal figure) and the auxiliary game for opening the second start opening 21 is started.

The variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started, and then, at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, and the right effect symbol 8R is a number "3" having a bright green color. , And the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped by the number "2" having a bright blue color. After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect are displayed. The symbols 8R are not aligned with the same symbol, they are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the variable icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). Here, before the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the game ball enters the first starting port 20, so that the three hold icons 9A are not digested. It is in stock.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is not digested and only two stocked icons exist. ..

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started and the result of the normal symbol lottery is a hit (normal symbol hit), the auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 is started and is shown in FIG. 101 (B). As shown, a horizontally long strip-shaped telop region TP having a predetermined vertical distance dimension (for example, 25 mm) is arranged and displayed on the foremost side so as to be in contact with the upper left side, upper side, and upper right side of the display screen 7a (appearance). do). A background image is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long strip-shaped telop region TP, and the player is informed that the second starting port 21 is opened on the front side of the background image to facilitate the entry of the game ball. A telop character image TMG that says "Opening ..." is arranged. The telop character image TMG enters the right side of the horizontally long strip-shaped telop region TP from the outside of the upper right side of the display screen 7a, moves toward the left side of the horizontally long strip-shaped telop region TP at a constant speed, and moves toward the left side of the horizontally long strip-shaped telop region TP. The display mode of popping out toward the outside of the left side (that is, the upper part of the left side of the display screen 7a) is repeated. The background image placed in the inner region of the horizontally long strip-shaped telop region TP is opaque with the design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the telop character image TMG that says "Opening ...". There is. The background image arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long strip-shaped telop region TP is opaque to translucent as long as it is an image that can improve the visibility of the telop character image TMG, which is "opening ...". It may be a telop.

Further, in order to encourage the player to enter the game ball into the second starting port 21 (in other words, to inform the player that the second starting port 21 is opened and the game ball is easy to enter). , A character CRA holding a sword in the right hand (hereinafter, may be referred to as "character CRA in the first posture") is displayed small on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed on the left side of the character CRA. The message image MG "Aim!" Is displayed. Although the position where the character CRA is displayed is within the variable region of the right effect symbol 8R, the character CRA is placed behind the right effect symbol 8R and in front of the background image (not shown), so that the right effect symbol 8R is displayed. It is designed not to interfere with visibility. Further, although the position where the message image MG is displayed straddles the variable region of the middle effect symbol 8C and the variable region of the right effect symbol 8R, the message image MG is behind the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R. By arranging it in front of a background image (not shown), the visibility of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R is not impaired.

As shown in FIG. 101 (C), the game ball enters the second start opening 21 when the auxiliary game for opening the second start opening 21 is being performed during the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol. Then, the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd are displayed (appear), and each time the game ball enters the second start opening 21, the hold icon 9B is increased and stocked. .. At this time, the horizontally long strip-shaped telop area TP is displayed and the telop character image TMG "Opening ..." is displayed, and the posture of the character CRA changes to the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The character CRA in the first posture is displayed without doing this, and the message image MG "Aim!" Is displayed on the left side of the character CRA.

When the auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 is completed during the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the horizontally long strip-shaped telop area TP and "opening ..." The telop character image TMG "." Is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and when the auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 is being performed, the ball is entered into the second starting port 21 and held. In order to inform the player of the number of balls that have become balls, the message image MG "Aim!" Is updated and displayed to the message image MG "Get two!". In other words, here, the number of balls that have entered the second starting port 21 and become reserved balls by the time the opening time from the start to the end of the auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 has elapsed. There are two balls. The hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the second hold display position 9Bd, respectively, and there are only two stocked icons that have not been digested by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. It is in a state where only two of them are stocked without being digested by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. At this time, the character CRA in the first posture is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA.

After that, at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "6" having a bright blue color, the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "5" having a bright green color, and the middle effect symbol 8C is bright. When the temporary stop is displayed by the number "7" having a red color, the message image MG is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and then, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol are displayed. 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol, they are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the variable icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). At this time, the character CRA in the first posture is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. At this point, the player has stopped the operation of the handle 60 to suspend the firing of the game ball.

In the present embodiment, of the hold icon 9A stocked by the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 20, and the hold icon 9B stocked by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. Since the hold icon 9B is preferentially digested, the hold icon 9A is subsequently started to be digested after all the hold icons 9B have been digested.

Of the hold icon 9A stocked by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the hold icon 9B stocked by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, priority is given to the hold icon 9B. Since it is designed to be digested, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. To. When the hold icon 9B displayed in the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B displayed in the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd accordingly. However, the hold icon 9B is not digested and only one is in stock. At this time, since the hold icon 9A is not digested, the hold icon 9A is not digested and only two stocked icons exist.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 101 (F), the character CRA of the first posture displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a is placed in the center of the display screen 7a. When the character CRA reaches the center of the display screen 7a by changing its posture while increasing its size toward it, the character CRA is in a posture of holding a sword with both arms (hereinafter, "character in the second posture"). It may be described as "CRA").

Although the character CRA moves between the variable region of the right effect symbol 8R and the variable region of the middle effect symbol 8C during or after the movement is completed, the character CRA is shown behind the right effect symbol 8R and the middle effect symbol 8C. By arranging it in front of the background image, the visibility of the right effect symbol 8R and the middle effect symbol 8C is not impaired. Of course, the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, 9B, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd are as described above. , Because the character CRA is arranged on the foremost side, the character CRA is a variable icon 9C, a hold icon 9A, 9B, a variable display position 9Cd, a first hold display position 9Ad to a fourth hold display position 9Ad, a first hold display position 9Bd ~. It is arranged behind the fourth reserved display position 9Bd, and the visibility is not hindered by the character CRA.

When the character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, the posture of the character CRA may change to give a change to the fluctuation icon suggesting the degree of expectation of hitting the fluctuation. In other words, if the variation icon suggesting the degree of expectation of the variation is the "first variation icon", the character CRA displayed in the center of the display screen 7a changes its own posture to change the first variation icon. It has a function as a "second variable icon" that gives a change to the variable icon 9C. In this way, when the character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, the variable icon is composed of the first variable icon and the second variable icon.

After that, the character CRA in the second posture swings the sword held by both hands toward the variable icon 9C, which is the first variable icon (hereinafter, may be referred to as "character CRA in the third posture"). When changed, the white spherical variable icon 9C changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C. Even if the character CRA in the second posture is changed to the character CRA in the third posture, the white spherical variable icon 9C does not change to another color or shape, and the white spherical variable icon 9C remains. It may be in a state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), the character CRA in the third posture is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is provisionally represented by the number "8" having a bright blue color. The stop display is displayed, the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "8" having a bright blue color, and a reach is formed in which the middle effect symbol 8C is changing. If a reach is formed while the character suggestion effect C straddling a plurality of fluctuations is started, the so-called normal reach is not achieved, and the reach effect has a higher degree of expectation than the normal reach.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, the right effect symbol 8R, the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, 9B, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the first hold display. The position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd are hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. 101 (H), the screen of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol is switched to the screen of the battle effect. As a result, the normal background image which is the background image is switched to the background image for the battle effect which is a dedicated background image for the battle effect which is not included in the normal background image, and the battle effect is started. The background images for battle production are still images and moving images in the old castle and the base. In this battle production, the character CRA appears again from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a reach production with a high degree set in advance. If the character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, it will be a loss, whereas if the character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, it will be a big hit. The character CRA in the battle effect is a posture different from the first posture to the third posture, and changes to a plurality of types of battle postures.

In the battle production, the character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, and by switching from the battle production screen to the variable display (variable production) screen of the production symbol again, the background image for the battle production is switched to the normal background image. , Variable icon 9C, Hold icon 9A, 9B, Variable display position 9Cd, 1st hold display position 9Ad to 4th hold display position 9Ad, 1st hold display position 9Bd to 4th hold display position 9Bd are displayed, and at the stop position. , The left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "8" having a bright blue color, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "9" having a bright green color, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed as a temporary stop by the number "9" having a bright blue color. In "8", the temporary stop is displayed. When the screen of the battle effect is switched to the screen of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol, the character CRA of the second posture is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (I), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol, are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the variation is the first variation icon. Icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. In other words, the variable icon 9C, which is the first variable icon, is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), while the character CRA in the second posture, which is the second variable icon, is displayed. There is.

As described above, the character CRA in the second posture is arranged behind the middle effect symbol 8 and in front of the background image (not shown) so as not to impair the visibility of the middle effect symbol 8C. There is. Of course, the hold icons 9A and 9B, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd are on the foremost side as described above. The character CRA is located behind the hold icons 9A and 9B, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd. The characters are arranged in the CRA so that the visibility is not hindered by the character CRA.

When the character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, the screen of the battle production is switched to the screen of the variable display (variable production) of the production symbol again, and the left production symbol 8L is bright blue at the stop position. The temporary stop is displayed by the number "8" having a bright blue color, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped by the number "8" having a bright blue color, and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "8" having a bright blue color. It becomes a state. Even if the screen of the battle effect is switched to the screen of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol, the character CRA of the second posture is not displayed again on the display screen 7a. After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed in the same symbol (here, the number "8" having a bright blue color), the hit is confirmed, and multiple fluctuations are straddled. The character suggestion effect C ends. After that, the winning game in which the profit is given to the player is started. In FIG. 101 (F), there was one hold icon 9B, that is, there was one hold ball that was the target of the character suggestion effect C straddling a plurality of fluctuations, but it was a hit. Even if the game is completed, the character suggestion effect C straddling a plurality of fluctuations is not performed again for one reserved ball.

When the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect (variation display) of the effect symbol starts as shown in FIG. 101 (J). Will be done. When the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B is not digested and there is no stock at all. At this time, since the hold icon 9A is not digested, the hold icon 9A is not digested and only two stocked icons exist. Since all the hold icons 9B have been digested, the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd may be hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started, the character image PG "PUSH" arranged on the arc is arranged on the foremost side and is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a. The character image PG "PUSH" suggests the pressing operation of the effect button 63 to the player, and is a stereoscopic image with an opaque color. In the character image PG "PUSH", the degree of expectation for changing the posture of the character CRA from the second posture to another posture is higher in the order of white → blue → green → red → purple → yellow (golden). Therefore, the player is highly interested in the character image PG "PUSH". The effect button 63 is also lit in the color attached to the character image PG "PUSH". Here, since the color attached to the character image PG "PUSH" is blue, the effect button 63 is lit in blue.

Even if the player presses the effect button 63, the posture of the character CRA displayed in the center of the display screen 7a does not change from the second posture to another posture at all, and the character CRA in the second posture is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is in a state of being displayed in the center of, and the display is continued in a state where the character CRA straddles a plurality of fluctuations. In this way, since the posture of the character CRA that has become the second variable icon does not change, it is not possible to give a change to the variable icon 9C that is the first variable icon, and the degree of expectation of hitting the change is low. Suggests.

After that, when the character image PG "PUSH" is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a) and the effect button 63 is turned off, the left effect symbol 8L is provisionally represented by the number "5" having a bright green color at the stop position. The stop display is displayed, the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "4" having a bright blue color, and the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color. After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (K), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol, are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the variation is the first variation icon. The icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the character suggestion effect C straddling a plurality of fluctuations ends. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. In other words, the variable icon 9C, which is the first variable icon, is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), while the character CRA in the second posture, which is the second variable icon, is displayed. There is. The character CRA may be hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a) when the fluctuation is completed.

The player operates the handle 60 again to launch the game ball before the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, but the game ball is launched to the first starting port 20. Continues to not enter the ball.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the change effect (variation display) of the effect symbol starts as shown in FIG. 101 (L). Will be done. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is not digested and only one stock is present. .. At this time, since all the hold icons 9B have been digested, the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd are hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed. Then, when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same number, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit starts. Will be done.

In the character suggestion effect C that straddles multiple fluctuations, when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a hit (a normal symbol hit), an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 is started, and the message "Aim!" Is started. The image MG was to be displayed. At this time, the effect button 63 may emit light in a predetermined color (for example, emit light in white) together with the message image MG or instead of the message image MG, or the effect button 63 may vibrate. Further, the handle 60 may emit light in a predetermined color (for example, light emission that blinks white) together with the message image MG or instead of the message image MG, or air is sent out from the handle 60 to operate the handle 60. The palm of the player may be stimulated with air.

Further, in the character suggestion effect C straddling a plurality of fluctuations, when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a hit (a normal symbol hit), an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 has been started. At this time, if the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21 at all, the effect as shown in FIGS. 101 (F) to 101 (K) is not started at all, and the lower right side of the display screen 7a is not started. The character CRA of the first posture displayed on the screen is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad changes as shown in FIG. 101 (L). When the player moves to the display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. In this way, in the character suggestion effect C that straddles a plurality of fluctuations, when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a hit (a normal symbol hit), an auxiliary game for opening the second start opening 21 is started, and the second start opening 21 is started. When at least one game ball enters the ball, the character CRA in the first posture displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a becomes the character CRA in the second posture in the center of the display screen 7a, and the above-mentioned "second fluctuation" is performed. It will have a function as an "icon".

Further, in the character suggestion effect C that straddles a plurality of variations, the variation that is the first variation icon corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R that are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold. The icon 9C was displayed at the variable display position 9Cd displayed on the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, the variable icon 9C and the variable display position 9Cd may not exist in the first place. That is, a first hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold, a second hold display area is provided as the second special figure hold, and the above-mentioned first hold display positions 9Ad to the first hold display area are provided in the first hold display area. 4 Hold display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a, and in the second hold display area, the above-mentioned first hold display position 9Bd to fourth hold display position 9Bd are displayed on the display screen 7a. It is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side. As a result, the character CRA in the first posture appears until the auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 is started and ended (FIGS. 101 (B) to (E)), and the first starting port 20 is reached. Of the hold icon 9A stocked by the entry of the game ball and the hold icon 9B stocked by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the hold icon 9B is preferentially digested. Therefore, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd falls and moves to the left in a parabolic manner and disappears so as to pop out from the lower side of the display screen 7a, the effect pattern changes ( Variable display) is started. When the hold icon 9B displayed in the first hold display position 9Bd falls and moves to the left in a parabolic manner and disappears so as to pop out from the lower side of the display screen 7a, the second hold display position is accompanied by this. The hold icon 9B displayed on 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is in a state in which only one stocked icon 9B is not digested. When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed as a variable icon in the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 101 (F). The character CRA that has become this fluctuation icon is then displayed in a state of straddling a plurality of fluctuations until all the hold icons 9B are exhausted.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the character suggestion effect that straddles multiple fluctuations.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the image display device 7 (display device) displays the left effect symbol 8L (identification symbol), the middle effect symbol 8C (identification symbol), and the right effect symbol 8R (identification symbol) showing the result of the lottery. The image display device 7 (display device) can display the message image MG and the character CRA (multiple types of images), display the character CRA (specific character image), and then display the character CRA (character CRA). The left effect symbol 8L (identification symbol), the middle effect symbol 8C (identification symbol), for each variation display by the character CRA (specific character image), which displays the specific character image) as a variation icon in a state of straddling multiple display variations. It is possible to execute the first effect that suggests the degree of expectation of hitting the variation display of the right effect symbol 8R (identification symbol) (Fig. 99 (A) in the character suggestion effect A that straddles a plurality of fluctuations). ~ (K), FIGS. 100 (A) to (K) in the character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations, and FIGS. 101 (B) to (K) in the character suggestion effect C straddling a plurality of fluctuations. According to this configuration, after the character CRA (specific character image) is displayed, the character CRA (specific character image) becomes a variable icon, and the character CRA (specific character image) which has become a variable icon straddles a plurality of display variations. It is displayed in a state of being displayed, and it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the variation display of the left effect symbol 8L (identification symbol), the middle effect symbol 8C (identification symbol), and the right effect symbol 8R (identification symbol) for each variation display. Therefore, when the character CRA (specific character image) is displayed, it is possible to perform a fanning effect that the character CRA (specific character image) may change to a variable icon, and further, the character CRA (specific character image) is a variable icon. Then, it is displayed in a state of straddling a plurality of display fluctuations, and is a hit against the variation display of the left effect symbol 8L (identification symbol), the middle effect symbol 8C (identification symbol), and the right effect symbol 8R (identification symbol) for each variation display. It is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented and novel effect of suggesting the degree of expectation of. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first character suggestion effect A straddling a plurality of fluctuations in FIG. 99, the character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of variations in FIG. 100, and the character suggestion effect C straddling a plurality of variations in FIG. In the production of, the character CRA (specific character image) is displayed in the first posture on the lower left side (first position) of the display screen 7a or the lower right side (first position) of the display screen 7a, and then the character CRA (specific character) is displayed. The image) can be moved to the center of the display screen 7a (a second position different from the first position) and changed to a second posture different from the first posture to be a variable icon. According to this configuration, the character CRA (specific character image) moves from the first position to the second position, and the posture of the character CRA (specific character image) changes from the first posture to the second posture to change the icon. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner when the character CRA (specific character image) becomes a variable icon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first character suggestion effect A straddling a plurality of fluctuations in FIG. 99, the character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of variations in FIG. 100, and the character suggestion effect C straddling a plurality of variations in FIG. In the production of, the size of the character CRA (specific character image) in the second posture at the center (second position) of the display screen 7a is set to the lower left side (first position) of the display screen 7a or the lower right side of the display screen 7a. It can be made larger than the size of the character CRA (specific character image) in the first posture at the (first position). According to this configuration, the line of sight of the player can be guided to the character CRA (specific character image), and the timing at which the character CRA (specific character image) becomes a variable icon can be more easily understood to the player.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the character CRA (specific character image) is displayed in the first effect of the character suggestion effect A straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 99 and the character suggestion effect B straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 100. It is possible to display the fluctuation of the reserved ball for which the fluctuation display has not been started immediately before the movement is performed. In the character suggestion effect A straddling a plurality of fluctuations in FIG. 99, the number of reservations for the first start port 20: 3 balls are displayed in a variable manner, and in the character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations in FIG. 100, the first start port is displayed. Number of holdings for 20: 4 balls and number of holdings for the second starting port 21: 4 balls are displayed in a variable manner for a total of 8 balls. According to this configuration, if the character CRA (specific character image) does not become a variable icon, the player can use the left effect symbol 8L (identification symbol), the middle effect symbol 8C (identification symbol), and the right effect symbol for each variation display. In order to lose the opportunity to know the degree of expectation of hitting the variation display of 8R (identification symbol), the first start port 20 and the second start port 20 and the second start port try to obtain an opportunity of character suggestion production straddling multiple fluctuations by stocking reserved balls. The game will be continued so that the game ball enters 21. As a result, the player can be encouraged to operate the handle 60.

[Effect 5]
In the first effect of the character suggestion effect C straddling the plurality of fluctuations in FIG. 101 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the character CRA (specific character image) is displayed, the second starting port 21 is opened. By the time the opening time (predetermined time) from the start to the end of the game elapses, it has become possible to display the variable display for a newly reserved ball for which the variable display has not yet started. There is. In the character suggestion effect C straddling a plurality of fluctuations in FIG. 101, the number of reservations for the second starting port 21 due to the start of the auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21: the variation is displayed for two balls. According to this configuration, if the character CRA (specific character image) does not become a variable icon, the player can use the left effect symbol 8L (identification symbol), the middle effect symbol 8C (identification symbol), and the right effect symbol for each variation display. In order to lose the opportunity to know the degree of expectation of hitting the 8R (identification symbol) fluctuation display, stock the reserved balls by the time the opening time (predetermined time) elapses and get the opportunity to produce a character suggestion that straddles multiple fluctuations. Then, the game is continued so that the game ball enters the second starting port 21. As a result, when the auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 is started, the player can be encouraged to operate the handle 60.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second effect of changing the character CRA (specific character image) to the first posture and the third posture different from the second posture at the center (second position) of the display screen 7a is executed. (FIG. 99 (F) in the character suggestion effect A straddling a plurality of fluctuations, FIG. 100 (F) in the character suggestion effect B straddling a plurality of variations). According to this configuration, after the posture of the character CRA (specific character image) changes from the first posture to the second posture, the posture further changes from the second posture to the third posture, so that the variation of the production increases. It is also possible to remind the player that the change from the second posture to the third posture raises the expectation of hitting the change.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second character suggestion effect A straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 99, the character suggestion effect B straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 100, and the character suggestion effect C straddling the multiple variations of FIG. When the reach is formed by the left effect symbol 8L (identification symbol), the middle effect symbol 8C (identification symbol), and the right effect symbol 8R (identification symbol) after the effect of, the expectation of hit is set high in advance. The third effect can be executed (Fig. 99 (H) for the character suggestion effect A straddling multiple fluctuations, FIG. 100 (H) for the character suggestion effect B straddling multiple fluctuations). In the character suggestion effect C straddling the above, FIG. 101 (H). According to this configuration, when the posture of the character CRA (specific character image) changes from the first posture to the second posture, then further changes from the second posture to the third posture, and then reach is formed. , Since the third effect with a high expectation of hit is executed, if a character suggestion effect that straddles multiple fluctuations is performed, a reach may be formed with this as an opportunity. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that there is no such thing and a feeling of expectation for a hit when the reach is formed.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the character suggestion effect that straddles multiple fluctuations.
[Modification 1]
In the character suggestion effect A straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 99, the character suggestion effect B straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 100, and the character suggestion effect C straddling the multiple variations of FIG. It was hidden (it disappeared from the display screen 7a). However, the character CRA may continue to be displayed, and the character CRA may be moved so as to be directly connected to the character CRA in the battle effect to fight against the enemy character CRB.

[Modification 2]
In the character suggestion effect A straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 99, the character suggestion effect B straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 100, and the character suggestion effect C straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 101, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed on the display screen 7a. When displayed in the center of, it was a fluctuation icon that suggests the degree of expectation of hitting the fluctuation to the player by changing the posture of the character CRA or expanding a part of the character CRA. The sound effect may be output (flowed) from the speaker 67 when the posture of the character CRA changes or a part of the character CRA is enlarged. Sound effects include "ton", "schwa", "kakeen", "corn", and "sue". Further, the sound of the character CRA may be output (flowed) from the speaker 67. The voices of the character CRA include "Battle start", "Leave it to me", "Concentrate", "I'm enthusiastic", and "My sword is".

[Modification 3]
In the character suggestion effect A straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 99, the character suggestion effect B straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 100, and the character suggestion effect C straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 101, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed on the display screen 7a. It was displayed in the center of. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture having a specific color may be displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. For example, when the character CRA in the second posture, which is yellow (gold) as a specific color, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, it can be suggested to the player that the character is rich in hitting. In this case, when the character suggestion effect straddling a plurality of fluctuations is started, for example, the character CRA in the second posture shown in FIGS. 99 (C), 100 (C), and 101 (F) is displayed as a normal color. After that, when the fluctuation is hit and rich, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed by switching from the normal color to the specific color.

[Modification 4]
In the character suggestion effect A straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 99, the character suggestion effect B straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 100, and the character suggestion effect C straddling the multiple variations of FIG. It was hidden (it disappeared from the display screen 7a). At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is moved (advanced) downward from the retracted position above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 at the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. After stopping for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the user may return to the retracted position again. In this way, the feeling of loss due to the non-display of the character CRA can be compensated for by the appearance of the second movable accessory 15. Since the movable accessory such as the second movable accessory 15 suggests to the player that the hit expectation is higher than when the movable accessory is not activated, the player can move the second movable accessory. There is a great deal of interest in the operation of movable accessories such as the accessory 15.

[Modification 5]
In the character suggestion effect A straddling multiple fluctuations in FIG. 99, the character suggestion effect B straddling multiple fluctuations in FIG. 100, and the character suggestion effect C straddling multiple fluctuations in FIG. 101, the target of the character suggestion effect straddling multiple fluctuations. When the character suggestion effect that straddles multiple fluctuations is started and ended for the reserved ball that has become, the character CRA is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the player may feel a sense of loss of the character CRA. .. Therefore, after the character suggestion effect straddling a plurality of fluctuations is completed, the second movable accessory 15 is moved from the retracted position above the image display device 7 to the image display device 7 over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, four times). An effect of moving downward (advancing) toward the center of the display screen 7a, stopping at the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then returning to the retracted position is selected. The probability may be set high. Since the movable accessory such as the second movable accessory 15 suggests to the player that the hit expectation is higher than when the movable accessory is not activated, the player can use the second movable accessory. There is a high interest in the operation of movable accessories such as 15. In this way, the character CRA has a high chance of operating the second movable accessory 15 over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, four times) after the character suggestion effect straddling a plurality of fluctuations is completed. The feeling of loss due to the fact that is hidden can be compensated for by the operation of the second movable accessory 15. In addition, instead of the second movable accessory 15, another movable accessory may be operated. Even in this way, the feeling of loss due to the non-display of the character CRA can be compensated for by the operation of the other movable accessory 15.

[Modification 6]
In the character suggestion effect A straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 99, the character suggestion effect B straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 100, and the character suggestion effect C straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 101, the character CRA of the second posture is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the posture of the character CRA is not changed from the second posture to another posture, the posture of the character CRA is simply maintained in the second posture. However, in the display mode of the character CRA in the second posture, the character CRA tries to change from the second posture to the other posture regardless of whether the posture of the character CRA changes from the second posture to the other posture. It may include display modes such as trembling or the character CRA itself holding its breath and holding its force. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know how the character CRA is about to change from the second posture to another posture.

[Modification 7]
In the character suggestion effect A straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 99, the character suggestion effect B straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 100, and the character suggestion effect C straddling the multiple variations of FIG. As a background image, it was usually a city image of a background image. However, at the timing when the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, the background image may be switched to the background image dedicated to the character suggestion effect straddling a plurality of fluctuations. The background image dedicated to the character suggestion effect that straddles multiple fluctuations is not included in the normal background image and is not included in the background image for battle effect, and is displayed only when the character suggestion effect that straddles multiple fluctuations is performed. It is a dedicated background image to be used. As a background image dedicated to character suggestion effect that straddles multiple fluctuations, a still image is gradation in a predetermined color system (for example, a red system, a blue system, a yellow system, etc.) as it spreads radially from the center of the display area 7a. Images, moving images, still images, moving images, etc., which are gradation in a predetermined color system (for example, red system, blue system, yellow system, etc.) as they move up and down from the horizon passing through the center of the display area 7a. .. When the character suggestion effect straddling a plurality of fluctuations is completed, the background image dedicated to the character suggestion effect straddling the plurality of fluctuations is switched again to the normal background image.

[Modification 8]
The character suggestion effect A straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 99, the character suggestion effect B straddling the multiple variations of FIG. 100, and the character suggestion effect C straddling the multiple variations of FIG. It may be possible, or other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine that displays an identification symbol indicating the result of a lottery on a display device via a variable display and then stops and displays it.
The display device can display a plurality of types of images.
After displaying the specific character image, the specific character image is displayed as a variation icon in a state of straddling a plurality of display variations, and the specific character image suggests the degree of expectation for the variation display of the identification symbol for each variation display. The first effect to be done is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1.
In the first effect, after the specific character image is displayed in the first posture at the first position, the specific character image is moved to a second position different from the first position, and the second posture is different from the first posture. Change to the posture and use it as the variable icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B6-2.
In the first effect, the size of the specific character image of the second posture at the second position is made larger than the size of the specific character image of the first posture at the first position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-3.
In the first effect, the variable display is performed for the reserved ball for which the variable display has not been started immediately before the specific character image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-3.
In the first effect, after the specific character image is displayed, by the time a predetermined time elapses, the variable display is variably displayed for the reserved sphere for which the variable display has not yet been started.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-5.
A second effect of changing the specific character image to the first posture and a third posture different from the second posture at the second position is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B6-7]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B6-6.
When a reach is formed by the identification symbol after the second effect, the third effect in which the expectation of hit is set in advance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The melody-related effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104. This melody-related effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the sub control board 90 analyzes the command received from the main control board 80 and includes an instruction to execute the melody-related effect, the sub control board 90 reads out the corresponding acoustic data from the sub ROM 93 and via the voice control board 107. Sound is output from the speaker 67. Further, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the melody-related effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen of the image display device 7 is included. The image is displayed on 7a or the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

FIG. 102 is a first diagram for explaining a melody-related effect. FIG. 103 is a second diagram for explaining a melody-related effect. FIG. 104 is a third diagram for explaining a melody-related effect. The melody-related effect is an effect in which a specific melody starts when the symbol changes, the symbol stops after the symbol changes, and the specific melody ends.

The gaming machine 1 reads out the corresponding acoustic data from the sub ROM 93 and outputs the sound from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 107. The sub ROM 93 stores X melody data, Xf melody data, Xd melody data, and Y melody data as acoustic data. The X melody data is data that causes the speaker 67 to output the X melody. In the X melody, several sounds having a predetermined pitch and length are continuously played back and forth, and the sounds are continuously progressed (played) according to a rhythm, and the performance is completed in a predetermined playing period. As shown in FIG. 102, the X melody includes four parts (bars), an A part, a B part, a C part, and a D part. The gaming machine 1 can repeatedly generate an X melody.

The Xf melody data is data that causes the speaker 67 to output the Xf melody. The Xf melody is a faster tempo of the X melody. Therefore, the period until the performance of the Xf melody is completed (performance period) is shorter than that of the X melody. As shown in FIG. 102, the Xf melody includes four parts (bars), an Af part, a Bf part, a Cf part, and a Df part. The Af part is the tempo of the A part faster, the Bf part is the tempo of the B part faster, the Cf part is the tempo of the C part faster, and the Df part is the tempo of the D part. It's faster. The gaming machine 1 can repeatedly generate an Xf melody.

The Xd melody data is data that causes the speaker 67 to output the Xd melody. The Xd melody is a variation of the tune of the X melody. Here, the sound (scale) is higher than the X melody. The period until the performance of the Xd melody is completed (performance period) is the same as that of the X melody. As shown in FIG. 103, the Xd melody includes four parts (bars) of an Ad part, a Bd part, a Cd part, and a Dd part. The Ad part is the scale of the A part raised, the Bd part is the scale of the B part raised, the Cd part is the scale of the C part raised, and the Dd part is the scale of the D part. It is a high one. The gaming machine 1 can repeatedly generate an Xd melody.

The Y melody data is data that causes the speaker 67 to output the Y melody. As shown in FIG. 103, the Y melody has nothing to do with the X melody, and the playing period is also different from the X melody. Here, the playing period of the Y melody is longer than the playing period of the X melody. The gaming machine 1 can repeatedly generate a Y melody.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the gaming machine 1 can select a plurality of effect modes in which the background image, music, and the like are different during the variation effect in the normal state. The effect mode is switched by the player operating the select button 68. The gaming machine 1 is set with a "battle effect mode", a "dark effect mode", and a "happy effect mode", and one of the effect modes is executed. In the "battle production mode", an image of an enemy character and an ally character fighting is displayed. A dark background is displayed in the "dark effect mode". In the "happy production mode", the background image of the heart is displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L2, the middle decorative symbol 8C2, and the right decorative symbol 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The variable display of special symbols (variation of special symbols) is indicated by, and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. In FIG. 93 (A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the current variation in the special figure (the variation). The effect mode suggestion image is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a, and suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "battle effect mode" is selected here, the character image of the "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the variation pattern executed by referring to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) in steps S1403 and 1409 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) at the start of the variation is performed. Select (FIGS. 24 and 25). When a specific variation pattern (referred to here as “variation pattern 1”) is selected from the variation pattern determination table T6, as shown in FIG. 102, the X melody starts at the start of the variation of the special symbol, and after the symbol variation, An effect is executed in which the symbol stops and the X melody ends. That is, the start and stop of the special figure variation are configured to coincide with the start and stop of the X melody. Here, the playing period of the X melody and the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation coincide with each other. In addition, here, "match" means that there is a general match, and includes those that are slightly different in time (for example, about 2 seconds). Here, since the start and stop of the change of the special symbol coincides with the start and stop of the change of the decorative symbol, the start and stop of the X melody also coincides with the start and stop of the change of the decorative symbol. Further, a silent portion may be included at the start and end of the X melody. Here, the "variation pattern 1" is a variation pattern (FIG. 10) selected in the normal state.

When a variation pattern different from the variation pattern 1 (referred to here as “variation pattern 2”) is selected from the variation pattern determination table T6, the X melody starts with the start of the variation of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 102. During the fluctuation, the X melody of the first day ends, the second X melody starts, the symbol stops after the symbol changes, and the second X melody ends. That is, even in this case, the start and stop of the special figure variation are configured to coincide with the start and stop of the X melody. Here, the playing period of the X melody twice and the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation coincide with each other. In addition, here, "match" means that there is a general match, and includes those that are slightly different in time (for example, about 2 seconds). Here, since the start and stop of the change of the special symbol coincides with the start and stop of the change of the decorative symbol, the start and stop of the X melody also coincides with the start and stop of the change of the decorative symbol. Further, a silent portion may be included at the start and end of the X melody. Here, the “variation pattern 2” is a variation pattern longer than the “variation pattern 1” and is selected in the normal state (FIG. 11).

When a variation pattern different from the variation patterns 1 and 2 (referred to here as “variation pattern 3”) is selected from the variation pattern determination table T6, as shown in FIG. 102, the Xf melody is generated when the variation of the special symbol starts. The effect of starting, stopping the symbol after the change of the symbol, and ending the Xf melody is executed. That is, the start and stop of the special figure variation are configured to coincide with the start and stop of the Xf melody. Here, the playing period of the Xf melody and the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation coincide with each other. In addition, here, "match" means that there is a general match, and includes those that are slightly different in time (for example, about 2 seconds). Here, since the start and stop of the change of the special symbol coincides with the start and stop of the change of the decorative symbol, the start and stop of the Xf melody also coincides with the start and stop of the change of the decorative symbol. Further, a silent portion may be included at the start and end of the Xf melody. Here, the "variation pattern 3" is a variation pattern (FIG. 11) selected in the time saving state.

When a variation pattern different from the variation patterns 1 to 3 (referred to here as “variation pattern 4”) is selected from the variation pattern determination table T6, as shown in FIG. 102, the Xf melody is generated when the variation of the special symbol starts. During the fluctuation, the Xf melody of the first day ends, the second Xf melody starts, the symbol stops after the symbol changes, and the second Xf melody ends. That is, even in this case, the start and stop of the special figure variation are configured to coincide with the start and stop of the Xf melody. Here, the playing period of the Xf melody for two times and the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation coincide with each other. In addition, here, "match" means that there is a general match, and includes those that are slightly different in time (for example, about 2 seconds). Here, since the start and stop of the change of the special symbol coincides with the start and stop of the change of the decorative symbol, the start and stop of the Xf melody also coincides with the start and stop of the change of the decorative symbol. Further, a silent portion may be included at the start and end of the Xf melody. Here, the "variation pattern 4" is a variation pattern (FIG. 11) selected in the time saving state.

As described above, since the fluctuation and stop of the special symbol coincide with the fluctuation and stop of the decorative symbol, the display screen 7a displays the decorative symbol when the first X melody that started with the start of the variation of the decorative symbol ends. (Variation pattern 1) and when the first X melody that started with the start of the change of the decorative symbol ends, the decorative symbol continues to change, and when the second and subsequent X melody ends, the decorative symbol continues. There is a case of stopping (variation pattern 2).

In addition, when the decorative symbol is stopped when the first X melody ends (variation pattern 1), and when the second and subsequent X melody ends, the decorative symbol is stopped according to the number of holds at the start of the fluctuation. The selection ratio with the case of making it (variation pattern 2) may be changed. For example, the fluctuation pattern table T6 (FIG. 10) in the non-time saving state may be changed to the following contents. The "variation pattern P15" of FIG. 10 is set by the above "variation pattern 2", and the "variation patterns P8 to P16" of FIG. 10 are set by the above "variation pattern 1". As a result, when the number of holdings is 1 to 2, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern 2 is 100%, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern 1 is 0%, and the fluctuation time of the loss without reach is always the performance period for two X melody. It will be the same length. On the other hand, when the number of holdings is 3 to 4, the selection rate of the variation pattern 2 is 0%, the selection rate of the variation pattern 1 is 100%, and the variation time of the loss without reach is always the same as the performance period for one X melody. It becomes the length.

The fluctuation pattern table T6 (FIG. 10) in the non-time saving state may be changed to the following contents. The "variation pattern P7" of FIG. 10 is set by the above "variation pattern 1", and all the "variation patterns P8 to P10" of FIG. 10 are set by the above "variation pattern 2". Further, all the "variation patterns P11 to P13" in FIG. 10 are set in the above-mentioned "variation pattern 1", and the "variation pattern P14" in FIG. 10 is set in the above-mentioned "variation pattern 2". As a result, when the number of reservations is 1 to 2, the selection rate of the variation pattern 1 is about 48%, and the selection rate of the variation pattern 2 is about 52%. On the other hand, when the number of reservations is 3 to 4, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern 1 is about 86%, and the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern 2 is about 14%.

Further, the tempo of the X melody may be changed according to the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation. That is, a selection is made between a case where the normal tempo X melody and the fluctuation time are matched according to the number of holdings at the start of the fluctuation (variation pattern 1) and a case where the fast tempo Xf melody and the fluctuation time are matched (variation pattern 3). The ratio may have been changed. For example, the fluctuation pattern table T6 (FIG. 10) in the non-time saving state may be changed to the following contents. The "variation pattern P15" of FIG. 10 is set by the above "variation pattern 1", and the "variation patterns P8 to P16" of FIG. 10 are set by the above "variation pattern 3". As a result, when the number of holds is 1 to 2, the selection rate of the variation pattern 1 is 100%, the selection rate of the variation pattern 3 is 0%, and the variation time of the loss without reach is always the same as the playing period of the X melody. It will be. On the other hand, when the number of holdings is 3 to 4, the selection rate of the variation pattern 1 is 0%, the selection rate of the variation pattern 3 is 100%, and the variation time of the loss without reach is always the same as the playing period of the Xf melody. become.

The fluctuation pattern table T6 (FIG. 10) in the non-time saving state may be changed to the following contents. The "variation pattern P7" of FIG. 10 is set by the above "variation pattern 3", and all the "variation patterns P8 to P10" of FIG. 10 are set by the above "variation pattern 1". Further, all the "variation patterns P11 to P13" in FIG. 10 are set in the above-mentioned "variation pattern 3", and the "variation pattern P14" in FIG. 10 is set in the above-mentioned "variation pattern 1". As a result, when the number of reservations is 1 to 2, the selection rate of the variation pattern 3 is about 48%, and the selection rate of the variation pattern 1 is about 52%. On the other hand, when the number of reservations is 3 to 4, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern 3 is about 86%, and the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern 1 is about 14%.

As shown in FIG. 103, the gaming machine 1 can select a plurality of effect modes in which the background image, music, and the like are different during the variation effect in the normal state. If "variation pattern 1" is selected while the "battle effect mode" is selected, the X melody starts with the start of the change of the special symbol, the symbol stops after the symbol changes, and the X melody ends. If "variation pattern 1" is selected while the "dark effect mode" is selected, the Xd melody starts with the start of the change of the special symbol, the symbol stops after the symbol changes, and the Xd melody ends. If "Variation pattern 1" is selected while "Happy effect mode" is selected, the Y melody is switched to the Y melody that is being played regardless of the timing of the start and stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Since the Y melody has been played in the background since the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the Y melody may start to fluctuate in the middle of the Y melody. In addition, the fluctuation may stop in the middle of the Y melody.

FIG. 104 shows an example of a melody-related effect. Here, an example is shown in which the player switches the production mode from the "battle production mode" to the "dark production mode", the "happy production mode", and the "battle production mode" in the order of the special figure fluctuation. In the "battle production mode", there is no sound before the fluctuation starts. When the special figure change starts, the A part of the X melody flows (is output). If the effect mode is switched to the "dark effect mode" while the A part is finished and the B part is flowing, the Bd part starts from the part after the part produced by the B part. As a result, the same melody continues even when the production mode is switched, and the tune is changed, so that the player can recognize the switching of the production mode without discomfort.

After that, when the production mode is switched to the "happy production mode" while the Bd part is finished and the Cd part is playing, the Y melody being played in the background is switched to. This allows you to enjoy BGM unrelated to the start and stop of fluctuations. After that, when the production mode is switched to the "battle production mode" while the Y melody is playing, it starts from the part corresponding to the fluctuation time (here, in the middle of the D part). Then, the X melody ends in accordance with the stop of the special figure.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the melody-related effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 104, it is possible to execute an effect in which the X melody starts when the special symbol changes, the symbol stops after the special symbol changes, and the X melody ends. According to this configuration, the player can be visually and audibly entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 104, the speaker 67 can repeatedly generate an X melody, and the display screen 7a is the first X melody that starts when the decorative symbol starts to change. When the decorative symbol is stopped when is finished (variation pattern 1), and when the first X melody that started with the start of the decorative symbol fluctuation ends, the decorative symbol continues to change and the second and subsequent X melody There is a case where the decorative symbol is stopped at the end of (variation pattern 2). According to this configuration, the player can be visually and audibly entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a main RAM 84 (FIG. 5) that stores the number of holdings, which is the number of holding lottery, and the display screen 7a corresponds to the number of holdings stored in the main RAM 84. The ratio between the case where the decorative symbol is stopped when the first X melody ends and the case where the decorative symbol is stopped when the second and subsequent X melody ends is changed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually and audibly entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a main RAM 84 (FIG. 5) that stores the number of holds, which is the number of hold lottery, and the speaker 67 has a hold number stored in the main RAM 84 (FIG. 5). The tempo of the X melody is changed accordingly (the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern 1 and the fluctuation pattern 3 is changed). According to this configuration, the player can be visually and audibly entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
As shown in FIGS. 102 to 104, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a display screen 7a for displaying an image corresponding to the currently selected effect mode among the plurality of switchable effect modes, and the speaker 67. Changes the tone of the X melody corresponding to the currently selected production mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually and audibly entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the speaker 67 generates a Y melody different from the X melody when the currently selected effect mode is the happy effect mode, and the display screen 7a is the currently selected effect mode. In the happy effect mode, the variation of the decorative symbol is started and stopped regardless of the start and end of the Y melody. According to this configuration, the player can be visually and audibly entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the melody-related production.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the melody-related effect is an effect in which a specific melody starts when the special symbol changes and the specific melody ends when the symbol stops. However, in the melody-related effect, a specific melody may start when the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts, and the specific melody may end when the normal symbol stops.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, it is assumed that the change start and stop of the special symbol coincides with the change start and stop of the decorative symbol. However, the change start and stop of the special symbol and the change start and stop of the decorative symbol do not have to coincide. In this case, the start and stop of the X melody may coincide with the start and stop of the variation of the special symbol, or may coincide with the start and stop of the variation of the decorative symbol.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, it is assumed that the start and stop of the X melody coincide with the start and stop of the variation of the decorative symbol. The stop of fluctuation here may be a fixed stop or a temporary stop. That is, the timing at which the X melody ends may coincide with the timing of the fixed stop of the decorative symbol, or may coincide with the timing of the temporary stop.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, in the variation pattern 2, it is assumed that the playing period for two times of the X melody and the variation period of the special figure variation coincide with each other. In addition to this, a fluctuation pattern in which the performance period of three or more times of the X melody and the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation coincide with each other may be set.

[Modification 5]
The fluctuation patterns 1 to 4 are a plurality of fluctuation patterns 1 to 4 depending on the game state (non-time reduction state, time reduction state) start port (first start port, second start port), hit / miss, reach presence / absence, and number of holdings. May be selected at a predetermined ratio, or one of the fluctuation patterns 1 to 4 may be selected without fail.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B8-1]
A symbol display means that can display fluctuations and stops of symbols,
A gaming machine equipped with a sound generating means capable of generating a specific melody.
It is possible to execute an effect in which the specific melody starts with the start of the change of the symbol, the symbol stops after the change of the symbol, and the specific melody ends.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-1.
The sound generating means can repeatedly generate the specific melody, and the sound generating means can repeatedly generate the specific melody.
The symbol display means stops the symbol when the first specific melody that starts with the start of the fluctuation of the symbol ends, and the first specific melody that starts with the start of the fluctuation of the symbol. There is a case where the fluctuation of the symbol is continued at the end and the symbol is stopped at the end of the second and subsequent specific melody.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B8-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B8-2, further
It has a storage means for storing the number of holds, which is the number of lottery held.
The symbol display means stops the symbol when the first specific melody ends, and the specific after the second time, according to the number of reservations stored in the storage means. Change the ratio with the case of stopping the symbol when the melody ends,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B8-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B8-2.
It has a storage means for storing the number of holds, which is the number of lottery held.
The sound generating means changes the tempo of the specific melody according to the number of holdings stored in the storage means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B8-1 to B8-4, and further.
It is equipped with a display means for displaying an image corresponding to the currently selected production mode among a plurality of switchable production modes.
The sound generating means changes the tone of the specific melody corresponding to the currently selected production mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B8-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B8-5.
When the currently selected effect mode is a specific effect mode, the sound generating means generates another melody different from the specific melody.
When the currently selected effect mode is the specific effect mode, the symbol display means starts and stops the variation of the symbol regardless of the start or end of the other melody.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Other variants]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than the above may be included.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from a gaming ball to a gaming medal.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an effect button 63, a sword member 65, and a select button 68 as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but the operation unit is not limited to these, and a lever or a lever or the like is provided as an operation unit to be operated by the player. , Triggers and the like may be used. Further, in the display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the sword member 65. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image showing a lever or a trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses a display device (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above.
Further, although the gaming machine 1 includes a sub display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), the display effect performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub display screen 64. The display effect performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

Although this embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments described above are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalent.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 5 ... Board lamp 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (hold icon)
9C ... The pending image (pending icon)
14 ... 1st movable accessory 15 ... 2nd movable accessory 17 ... Large winning opening open start opening 20 ... 1st start opening (1st entry opening)
21 ... 2nd starting port (2nd ball entry port)
64 ... Sub-display screen 69 ... Frame movable accessory 66 ... Frame lamp 81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (6)

It is a gaming machine that displays fluctuations in the symbol and notifies the winner of the lottery according to the stop mode of the symbol.
Execution of an effect that can be executed in parallel with a first effect of moving a plurality of first images in a first direction and a second effect of moving a plurality of second images in a second direction different from the first direction. Equipped with means,
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The effect executing means moves a plurality of third images in either the first effect or the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
The effect executing means can intermittently execute the first effect during the variable display of the symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
The effect executing means can continuously execute the second effect during the variable display of the symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 4.
When all of the symbols are stopped and displayed, the effect executing means stops the execution of the first effect and the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The effect executing means can execute a third effect of moving the second image in a third direction before executing the first effect and the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images